6 ijCM %^C

"^

EDUCATIONAL WORKS
PUBLISHED
r.V

OLIVER and BOYD,

Siixipkin, Marshall,

EdinlDurgh;
Co.,

and

Ijondon.

ENGLISH READING, GRAMIWAR, ETC.

Aemstkong's English Composition, Part I. Is. Gel. Part II Both Parts in one, 3s. Key to ditto English Etymology, 2s. Do. for Junior Classes Child's atory Book. Illustrated Colville's Primer First Headiug-Book, 95 jmges Second Reading-Book, 4d. Third Keading-Book Fourth Keading-Book, 216 pages Fifth Keading-Book, 300 pages Sixth Keading-Book, 394 pages Dalgleish's Outlines of Grammar and Analysis IKey, Is.] Progressive English Grammar [Ket/, 2s. 6d.] Grammatical Analysis, with Exercises \_Key, 2s.] Outlines of Englisli Composition [iTey, 4d.] Introductory Text-Book of English Composition Advanced Text-Bookof English Composition

s.

d.

2 2

4
1

IJ

4 8
1

3 6

2 2

6 6 9
6

*,* Both Text-Books bound together, 2s. 6d. The Douglas's First Book, 2d. Second Book, 4d. Third Book Fourth Book, Is. 6d. Fifth Book, 2s. Sixth Book

2 Key... 2
1

2
1
1

6 6 6 6

6 1 1 Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare. Illustrated Lennie's English Grammar, including Analysis [The Key, 3s. 6d.] 1 6 each 2 M'Culloch's First Book, lid.; or, 2 Parts, in Large Type 10 Second Keading-Book, 3d. Third Reading-Book 1 6 Fourth Keading-Book and Synopsis of Spelling 2 Series of Lessons in Prose and Verse 3 Course of Reading in Science and Literature Manual 01 English Grammar, including Analysis.... 1 6 2 Peyde'b Studies in Composition. For Advanced Classes 6 Reid'b Rudiments of English Grammar, including Analysis 2 Rudiments of English Composition [The Key, 2s. 6d.] Pronouncing Dictionary of the Eng. Language. ..redaeed to 2 6 Robinson Ceusoe. Illustrated. Oliver and Boyd's School Edition 1 each 6 Sessional School Old and New Testament Biography 3 6 Spalding's (Professor) History of English Literature 6 1 White's System of English Grammar, including Analysis

Spelling and Dictation Exercises Selections for Recitation Initiatory English Grammar, including Analysis Principles of English Grammar, including Analysis.... English Etymology, with Exercises Etymological Guide to the English Language

Oliver

and

Boyci's Educational

Works.
s.

GEOGRAPHY.

d.

1 Clyde's Elementary Geography, with 5 coloured Maps 4 School Geography, with 9 coloured Maps DouGLAs'stntroductoryGeography.Bd. Progressive Geography. 1 withlOcoloiiredMaps coloured 3 Maps Text-BookofGeography,2s.6d.; ) 2"\ Lawsok's Geographical Primer ,^-'-'', 2 f Geography of England Geography of Scotland and Ireland... Geography of Europe, 3d. Colonies. 4 J Geography of Asia, Africa, & America Class-Book of Geography, being the above Six Books bound in One Volume, with 7 coloured Maps 1 Geographical First Book, with Diagrams and Map England and Wales, a Geographical Reading-Book for Standard III. Illustrations and Maps 1 Primary Physical Geography, for Standards V. and VI., with diagrams and Maps

Geography of the British Empire

Outlines of Physiography ; in two Parts, 2s. 6d.; Parts sold separately ...each Elements of Physical Geographv, for Standard VIZ.... Text-Book of Physical Geography Olivee and Boyd's Pronouncing Gazetteer, 5s. or with Atlas.. School Atlas, 32 full-coloured Maps Handy Atlas Reid's Rudiments of Modern Geography, with 5 coloured Maps... First Book of Geography (Reid's Rudiments abridged) Reid's (Hugo) Astronomy. Brought down ly liev. Dr Mackay Phys. Geography, with Astronomy (Phys. Chart)..
;

3
1

3
6
1

6 6 6 6

2
1

6 3
1

Stewart's Geog.,withPhys.Geog.andAstron.(llcolouredMaps). 3 White's Abstract of General Geography, with 5 coloured Maps.. 1 System of Modem Geography, 2s. 6d.; with 6 Maps 2

6 9

HISTORY.
Simpson's Goldsmith's England Rome each T ytlee's Elements of General Histoiy 2 Maps, Frontispiece, etc.. White's History of England, Is. 6d. Scotland, Is. Rome History of Great Britain and Ireland, with Map History of France, with Map, 3s. 6d. Sacred History... Outlines of Universal History Elements of Universal History (or in 3 Parts, each 2s. 6d.]
.

3 3
1

6 6 6 6

3
1

2
7

SCHOOL SONGS, WITH MUSIC.

Hunteb's Elements of Vocal Music on the Sol-Fa System School Songs for Junior Classes: 60 Songs, mostly for 2 voices. First Series, 4d. Second Series: 63 Songs... School Songs Ibr Advanced Classes 44 Songs, mostly for 3 voices, First Series, 6d. Second Series 46 Songs ',* Toxic Sol-Fa Edition of both Sevies, Siducedin price : Junior Classes, 2d. Advanced Classes Hcntkb's National School Song Book, compo.sed of 89 Songs, Duets, Trios, Choruses, and Rounds Tonic Sol-Fa. Wade's (Clipt) Songs for Schools, with Accompaniment. Ori^ina^ Second Series [Continued at end of Book.
6 4

6 2 4
6

ITALIAN GRAMMAR.

A THEORETICAL AND TRACTICAL

ITALIAN GRAMMAR
WITU NUMEROUS EXERCISES AND EXAMPLES, ILLUSTRATIVE OF EVERY RULE, AND A SELECTION OF PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

#0r

ibc

cist of Stljools

anb pribufc Stubnits.

BY

E.

LEMMI, LL.D,
; ;

OF THE UNITEBSITT OF PISA ADVOCATE OF FLORENCE ITALIAN TUTOR TO H.B.H. THE PRINCE OF WALES, ETC.

Fourteenth Edition.

EDINBURGH:
OLIVER AND BOYD, TWEEDDALE COURT.
LONDON:

SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,

AND

CO.;

P.

ROLANDI, Bernebs

Street.

'HlNTliD

BY OLIVER AND BOYD, EDINBUUGH

Hi

PREFACE.
The
principal motive which has induced us to prepare this
desire of placing in the

Grammar,

was the

hands of our Pupils a guide to the

Italian language, in accordance with our

own method

of teachiag.

we have succeeded in compiling an number of similar works that have already been published yet we trust that, owing to the simple and practical method we have adopted, this wUl prove of greater
are far from imagining that
lUilian

We

Grammar

superior to the vast

;

utility to the student

than a more finished and complicated work. To circumscribe any language within the limits of precepts is a work

much difficulty, but especially so in the case of the ItaUan language, which never scruples " to snatch a gi-ace beyond the reach of art," by violating even those rules that grammarians attempt most emphatically to enforce. We have therefore been sparing of precept and, mindful that, we were writing for English, and not for Italian students, we have introduced only those theoretical remarks wliich long experience in teaching has shown us to be most useful for a practical and rapid acquirement of the Italian language.
of
;

Each

rule

is

clearly illustrated

by examples and

exercises

and

as

we

consider the best

method

of learning a foreign language to be that

foUowod in the acquirement of one's own, in the beginning we have made use of short and simple phrases, which gradually become more difficult as the work proceeds and towards the end, when the student is supposed to be well grounded in the elementary part of the language, the exercises are stUl more difficult, and the examples are nearly all chosen. from the works of classical authors. In the fii'st lessons we have introduced the two auxiliaries, to have and to be, accompanied by some
;

general rules for the use of verbs, in order that the pupil

may have

some notion of how they should be employed, even before he ima reached the Chapter which treats of them. The method we have adopted of numbering every word that refers to any preceding rule, cannot fail to be most useful in impressing on the mind of learners the subject of each lesson, as it obUges them con-

y\

PREFACE.
and
to reconsider all the rules they have already

stantly to refer to

studied throughout the Gramumr.

As

our design in preparing this book was to offer to the^ English

treatise

student a clear and practical method of acquiring the Italian language,

on the elements and principles of Grammar as a those grammatical definitions and explanations which every educated English person must already know as it is to be supposed that, before attempting to acquire a foreign language, one must have studied one's own. We ofifer our work to our Pupils ; and should we have succeeded in rendering the study of the most classical and beautiful of languages pleasing to them, because clear and simple, we shall esteem ourselves rewarded for the labour we have bestowed on our Italian Grammar.

and not a
study,

we have omitted

CONTENTS.
Ceaptee

I.

II.

On On On On On

the Pkoncxciation,
the Prepositions called Segnacasi,

the Definite Article, the Indefinite Article, the Partitive Article,

of the
.

III.

FoEUATioN

IV. Gen-dee,

....
Plural
of

Nouns,

V.

On

the Adjectite,

Cardinal Numbers,
Ordinal Numbers,
VI.
VII.

On AuGMENTATivES and DmrauTiTES, On C0MPAP.ATIVE3 and Superlatives, YJH. On Personal Pronouns, On Possessive Pronouns, On Demonstative Pronouns, On Relative Pronouns, On Indefinite Adectives and Pronouns On the Particle Si, IX. On Verbs, Table of Eegdlar Verbs,

....
.
.

Irregular Verbs,
Transith-e and Intransitive Verbs,

Reflected and Reciprocal Verbs,

Impersonal Verbs,
.

Observations on Essere and Avere,

On Moods and Tenses, On Will, Shall, Can, May,

Idioms and Rejlaeks on Verbs,

vili

CONTENTS.

ITALIAN ORAMMAR.
ON THE PRONUNCIATION.
The
A,
fl/e,

Italian

Alphabet consists of twenty-two

:

letters,

pro-

nounced as follows
B,
C,

D,
0,
0,

E,

F,

G,
S,
esse,

H,
acca,

I,
e,

J,
ee,

L,
elle,

lee^ tehee, dee,

eh, effay, djee,

M, emme,

N,
eii7ie,

P, R, Q, pea, con, erre,

is

T,
tea,

U,
oo,

V,

Z.

voo, dzeta.

The

letter

used in Italian before some persons of the

it is

present of the indicative of the verb to have, in which ease

mute, and employed only to distinguish those persons of the verb from other words of a different signification Io ho, I have; tu
;

hai,

thou hast; egli ha, he has; eglino hanno, they have.

It is also used in Interjections,

when
it,

it

gives a protracted

sound to the vowel which precedes

alas
!

as.

Deh! pray! Ah!

c-i,

The

letter

is

used between the letters c-e,

g-e, g-i, to

give those letters a hard sound, in order to retain the primitive

sound of their

roots.
cat.

Ca
Ce Che

is

pronounced as ca in the English -nord

...
...

as c^e in as ca as as CO in
as cu in

... ...

cherry.

caper,
chicken.

...
...

as chi in

...
...

Chi

key.
costly.

Go

... ...

... ...
... ...

Cu Ga
Ge Ghe

...
... ...

AH

gain
as

cuckoo. garb.
jelly.

asje in

...

gay.

ON THE PRONUNCIATION.

Gi is pronounced w&ji in the English word Qhi ... as ^? in ...

jig.

gig.

Go

...

as go in as ^00 in as sha in as

...

gospel.

Gu
See
Sci

...
...

... ... ...

good. shape.
she.

...

Gli has no precise corresponding sound in English; that which

most approaches

it

is

found in the word billiard ; but in the

words Anglia, Angli^ and in the verb negligere^ with its derivatives, gli must be pronounced as in English in the word negligent.
J, called in Italian
i

lungo or long

i,

is

pronounced like

e at

the beginning

and

in the middle of words,

jeri,

and

like double ee

when

it

is

at the end,

yesterday

ajuto,

help

heneficj.,

benefits.

The vowels
other open
;

and

have two

different sounds,

one
pest.

close, the

as

Pesca, a peach, e Meiin, less, e Togliere, to take away, o Potere, power, o

open as in
close as in

pain.
stop.

open as in
close as in
close ;

note.

The
is

conjunction e

is

pronounced

the verb accented,

pronounced open.

The
is

conjunction or

is is

rendered by o close

the verb

/ have
o,

rendered by ho, and

pronounced open.
for these

There
order to
rules

is

no sign whatever

two vowels

and

in

mark when

the sound should be close or open; and the

so prolix, that

which might be given are so uncertain and

we

think they would serve more to confuse than assist the scholar.

teacher pronouncing the various sounds, and a close attention

on the part of the pupil to the words so pronounced, will prove

more useful than a

treatise

on pronunciation.
done by the English learner.

The The

letter r,

when

followed by a consonant, must be well

sufficiently

sounded, which
final

is

seldom

vowels must be distinctly and audibly pronounced,

80 that the final e

may be

clearly distinguished from

i.

When

double consonants are found together they must be


ON THE ACCENT.
distinctly

pronounced

the

first

consonant being sounded with the

preceding syllable, and the second with that which follows, as in

the English word unnecessary.

ON THE ACCENT.
In Italian orthography there
ployed, which
is
is

but one accent commonly em-

the grave accent,

marked thus
falls
;

(').

It is

found

on the
voice,

final

vowel of some words on which

;

the stress of the

as in bont, goodness

virt.,

virtue

sar, I shall be.

These words are called tronche.

When
one, these

the stress of the voice falls on the last syllable but

words are called piane

in

as pane, bread

vino, wine.

which the stress of the voice falls on the last but two or more syllables, are called sdrucciole; as bile,
clever
;

The words

difficile, difficult

caritatevole, charitable.
it

Monosyllables receive no accent, therefore

write with an accent
:/;>,

is

incorrect to

he was

su, upon.

thong take an accent;

qua, qui, here.

But monosyllables consisting of two vowels forming a dipha?, pi, more pub, he can gi, already;
;

The

following words must be marked with an accent, to dis-

tinguish them from other words spelt alike, but having different
significations
, is,
:

a verb, d, gives, a verb, d, day, a noun,

si,

e,

and, a conjunction.

da, from, a preposition.

di, of,
si,

a preposition.

yes,

an affirmative,

pronoun conjunctive.
pronoun.

ne, neither, conjunction,

ne, some, a rei.

t,

tea,

te,

thee.

CHAPTEE
INFINITIVE.

I.

INFINITIVE.

Essere, To be
Io sono,
tu sei, se',
egli
,

Avere, To have,
PRESENT OF THE INDICATIVE.
Io ho,
tu hai,
egli ha,
7ioi

]
jLi t3-

noi siamo,
voi siete,
eglino sono,

abbiamo,

%
,

voi avete,
eglino hanno,

ON THE PREPOSITIONS CALLED SEGNACASI, OR SIGNS OF THE CASES.

As
the Italian language does not admit of declensions, prepositions called segnacasi are
relations or cases,

employed

to express the various

which in Latin and Greek are indicated by

varying the terminations of nouns.

These Prepositions are

di, of;

a, to;
of.

da, from.

Di,
1.

The

preposition di
to

marks the

relation of property,

and

is

used in Italian

form the possessive case.

I

Ex.

La casa di mio padre, II poema di Dante, Le ale di un'aquila,

2. It also denotes affinity or

My
An

father's liouse.

Dante's poem. eagle's wings.

connexion of one object with

another.

Ex.
fiiend of the family. Tlie voice of the people. The Cathedral of Florence. The pain of death.

La
Il

di ca^a, voce del popolo, di Firenze, La pena di morte,

Un amico

Duomo

3.

When
it

one noun

is

used adjectively to qualify another, of

which

indicates the character, country, material, Sfc, in Italian


PREPOSITIONJ
tlic

English order of

tlie

substantives be connected by

words must be reversed, and Ex, di.

tlic

two

Una casa di campagna, Un cucchiaio di argento, Il Castello di Edimburgo,

Mercanti
4.
di vino,

A A

coxmtry house.
silver spoon.

Edinburgh

Castle.

Wine merchants.

English compound nouns, one of which qualifies the other,

are translated in the

same manner.
I

Ex.
Moonlight. Morning-star.

Lume

di luna,
di sole,

Stella della mattina,

Raggio
5.

Sunbeam.

Di

is

generally used before infinitives.

I
I

Ex.
Ita-

To

lio

risoluto di studiare la lingua

have resolved to study the

lian language.

Italiana,

Ho promesso di Ho dimenticato
6.

visitare
di

sua

sorella,

mandare

la let-

have promised to visit his sister. I have forgotten to send the letter
to the post.

tera alia posta,

Di

before a vowel
;

may be
i

curtailed of the
this elision

and receive

an apostrophe

before another

always takes place.

Ex.

La repuhhlica di or ' America, Il bel clima d'Italia, La flotta

: Inghilterra,

'

'

The The The

I.

republic of America. fine climate of Italy.

fleet of

England.

EXERCISE
I have read
letto

my

father's

letter.

He
{2>)

has taken his

2^'''^^'^

sister's

straw-bonnet. wish book. We have bought a desidero comprato un paglia wine-merchants. speak They your music-master. parlare musica maestro. The agriculture Scotland. He a drawing-master. You L' agricoltura disegno watch. The have a gold and have una oro un L! The house-door open. The dove aperto. La colomba L' and the branch. We have country house. They have
I
to
il

(1)

libro.

cappello,
are

[5)

to

al vostro

(3)

(3)

of

is

Scozia.
I

(3)

chain,

a silver

olive

(3) catena,

oriolo.

oliva

oil

of Italy
(6)

is

the best.

is

olio

il

migliore.

uscio

olive
olivo

il

ramo.


6
PREPOSITIONS.

A mother's Woollen una madre lana The town Edinburgh. A vase un vaso rose Vamore. La Where have you put write always with a penna Dove con una messo Grammar (We wish) read your my
found
love.

silk

purse.

stockings.
calze.

trovato

una

seta [S) borsa.

{1)

of

of

rose-leaves.

citt (6)

(4) foglie.

steel-pen.

scrivo semj)re

acciaio (3)
?
?

brother's

to

aunt's
zia

fratello [I)
letter.

Grammatica

Desideriamo [b)

IMPERFECT.
Io era^
tu eri,
ella era,
"1

Io aveva,
tu avevi,
ella aveva, or avea,

1
i

noi eravamo, voi eravate,

elleto erario,

^ ^
'l

i-t

noi avevamo, voi avevate, elleno avevano, or aveano,

^ P
I

7.

The pronoun

it is

not generally translated before the verb

or

essere,

and the verb must agree with the noun which it relates. Ex.
Sono
io,

pronoun

to

It is I.
I

Slete voi,

It is you.

A,
8.

to, at.

The

prepositions

to, at,

are translated in Italian

by

a.

Ex.
wil'

Verso la fine della primavera andremo a Londra, Domani non sard a casa. Nostra cugina a scuola,
9. .4 is

Towards the end

go
to

of spring

we

London.

I shall not bo at

home to-morrow.

Our cousin

is

at school.

used instead of di before

infinitives,

which are go-

verned by verbs of motion.

Ex.
Come and
They
dine with me. ran to defend their friends.

A ndiamo

Venite a desinare con me. Corsero a difendere i loro amici, a vedere il medico,

Let us go see the doctor.

10. Before

words beginning with a vowel, the preposition a

may

receive a d, especially before a.

I

Ex.

Enli ha studiato ad or a Oxford, Non ho parlato ad altri,

He

has studied at Oxford. I have not spoken to others.

PREPOSITIONS.

EXERCISE
I

II.

have promised a book promesso un

in town.

to

my
mio

son.

They
return)

are

gone

to

dine

Come
(10)

figlio.

andati [^)

to see

my
I

brother at Florence.
fratello [8) Firenze.

desinai^ e in

Venite {9)

(will send)

my

son to Eton.
(to)

to (5)

(shall

soon

to

mander
Athens.
Atene.

ritorner

Tell
came

fra poco (10)

Andrew

give (to)

Dite (10) Andrea

of paper.

and a sheet
foglio

To whom
chi

dare
(do

Edward a pen Eduardo una penna you speak ?) To a friend.

carta.
to (see

parlate

They
a

me)

at Paris.

(Let us go) and

Andiamo
a
(9)

vennero (9) vedermi

Parigi.

pound of

tea.

un amico, buy comprare

I have written to

t. scritto una libbra post this newspaper. at Eome. Go and Roma. Andate (9) impostare questo giornale.

lady who lives una signora che dimora

I ran to Corsi (9) two years since I due anni dach

meet
incontrare

the doctor.
il

It is

my

son.

It

is

When we were Quando breakfast we have read your mother's hope go colazione spero to-morrow our garden. Go and open the
was at Venice.

She was
letto

(7)

(7)

at school to-day.
oggi.

at

Venezia.

(8) scuola

letter.

to

(5) atidare

to

see

uncle's
zio

domani window.
finestra.

(9) vedere nostro

giardino

(10) aprire la

8
12.

PREPOSITIONS.

The negation precedes

Io non so
la

the verb in Italian.

I do not
\

mia

lezione,

know my

lesson.

13. In interrogative phrases, the pronouns follow the verb

they

may however be

omitted

when

the emphasis or stress of

the voice should

mark the

interrogation.
I

Ex.

Avete voi capito? Non siamo stati forse ingannati ?

Have you understood ? Have wo not perhaps been

deceived
?

Da,
14.

//-o???, by.

From

is

rendered in Italian by da; this preposition

is

never curtailed, even before words beginning with the vowel

a.

Ex.

Andando a
da Atene,

Costantinopoli passai

In going to Constantinople I went by Athens.

Da

Aprile fino a Luglio,

From
to connect

April

till

July.

two words, the latter of which expresses the use or destination of the former, and in this case the English order is reversed. Ex.
15.
is

Da

employed

Carta da

scrivere,
|
,

Writing-paper.

Una

So

bottiglia da vino, comprato un cavallo da due cavalli da carrozza,

A
I

wine-bottle.

sella, e
{ \

have bought a saddle- horse and two carriage-Iorses.

parti-

16. B/ is translated
ciple.

by da when preceded by a past

Ex.
Virtuous persons are esteemed by every one. We have been invited by a friend. The portrait of Dante, painted by
Giotto.

Le

persone virtuose sono stimate da

stati invitati

tutti,

da un amico, II ritratto di Dante, dipinto da

Siamo

Giotto,

17. Prepositions are generally repeated in Italian before each

noun, pronoun, or verb which they govern, whether they are

repeated or not in English.
Sono
stato a

Ex.
I

Ho

ed a Firenze, udito questa novella da lui e da

di voi e
i

Roma

have been at

Rome and

Florence.

I have heard this

altri,

Farliamo spesso
sorella.

news from him and from others. We often speak of you and of your
bister.


PREPOSITIONS.

EXERCISE

III.

We

do

not

receive a newspaper from

Paris.

Have

you

(14) (11) (12) riceviamo Raphael ? seen at Dresden the Madonna, painted by dipinta (16) Raffaello f veduto Dresda la
is

Where
Dove

the

letter-paper ?

We have seen the

il

portrait of Napoleon,
ritratto

la lettere (15) carta.

Napoleone

painted by David,
dipinto

go) from London (They Londra Andranno

will
is

to Paris.

The
La

History of France, written by Michelet,

storia

Francia scritta (16) - room small. Gunpowder is was La mangiare {\b) sala piccola, cannone [\) la polvere invented by a German monk. In Germany there are beerinventata un '^tedesco '^monaco. Germania vi birra glasses of every shape. Those coffee-cups are a pre-

very interesting. molto interessante.

The

dining

(15) bicchieri
sent.

ogni

forma

Do not

Quelle caff (15) tazze

leave flowers in
lasciate fiori

bed
letto

gaio.

una

room. {\b) camera.

-

Bring

un

re-

Portate

dozen of wine-bottles. I have spoken this morning to una dozzina parlato questa mattina (15) bottiglie. your mother and your sister. This picture was painted by vostra Questo quadro dipinto (16) (17)
a

Rubens and
(17)

Snyders.

A
country patria

hair-brush.
again. *

I do

not
(12)

capelli {!&) spazzola.

(11)

hope

to

see

my

rivedere la mia

10

ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE,

18. Il
is

11

used before masculine nouns beginning with a con-

sonant.
II

Ex.
ha portato
le

calzolaio
stivali,

scarpe e gli

The shoemaker has brought The

shoes and boots. gloves you have bought

the
are
tlie

I guanti

che avete comprati sono

tropipo piccoli,
I giorni che

too
alla

smaH.
spent
in

abbiamo passati

The days we have

country.

campagna,
19,
letter

Lo
s,

is

used before masculine nouns beginning with the

followed

by another consonant.
The The

Ex.
by

Lo

scolare diligente lodato dal suo

i libri,

maestro,

diligent scholar is praised bis master.

Lo stampatore sfamjja
Fintantoch
le

gli

leggi di

Spartani seguirono Licurgo vissero liberi.

printer prints books. As long as the Spartans followed the laws of Lycurgus, they were free.

20.

Lo
;

is

also used before masculine

is

nouns beginning with a

vowel, but in this case the o

trophe
'L'amico
turati,

suppressed and replaced by an aposi.

its

plural gli
e

is

curtailed only before the letter

sven-

Ex.

dei poveri

degli

The

Uodio

ai tiranni e agli oppressori,

friend of the poor and of the unfortunate. The hatred of tyrants and of oppressors.

In gran parte

le Indie Orientali sono possedute dagl' Inglesi,

great part of the East Indies

is

in the possession of the English.

2, il

21. Before words beginning with the letter

or lo

may

be

used indiscriminately.
Il

Ex.
oriolo

or lo zio
d'oro,
il

mi ha regalato un

Lo or

zucchero e dolce,
is

Uncle has made gold watch. Sugar is sweet.

me

a present of a

22. Gli
Gli

used in declining the plural of Dio, God.

Romani,

Ex.

Dei
23.

degli antichi

The gods
|

of the ancient
false

Al tempo

degli
is

Dei falsi e bugiardi,

In the time of

Romans. and lying gods.

La

used with feminine nouns, and takes an apostrophe

;

before a vowel

in the plural, the elision takes place only before

the letter
ricco e
il

e.

Ex.
Death makes no distinction between rich and poor.

La morte non fa

parzialit tra il povero, Il fulmine percuote pi spesso Velevate torri che le umili capanne, Ve sempre della neve sulle Alpi,

The thunderbolt
There

strikes oftener high towers than low cottages. is always snow on the Alps.

12

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

EXERCISE

IV.

The
for the

ship

of the desert deserto

is
f.

is

the

Oriental

metaphor
f.

{IS) vascello m.

m. {2S)

is

The pen cammello m. penna on the The eyes

cameh
table.

'^Orientale hnetafora

in the ink-bottle.

The

pencil
lapis

calamaio m.

m.

are the mirror of the

soul.

The
are
-p.

tavola f. (20) ocelli m. anima f. (20) horror of vice and the love of virtue are the delight orrore m. oxLvizioxn. amor em. art. virt f. deliziai.
of the wise.

The

industrious

are praised, but the idle

lodati

savio m. [20)

industriosi m.

blamed.

The

ma

pigri m.

biasimati.

and the bee are the emblems of ape f. emdlema m. s. formica f.

ant
antichi
va.

art.

industry.

The ancients
loro
is

industria.

(thought they could propitiate) the credevano rendersi propizi (22)

gods (by offering them)

stars.

sacrifices.
sacrifizi.

The sun,
sole
is

Where
are
f.

offrendo

stelle f

the sugar ? It (21) zucchero m.

the moon, and the m. luna f.

in the sugar-basin.

The
the

zuccheriera

f.

passions

the

maladies
malattie
f.

of the soul.

passioni

alphabet
alfabeto

were

invented by the

The Phoenicians. The

Fenici m.

letters of
f.

lettere

culture of
coltura
f.

m.

ind. 3. inventate

the

mind

elevates

man.

The

mind

influences
influisce

(on) the

(19) spirito m. eleva art.

uomo m.

body, and the body acts on the mind. agisce corpo m.

CONDITIONAL.
Sarei,
saresti,

sarebbe,

saremmo,
sareste,

sarebbero.

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

13

USE OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

24.

The

definite article is used, in

both languages, before nouns

have received the letters I was expecting from France. has found the ring she had
the horses I

taken in a deteinnined sense.

Ex.
I

Ho ricevutole
di Francia,

lettere c/i'i'o aspettava

Mia sorella ha
Avete veduto
prati ?

ritrovato l'anello che aveva perduto,

i

My sister

cavalli che

ho com-

Have you seen

bought
?

have

25. Before a

noun taken

in a general
is

sense, expressing the

whole of a species, the article

used in Italian.
Liberty
is

Ex.

La

libert

lo

stato naturale

del-

the natural state of'man.

Vuomo,

La ragione

spesso vinta dalla /orsa, L'educazione la coltura della mente, Il cielo, la terra, il mare, tutto ci narra la gloria di Dio, I pesci sguizzano, gli uccelli volano,

Reason is often vanquished by force. Education is the culture of the mind. Heaven, earth, and ocean all proclaim to us the glory of God. Fish swim, birds fly.

26.
is,

No

article is prefixed to

nouns taken in an

indefinite, that

neither in a determined nor general sense.

Ex.

Appettiamo lettere di Francia, Vi erano uomini, donne, e fanciulli,

We expect letters from France. There were men, women, and children.

Un

arhoscello con foglie e

fiori,

'

shrub with leaves and

27.

The

definite

article is

used in Italian before names of

continents, countries, islands, rivers, &c.

Ex.
rules the seas.

U Inghilterra domina
h' Italia

mari,

England

il giardino dell' Furopa, Innumerevoli sciami di locuste coprirono la superfice dell' Egitto, La Corsica, e la Sardegna sono due

Italy is the garden of Europe. Innumerable swarms of locusts covered the surface of Egypt. Corsica and Sardinia are two islands
in the Mediterranean.
is

isole del

Mediterraneo,

28.

When
to, or

no idea of extent

connected with the country

alluded

when
and

it

is

used adjectively, and preceded by the

is

prepositions in

di,

no article

required.

Ex.

La Regina Ho passato
vengo

Inghilterra, l'inverno in Italia, la primavera in Francia, ed ora

i"

The Queen

Vino Cane

di di

di Spagna, Borgondia, Terra Nuova,

of England. I have spent winter in Italy, spring in France, and now I come from Spain. Burgundy wine.

A Newfoundland dog


14 ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.
29. Before the following islands the article
is

not required

Candia,

Cipro,

Corfu,

Creta,

Ischia,

Capri, Lipari, Malta,

Maiorca, Procida, Rodi, Scio, Madera.

It- is

also

omitted before countries having the same

name
re-

as their capitals, as towns receive no article.

Ex.

Passammo per Candia e

Cii^ro ritor-

We

passed Candia and Cyprus

nando da Creta, Ischia e Capri sono due belle isolette, non lungi da Napoli, Venezia stata chiamata la regina
del mare, Napoli il regno
della terra,
il

peggio governato

turning from Crete. Ischia and Capri are two beautiful little islands not far from Naples. Venice has been called the queen of the sea. Naples is the worst governed kingdom in the world.
V.

EXERCISE

Men
(25) uomini
is

are poets before (they are) philosophers.

Poetry
poesia
i.

poeti

prima

di essere of

filosofi.

the music

of the soul,
f.

particularly

great and sensitive

'^grandi
^sensibili

musica
souls.

f.

particolarmente

^anime.

make men Hunger and poverty povert t rendono {25) (25) fame L
terrors for the true Christian.

industrious.
industriosi.

Death has no
morte

Drawing
va.

(12) terrori
its

vero Cristiano

(25) disegno m.

owes
deve
art.

sua origine

origin to chance, sculpture to religion, and painting religione f. pittura f. f. caso m. scultura f.

to the progress

of the other arts.

France,

England,
f.

progresso m.
Sardinia,

altre artH.'^J^l)

Francia

Inghilterra

f.

and Turkey, were

f.

allied against Eussia.

Athens
f.

is

Sardegna
still

Turchia'i.

alleate contro

Russia

Atene
of music

the most polished city of

Greece.

The love
cavalieri (29)

ancora

pi

colta

{21) Cfreciai.
in Italy.

amore m.
of Malta.

and of poetry is universal

The knights
proud,

universale (28)

Prosperity and dignities

(25) prosperit
sity
f.

make men
rendono

but adveravver-

dignit

i.-^.

orgogliosi

(humbles them and teaches them) wisdom. Ignored insegna loro saggezza f (25) ignostt f. li umilia ance is always presumptuous, true genius is unassuming. modesto. ranzai. sempre presuntuosa vero genio va.
fi.

ON THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

IMPERATIVE.
Sii or sia, be thou.
I

15

Abbi,

Sia,

let

him

be.

Abbia,

let

have thou. him have.

us have.
ye.

Siamo,
Siate,

let us be. be ye.

let

Abbiamo,
Abbiate,
be.
|

let

have

Siano,

them

Abbiano, let them have.

30. In Italian, the imperative auxiliary

after
;

is formed without the aid of any and requires the pronouns, if expressed, to be placed the verb as sii tu, be thou sia egli, let him be.
; ;

The second person

negatively,
is

singular of the imperative,

infinitive

when used

formed of the

mood
is

non parlare, do not

thou speak.
31. In Italian, the definite article

prefixed to surnames,

but

is

omitted before masculine Christian names, except

when

they are preceded by an adjective.

Petrarca pass molta parte della sua vita in Avignone, Francesco Petrarca finge di essersi innamorato di Laura la mattina
II

Ex.
Petrarch spent a great part of his
life

in

Avignon.

del venerd, santo,

\j illustre

Francesco Petrarca,

Francis Petrarch feigns to have fallen in love with Laura on Good Friday morning. The illustrious Francis Petrarch.

32. Before feminine Christian names, the article is sometimes

used.

Ex.
I

La Corinna e la Saffo, Avete veduto la Maria

33.

Corinna and Sappho.

Have you seen Maria ?

Nouns

of

title,

rank, and profession,

when

not preceded

by a name, receive the article. La Begina Maria Stuarda,

Maria, Begina di Scozia, II duca Alessandro, 34. Lifinitives

Ex.
I

Queen Mary Stuart. Mary Queen of Scotland. Duke Alexander. of verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, used substan\

tively, receive the

masculine
il

article.

Ex.

Non

teme il valente uomo ma il morire da vile,

morire,

I ric<;Jii
II

non pensano ai poveri, come ed il quando ci avvenisse

35.

brave man does not fear death, but the death of a coward. The rich do not think of the poor.
I will relate to

ti

you how and when

racconter.

that happened.

The

article is

repeated before nouns that come in suc-

cession, particularly before those of different gender, distinct or opposite

and of

meaning.

Ex.


16
II

ON TUE DEFINITE ARTICLE,

senno
c
la
virtu,

del

ler/isla-

The wisdom and

lator.

virtue of

tlie legis-

tore,

La

sapienza ed

il

coraggio del ge-

The

ability

and courage of the gesuperstition of

nerale,

neral.
e la superstizione de-

^ignoranza
gVIdiani,

The he Ignorance ignorance and

the Indians.
VI.

EXERCISE

Cardinal Mazarin was the minister who married ministro m. che spos Cardinale m.
Austria, the proud
altiera
Iella

Anne of Anna (28)

Dante
(31)

and beautiful queen of France.

(33)

Alighieri, Petrarca, Tasso, and Ariosto, are the

four great quattro grandi

poets of Italy.
poeti
tliat

When (we

speak) of pronouns,
article

(we
p.

shall see)

Quando parleremo
in

pronomi m.
is

vedremo
before

Italian

the definite
'^definito

che

Italiano

^articolo

m.

si

put mette

innanzi

possessive
possessivi

pronouns,
1

except
eccettuato

when

followed by nouns of (sono seguiti) nomi

parentela

lent my music-book to I have prestato mio singolare m. (3) (33) Miss Mary. He is always wavering between yes and no. indeciso no signorina fra (34) s
relation in the singular.

Queen Elizabeth

of England (allowed) fece (33) Elisabetta (28)

Mary Queen
s

of Scot-

land (to be beheaded.)

^decapitare
as
to

To

(33)

know (how

to listen) is as useful

(34) sapere
to speak.)

ascoltare

utile

know (how

The

quanto
severance severanza
f.

parlare
of the soldiers.

enthusiasm and pcrentusiasmom. {db) per-

soldati

m.

PRESENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

Che

io sia,
sii,

che tu

or sia,

Che io abbia, che tu abbi, or abbia,

ch'egli abbia,

ch'egli sia,

che noi siamo, che voi siate,

ch'eglino siano,

che noi abbiamo, che voi abbiate,

ch'eglino abbiano,

ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

36.

17

The

personal pronouns

may

when

their terminations suffice to distinguish the person

be omitted before Italian verbs, they

;

must, however, be used in the singular of the present and imperfect of the subjunctive, the terminations being alike in those

tenses

also

when
;

there are two or

as

more pronouns

in a phrase

placed in contrast
Cliio ahhia, Ch'egli abbia,

That I may have. That he may have.

e voi sarete

Io avr un premio, punito,

I shall have a prize, and you will be punished.

ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

37.

The

indefinite article is translated in Italian

by

Un

before any masculine

;

noun beginning

either with a conso-

nant or a vowel

Uno

before masculine nouns beginning with an

impure, or

tlie letter z ;

Una before a feminine noun beginning with a consonant Un' before a feminine noun beginning with a vowel as
;

Un amico sincero, Un figlio ubbidiente,

Uno scolare diligente, Uno zio amoroso, Una donna modesta,
Vn^anima immortale.
38.

sincere friend. An obedient son. diligent scholar. An affectionate uncle.

An

modest woman. immortal soul.

The

indefinite article is not translated in Italian before

nouns expressing the country^ rank^ title, profession, or any other Ex. attribute of the preceding noun.
Sono
Scozzese,

am

Il mio maestro di musica Italiano, /Smo cugino Professore alV Universit di Vienna, Mio nonno era Generale,

My My

a Scotchman. music-master is an Italian.

His cousin

is a professor in the University of Vienna. grandfather was a general.

But when these nouns are accompanied by an adjective, by some circumstance, the indefinite article is then translated. Ex,
39.
or determined

Maria Stuarda era una principessa

Mary

E un medico celebre.
Nostro zio era un

di sventurata razza,
arcJiitetio Scozzese,

Stuart was a princess of an unfortunate race. is a celebrated physician. Our uncle was a Scottish architect.

He

18

ON THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

40, Before nouns of measure, weight, number, and time, the

Italians use the definite article instead of the indefinite, as in

English.

Ex.
elianto
tre

Questa seta bellissima,

Vavete pagata il braccio? L'anno passato il pane costava

soldi la libbra,

Oli aranci in Sicilia costano poco pi di un soldo la dozzina, Abbiamo lezione di canto tre volte la settimana,

This silk is very fine, how much have you paid for it a yard ? Last year, bread cost threepence a pound. In Sicily, oranges cost little more than a penny a dozen.

We

take singing lessons three times a week.

41.
cento,

No

indefinite article is used in Italian before hundred,

mille.

and thousand,

Ex.
The
trees in the park were planted more than a hundred years ago.

Gli alberi del parco furono piantati pi di cento anni fa, Mille anni avanti Vera Cristiana,

A
I

thousand years before the Christian era.

Ho

venduto

il

mio cavallo cento

lire,

have sold pounds.

my

horse for a hundi-ed

EXERCISE
Gulnare,
a

VII.

name rendered
i^eso

Gulnara (38)
fiore

the flower of the pomegranate.

by Byron, means famoso (16) significa A true friend is an inestimable

famous

times a We go our amici m. aneliamo (40) been remarked), that when a European people has ^Europeo Spopolo m Fu osservato anno m.
officer.

melagrana i. (Zl) vero amico m.. Hnestimabile She has an uncle a banker, and a brother an treasure. Hesoro m. (37) do (38) banchiere m.
m.

to

visit

friends three
tre

ufficiale

(9) visitare nostri

volte

year.

(It

intend

to found a colony

in a
{.

foreign

land,

if

they

are

prende a fondare colonia

Spagnuoli fabbricano
church,
chiesa
f.

'^straniero '^paesem.. se

Spaniards (they build) a convent, if Italians (they erect) a convento m. Italiani edificarlo
if

Dutch (they
Olandesi

construct)

costruiscono
if

an Exchange, Borsa f.

if

English
Inglesi

(they raise) a fortress, and piantano fortezzai.

they are French (they open) a * Francesi innalzano


ON THE
theatre and a ball-room.
teatro
I'AIiTITlVE ARTICLE.

19

A hundred years make a century. annifanno secolom. ballo {15) salai. {4^1) m. shilling a dozen) (for these eggs.) (a I have paid * ^queste ova pagato (37) ^scellino m. (40) patron of Koscoe was an English merchant, and a liberal
(39)
art arti
f.

'

'

^liberale ^mecenate (25)

and
p.

literature.
f.

(17) (35) letteratura

IMPEUFECT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.


20
ON THE PARTITIVE AETICLE.
I
I

must go and buy some Spanish

books.
shall

Devo andare a comprare qualche

libro Sjagnuolo,

Avr

alcuni amici

a pranzo con me
libro,

have a few friends to dine

oggi,

with

me

to-day.

riandatemi qualclio
molti,

ma

non

Send me some books, but not many.

44.

The

partitive article is omitted in Italian

is

when no

idea

of quantity

connected with the substance named.

it is

When we
a certain

say, ho fame, datemi del pane,

evident
;

we mean

limited portion of the substance bread

but in the phrase, noi

the species without

beviamo sempre acqua,

reference to quantity.

we simply mention
Ex.
carne,

I Bramini non

mangiano mai

II cappellaio vende cappelli, il calzolaio scarpe e stivali. Ho veduto in Inghilterra cavalli

bellissimi.

The Brahmans never The hatter sells hats,

eat any meat. the shoemaker shoes and boots. I have seen iu England very fine
horses.

EXERCISE

VIII.

Have you any

Dublin. Dublino

friends in Ireland ?

have some friends

(42)

in

We

(44) amici

Irlanda?
this

have received
ricevuto

morning
mattina
soldiers

some

letters
lettere
f.

questa

from Germany.

have

Germania wounded at the

feriti

seen some veduto

of the
f.

who were
va.

soldati

che ind. 3.

battle

Alma.
f,

The

painter Caracci
pittore

battaglia

having been plundered by some robbers, drew their likeness so essendo stato svaligiato (43) ladri m. fece loro riti^atti cos Never give any advice well that they were discovered. [Non date mai) consigli]). somiglianti ind. 3. scoperti

that might be dangerous if followed. pericolosi se seguiti

me) some pepper, (Bring pepe m. Portatemi

some mustard, mostarda

flask.

and some
f.

salt.

Put
(to

some wine

in

this

sale

m. Mettete
^gli

questo

Some

friends (were
2iii(]^

faithful)

him) in adversity.
avversit
f.

fiasco

3. fedeli

We

have no friends

in this

country.

When

you go

to

town

questo paese

andrete in

ON THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE.

21

and some pins. some needles (Send ns) some spille f. comprate (42) aghi m. Mandated Give me some cream and strawberries and some raspberries. lamponi m. crema f fravole f. some sugar. If we had some ribbons. nastri m. Se sub. 2.

buy

COMPOUND TENSES.
The compound
tenses of essere are formed

verb as auxiliary, so7w stato,

by using the same

been.

literally, I ajn

PAST PARTICIPLES.
Siato, m.,

been

stata,
state,

f.
f.

Avuto, m., had

Plur. Avuti, m.

avuta,
avute,

f. f.

Plur. Stati, m.

GERUNDS.
Essendo, being.
45.

Avendo, having.

The

past participle, after essere, must agree with the

subject of the verb.

Egli

Ex.
|

stato, ella stata,

He
it.

has been,

glie

Las been.

The

past participle, after avere, agrees with the accusative of

the verb

when

it is

preceded by
j '

Ex.
The books that we have had. The letters that you have haJ.

/ libri
Le

che abhiamo avuti, lettere che avete avute,

CHAPTEE
46.
is

III.

FORMATION OF THE PLUEAL OF NOUNS.

The general
rule for forming the plural of Italian nouny

to

change the

final

vowel into

/.

Ex.

II cappello, the hat, II cane, the dog, II poeta, the poet, La religione, the reh'gion, II maestro, the master,

I cappelli,
leant.

I poeti.
Le
religioni.

I maestri.


22
FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.
EXCEPTIONS.

Feminine nouns wLich end changing a into e. Ex,

47.
1st,

in

a form the plural by

La casa, the house, La sposa, the wife,

48. 2d,

Le case. Le spose.
ie,

Nouns ending

in i or

monosyllables,

and those

ending in an accented vowel, are invariable.

Ex.

La metropoli, the metropolis, La specie, the species,

II
re,

IjC metropoli.

Le Le

specie.

the king,

Ire.
virtu.

La

virtu, virtue,

49. Adjectives form the plural in the

same manner

as nouns.

EXERCISE IX.*

In the Levant, it Levante m.

bodies of the dead,

is

the custom to

strew ^costume m. spargere

to place a
2^^^^^^^

flowers on the
{4:Q) fiore

and

corpo m.

Kings and peagiorno m. nostra gioventil f. (48) re m. conincantevole sants are equal before God. (Let us imitate) their virtues and Imitiamo loro virt f. ed ladino eguale avanti principal cities avoid their defects. We have visited the
of

The mano (47) sedia the drawing-room. The nights sala (48) canape m. charming. The days our youth.
hands
of
f.

moi'to m. p. (young persons.) giovane m.

m. bunch of flowers in the mazzetto m. chairs, tables, and

f.(35) tavola
f.

sofas

of

of Italy are
f.

f.

notte

(49)

evitiamo
ofitaly.

Theancientmodeofwritingwas on
antico

difetto

m.

visitato

(49) principale citt

bricks,
tiles,

f.

modo

scrivere

[17) mattone m. tegolo m.

and tables of
trees.

on ivory, and on the leaves and bark of corteccia^. pietrai, avorio m. [35) foglia f. our civil and We owe to our ancestors
stone,

albero

va.

Andiamo

debitori

antenato

va. [delle

nostre) civile

* Nouns are now given in the singular, also past participles and adjectives,

which

in Italian agree with the

noun to which they

refer.

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.

religious liberties.

23

The

calamities

of civil wars.

religiosa
tliree

libert

f.

calamit
diversa

f.

(25)

guerra

(Here Ecco
f.

are)

kinds of
specie

tea, of different qualities

t,

and
f.

different prices.

tre

qualit

differente

prezzo m.

50.

Nouns ending

in ca

and ga

in the singular take an h in

the plural, in order to preserve the hard sound.

II duca, the duke, La Strega, the witch,
I

Ex.

I ducili.
Le
streghe.

51.

Nouns
;

of two syllables, ending in co and go, take an h

in the plural,

except Greco, Greek,

it

pi.

Greci; porco, pig,

pi.

porci

mago becomes maghi when

means magi.
Ex.
II lago, the lake,

means magicians, and magi

when

it


24

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS

Obbligo, obligation.

Pudico, chaste.

Opaco, opaque. Parroco, curate. Pedagogo, pedagogue. Pelago, abyss, ocean.

Pizzico, pinch.

Rammarico,

regret. Bipiego, expedient. Sacrilego, sacrilegious.

Sambuco,

elder-tree.

Statico, hostage.

Presago, diviner. Prodigo, prodigal.

Prologo, prologue.

Stomaco, stomach.
Strascico, train.

Ubbriaco, drunkard.

The

following words
:

may

be written in the plural with or

Pratico, practical. Reciproco, reciprocal. Rustico, rustic. Salvatico, wild.
Traffico, traffic.

without an h

Astrologo, astrologer. Equivoco, equivocal.

Filologo, philologist.

Mendico, beggar.

Monaco, monk.

EXERCISE X.

The
(51)

Turks,

Turcom.

instead of ringing bells to call invece [suonare il campanello) per chiamare

their

their servants,

clap

hands.

Have you
f.

servo m. battono * art.

of Scotland ?

mano
and

They are
carit

seen the lakes veduto (51)

to

rich,

contribute
contribuiscono
of

many

Scozia
public
charities.
{4^S)

ricco va.

The sunny

hills

molta (50) Tuscany. The

t.

pubblica

(54) colle m.

[27) Toscana

Germans
(52) Tedesco m.

are

phlegmatic and persevering. (Save me) perseverante. Salvami {53) flemmatico

filosofo

from

my

friends,

said a philosopher, (as

disse

(53)

m.

against
contro
suffer

my

enemies.

The

I can defend myself) siccome posso difendermi

nemico m.
si

subjects of despotic monarchs suddito m. ^dispotico {50)'^7nonarcam.

much and complain

soffrono molto
suffer little

little, those of free governments lamentano poco, quelli -libero Sgoverno va. feed and complain always. In Italy pigs on sempre. (51) si pascono di

German musicians, Italian classics, peaches and acorns. hnusicova. ghianda f^ [5') '^classico m.. ^ (50) pesca t The intrigues of the French cooks, and English mechanics, ^ Inglese^ meccanico va. (20) (54) m. ^Francese ^cuoco

demagogues. (54) m.


FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.
55.
plural.

25
the
i

Nouns ending
Ex.

in

eia,

scia,

and gi,

lose

in

the

La La

caccia, le cacce,
le le

spiaggia, Zrt guancia,

spiagge,

guance.
falls

The The The

cliase.

shore.

cheek.
i,

Except when the accent

is

on the

or

when

that vowel

distinctly pronounced.

Ex.
The The
lie.

Lm Im
5G.

buga, le buge, provincia, le provincie,

province.

Nouns ending

in io follow the general rule in the forma-

tion of the plural, and

change the final vowel into i when the two vowels of the singular termination are distinctly pronounced,

as in monosyllahles, in the termination rio, &c.

II natio,
i natii,

Ex.

Tlie native.

II deso, i desii. lpendo, ipendii,

Lo

zo, gli zi,

L'arbitrio, gli arbitrii. Il martirio, i martirii,

L'atrio, gli atrii,

The The The The The The

wish, the desire.

declivity.

uncle.
free will.

maityrdoin.
vestibule.

57.

When
is

io is

not pronounced as two distinct sounds, as in

glio, gio, in

the terminations
the o

cio, scio, cJiio,

forming the plural,

dropped,*

Ex.
The eye. The sheet of paper. The beech-tree. The watch. The baker. The voyage. The kiss.

L'occiiio, gli occhi.

II foglio,

i fogli.

It faggio, i faggi. L'orologio, gli orologi, Il fornaio, i fornai,

Il viaggio, i viaggi. Il bacio, i baci.

is still, by some, changed but the best modern authors substiand two iV& in some instances, in order to avoid ambiguity, as in the following words beneficio, benefit principio, principle, beginning regio, royal giudicio, judgment which make in the plural, beneficii, principii, regii, giudicii, in order to distinguish them

Observe.
^'

The termination

io

was formerly, and

into

for the formation of the plural;

tute a simple i in the place of thej',

from

benefici, principi, regi, giudici, plurals of benefico, beneficent

prin-

cipe, prince

rege,

king

and giudice, judge.


FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.

EXliUClSE XI.

poet has called the sun aud poetava, appellato

-trees

the

moon

the eyes of

heaven.

The beech (25) (57) woods. Bakers grow

(51)

(57)
of the

ancient {bb) quercia I (54) rich in time * of war and famine, [2b) [01) divengono ricco guerra L carestia L
in

and the oak -trees

and doctors
(53)

time of pestilence.
peste
f.

In
the

Eome

there are
vi

many
mollo

ancient

edifices.

The
of

shores

of

edifizio

m.

(55)
(silly people.)

Mediterranean. Mediterraneo m.

The

caprices

Poets

(57) capriccio m.
to
roses,
f.

(19) sciocco m. p.

eyes to stars,
stella
f.

hands

to
f.

compare cheeks {^Q) paragonano (bb) lilies, and teeth to

deiite

(25) rosa
pearls.

mano

perla

f.

There are no harmless 231

disaffection.

who, in governinnocuo (bb) Principe m. che [nel goverlies.

Princes

(57) giglio m.

m.

ing their subjects, are not guided by principles of justice, ex{bl) nare) ecsuddito m. guidato
cite

We

forget

citano scontento m. Si dimenticano

offences.

benefitsf more readily than che _?n" presto (bl*)

offesa

f.

58.

The

following nouns are irregular in the plural

La

mofjlie, tlic wife.

Lc

Slillc, thousiind,

II hue,

tlie

ox,

L'uomo, the man, mio, my,

tuo, thy,

wives. Mila, thousands. I buoi, the oxen. Gli uomini, the men.
mogli,
tlic

viiei,

my.

tuoi, thy.

*
it is

When time

denotes a repetition of the action, or & point in a space of time,

la

translated by volta; as, the first time, by tempo when a space of time is meant

prima

volta.

It is expressed

as, in the

di guerra.

Tempo means

also w^eather

as,

time of war, in tempo bad weather, caltioo tempo.

beneficio.,

t Benefizio, giudizio,
giudicio, vfficio.

uffi-io,

are

more frequently used than


FORMATION OF THE PLURALOF NOUNS.
siio, his,

27

suoi, his.

Dio, God,

Dei, Gods.

59.

Some masculine nouns become

in a.

feminir

in

the plural,

and end

Ex.
Le centinaia, the hundreds. Le migliaia, the thousands. Le miqlia, the miles. Le paia, the pairs. Le staia, the bushels. Xe uova, the eggs.

II centinaio, the hundred, II migliaio, the thousand, II miglio, the mile, II paio, the pair, Lo staio, the bushel, L'iwvo, the egg.

60.

The

following masculine nouns

may end
:

either in

or

in the plural.

When

in

a they

are feminine
G/i
?ieZZi, Ze

5
6

Lamella, the ring, II braccio, the arm, II budello, the bowel, II calcagno, the heel, II carro, the cart, II castello, the castle, II ciglio, the eyebrow, II corno, the horn, /Z dito, the finger, II filo, the thread, II fondamento, the basis, II frutto, the fruit, II fuso, the spindle, /2 gesto, the gesture, 7Z ginocchio, the knee, /Z grido, the cry, /Z gomito, the elbow, /Z labbro, the lip, /? Zegrjio, the wood, JZ lenzuolo, the sheet, /Z membro, the member.

I bracci,
I budelli,

le le

anella. braccia. budella.

I calcagjii, le calcagna. I carri, le corra. I castelli, le castella. I cigli, le ciglia. I corni, le corna. I diti, le dita.
Ifili, le fila.
.

I fondamenti, le fondamenta. Ifrutti, lefridta.

I fusi,
le

fusa.

I gesti, le gesta. I ginocchi, le ginocchia. I gridi, le grida. I gomiti, le gomita. I labbri, le labbra. I legni, le legna. I lenzuoli, le lenzuola. I membri, le membra.
carri not carra

Carro means chariot as well as cart

Corni are wind instruments

must be used

for

the plural of chariot.

2
;

coma

are the horns of an animal.

;

3 Frutti means fruit of the same plant

fruit, dessert.

frutta means various kinds of

to express the interest

Frutti must be used

when employed

of money, or the consequences of an action.

4 Gesti means the gestures of an orator, of an actor

great deeds.

gesta

means

exploits,

5 Legni means carriages, ships

6

legna, firewood.
;

Membri

are the

members

of a society

membra, the limbs

of the body.


28

FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF NOUNS.

7 II muro, the wall, L'osso, the bone, Il pomo, the apple, Il pugno, the fist, Il quadrello, the airow, 8 II riso, the laugh, the rice, Il sacco, the sack, Lo strido, the cry. Il vestigio, the vestigo, Il vestimento, the garment,

I muri,
Oli

le

mura.

ossi, le ossa.

I pomi, le poma. I pugni, le pugna.

/ quadrelli, le quadrello. I risi, le risa. / sacelli, le sacca.
Gli stridi,
le

strida.

/ vestigi, le vestigia. / vestimenti, le vestimenta,

EXERCISE XIL

and exercises practised by the Greeks were esercizio m. praticato (51) ind. 2 (J)l) giuoco m. health good for the of the body and the strength of the limbs. salute L corpo m. robustezza f. buono (60^) Wives must rule by sweetness and gentleness. His gentilezzaL (58) (58) debbono governare con dolcezza t gestures became animated in speaking of the virtues and * parlando (GO'*) divennero ani/nato (48)

The

games

great deeds of the ancient heroes.

(60*)

A friend
Tebe

has
^

sent

me

eroem.

basket of eggs. paniere m. (59)

simple sound semplice suono
(fell,
va.

The

walls of
(60^)
;

hnandatohni Thebes were raised by the

ind. 3 inalzato

of the lyre
lira

f.

the walls of the city of Jericho Gerico

on the contrary,) caddero in vece

to the

sound of trumpets. tromba f.

Presents
dono m.
six pair of
sei

appease not only men, but also gods. solo (58) placano anche (58)
gloves from Paris. %ianco ^guanto xn.

me) (Bring Portatemi

for

white

two thousand miles due (58) (59)

after the taking of

in

a wager A man walked * iscommessa cammin a thousand hours. The exploits of -<Eneas
ora.
(60*)

(59)

(41)

Enea
ol

presa

f.

Troy by the Greeks, form the subject soggetto Troia (51) formano

of a town, also of a room,

Muri, the enclosure of a garden, of a park miira though la parete and its plural
;

is is

used in speaking
preferaLle.

8 Bisi

is

used in the plural of

rice,

and risa as the plural of laugh.

Virgil's

beautiful
bellissimo

poem,

the ^neid.

The

(1)

poema m.

Eneide.

stars, animals, {20) astro (35)

and even plants were amongst the Egyptian gods. ^Egiziano '^{58) anche pianta t'md. 2 fra
of a deer killed

The horns
(60^)

by

Prince Albert.

Children

must obey
obbedire

cervo ucciso

(33)

Alberto. {25) fanciullo

(to) their master.

(to) their parents,

and pupils
scolare

genitore,

CHAPTER
GENDER.
In Italian,
all

IV.

nouns are either masculine or feminine, there

being no neuter gender.

The gender
minations.
61.

of nouns

may

be
are

distinguished by their

ter-

Mascoline terminations
la eco, the echo.

0, except feminine names, as

la

Saffo,

Sappho

la

mano,

the hand

Me, except
hope.

l'arme, the

weapon

la fame,

hunger; la speme,*
la

Re, except la febbre, fever

la coltre,
;

the counterpane

madre, the mother

the tower.

la polvere, dust

la scure, the

axe

la torre,

The following nouns ending

la carcere, the prison la lepre, the hare
;
;

in

?-e

are of both genders

il il

or

il

or la folgore, the thunderbolt

;

or

il

or la tigre, the tiger

il

or la

cenere,-];-

ashes.

Nte, except

la gente, people

la lente, the lens or lentil

la

mente, the mind; la corrente, the current; la sorgente, the source.

tors.

* Speme is used in poetry for speranza. t II cenere is used poetically, il cenere degli Wlien used in the plural, it is femiuine.

avi, tlie

dust of the ances-

The following words are of both genders U or la fante, the man-servant or the maid // or la fonte, the fountain il or la
; ;

fronte, the forehead.

One, except la canzone, the song

la Bidone,
I,

la teiizone,

the combat

Dido

la Gimione, Juno.
;

except la metropoli, the metropolis

;

la analisi, the analysis la tesi, the thesis

;

la sintassi, syntax

la enfasi,

emphasis

and

a few more words derived from the Greek.

EXERCISE

XIII.
is

The
of

tiger

is

ferocious

and the hare

(61)

timid.

The

prisons

(61) not check) the progress of liberty. progresso libert (25) dispotismo non arresteranno Hunger is a powerful incentive to crime. Tears are the potente incentivo delitto, lacrimai. (61)

(61)

feroce
(will

timido.

despotism

language of grief. Seneca wrote the panegyric of dolore. scrisse muto linguaggio panegirico poverty by the light of a gold chandelier. The rose is the lume rosa f. povert f. a (3) candelabro.

mute

queen of flowers and the emblem of beauty. emblema m. bellezza f. regina fiore

A
i

(fanatical

and

fanatico

ignorant) people become a terrible weapon in the hands of a "^terribile ^(61) ignorante popolo diviene (61) The current of the river. Her forehead was bound despot. tiranno. flume. (61) ind. 2 cinto (61)

with a
di

wreath of myrtle, which che ghirlandai mirto

is

the

emblem

of love.

amore.

Ignorance is the source of supersiipermarinaro {I) {Ql) {25) ignoranza I (61) removed from The ashes of Napoleon were stition. Napoleone ind. trasportato 3 stizione. (Gif) smell, and taste of a Saint Helena to Paris. The colour, colore (35) odore sapore Sant' Elena
sailor's

The

song.^

pine-apple.

ananasso.

GENDER.

31

62,

Feminine terminations are

1st,

A, except,
2d,

masculine names, as Andrea, Andrew.

il

Names
; ;

of dignities ov lirofessions of men, as

;

Papa, the
il

Pope
il

ilmonaixa, the monarch

V artista, the
artist.

//

legista, the
il

lawyer;

poeta,
;

the poet

Also,

regicida, the regicide

fratricida, the fratricide, &c.

M, Words

derived from the Greek, as

Idioma, idiom. Pianeta, planet.

Anatema, anathema. Assioma, axiom.

Clima, climate. Diadema, diadem. Diploma, diploma.

Poema, poem.
Problema, problem.

Programma, programme.
Scisma, schism. Sistema, system. Sofisma, sophism. Stemma, coat of arms. Stratagemma, stratagem. Teina, theme.

Dogma, dogma.

Dramma, drama.
Emblema, emblem. Enigma, enigma. Epigramma, epigram. Fantasma, phantom.

Ione,* except
L'arcione, the saddle-bow. L'arpione, the liinge. 11 battaglione, the battalion. II bastione, the bastion. 11 campione, the champion. 11 dormiglione, the sluggard.

Un milione, a million. II padiglione, the pavilion. II piccione, th(5 pigeon.

Lo
scorpione, the scorpion.

II settentrione, the north. Lo storione, the sturgeon.

il

U, except,

il

Per, Peru

rag, the ragout.

EXERCISE XIV.

monarch
(G2)

is

always powerful when he sempre potente allora che

is

beloved hj

hit;

amato

people.

popolo.

has great influence on the character of men. grand' influenza carattere (58) Planets are opaque bodies which derive light and heat calore che derivano luce (G2) (54) ^opaco ^corpo
(G2)

Climate

from the sun.

is

The most precious

pi preziosa
exercises

gem of gemma

a monarch's diadem
(62)
written are easy.
scritto

clemency.
clemenza.
*

The

we have
che

facile.

No

positive rule can be assigned for other terminations in

e,

which

are, for the

most

part, feminine.

32

GKNUER,

Have you read the poems of Scott ?

letto

When we
enjoy

take

pleasure

(62)
of others,
art.

prendiamo piacere

in the prosperity

we

a part of their good

prosperit
fortune.

altro
is

godiamo parte
worst part of a revolution. rivoluzione. p eggior parte

buono

restoration

the

The
a
the

fortuita.

restaurazione

violet is the

emblem
(62)

of modesty.

lawyer
(62)
conflitto

is

rarely

viola
poet.

modestia.
serio

bastion.

vision.

A (62) Cain was the Caino a

It is

raramente (38)
carried
(of)

battalion, after a severe conflict,

s'impadron
is

first fratricide.

The poem of Dante

(62)

difficult

problem.
i(62)

visione.

^difficile

63.

Nouns which admit

final

of both genders form

a.

\q

feminine by

changing the

vowel into

Ex.
Cugina, female cousin. Cognata, sister-in-law. Cameriera, lady's-maiJ. Ebrea, Jewess. Vedova, widow.

Cugino, male cousin, Cognato, brother-in-law, Cameriere, valet,

Ebreo, Jew, Vedovo, widower.

64.

Words which end

Ex.

in ante

and

ente.,

as well as those derived

from a town or country^ ending in

genders.

ese,

are the

same

for both

11 cantante, tlic singer,

11 credente, the believer,

La La

Un Inglese, an Englishman, Un Fraicese, a Frenchman,

65.

Una Una

cantante, the singer. credente, the believer. Liglese, an Englishwoman.

Francese, a Frenchwoman.

Nouns which have

Ex.

the masculine termination tore, form

the feminine in trice.

Esecutore, executor, Imperatore, emperor. Traditore, traitor,

Esecutrice, executrix.

Imperatrice, empress.
Traditrice, traitress.

66.

The following nouns form

the feminine in

essa:

 A
GENDER.
Abate, abbot,

33

Harone, baron,
Conte, count, Dottore, doctor, Duca, duke, Gigante, giant,

Abadessa, abbess. Baronessa, baroness.

Contessa, countess.

Dottoressa, female doctor. Duchessa, ducbess.

Gigantessa, giantess.
I,eonessa, lioness. Ostessa, hostess. Poetessa, poetess. Paonessa, pea-hcn. Principessa, princess. Profetessa, prophetess.

Leone,

lion,

Oste, host.

Poeta, poet,

Paone, peacock,
Principe, prince, Profeta, prophet, Sacerdote, priest,

Sacerdotessa, priestess.

G7.

The names
Ex.

o fruit-trees ending in o arc masculine, but

by changing the o into a they become feminine, and signify the

fruit.

II castagno, the chestnut-tree, II pero, the pear-tree, II ciriegio, the cherry-tree.

La

castagna, the chesnut.

pear.
ciriegia, the cherry.

Papera, the

La
and

The
date,

following nouns
il

mean

the tree

and the fruit,

il

limone,

l'arancio,

cedro,

il

dattero,

il fico,

lemon, orange, cedar,

and

fig.

EXERCISE XV.

An
is

actor and an actress

attore

may

be virtuous and estimable.

virtuoso
stimabile.

She

[65) possono
to

executrix

(65)

d suo

will, and guardian of her her husband's tutore marito (1) testamento

son and her daughter.

(63)

poet's wife is rarely

a poetess.
(66)

di rado

wild
''salvatico

fig-tree
^

with cherries.
di

covered with figs. The cherry-trees are laden carico coperto di (51) (67) The duke and duchess (were walking) in the

(55)

avenue of orange-trees. viale m. art.

always the truth,
verit

The prophetess Cassandra predicted predisse (66) The Vestals were but (was never)
believed.

[66)

passeggiavano

non fu mai

creduta.

Vestalem(\.2
fire.
^

priestesses of the goddess Vesta,

and guarded the sacred

custodivano
^sacro

(66)

dea


34 ON ADJECTIVES.
princes

The emperor and empress were surrounded by

(65)
princesses,
ind. 2 circondato

and

(66)

by barons and baronesses, by counts and countesses.

Groves of orange and lemon- trees. Boschetto (67)

CHAPTER

V.

ON ADJECTIVES.
68. Adjectives agree in gender and

they qualify
the

those ending in o become feminine

number with the nouns by changing

is

into a.

The

plural of adjectives

formed according to
and and and and
learned man. learned woman. learned men. learned women.

the rules given for nouns.

Ex.
The The The The
generous generous generous generous

L'uomo generoso e dotto, La donna generosa e dotta,

Oli uomini generosi e dotti, Lt donne generose e dotte,

69. Adjectives in e or

serve for both genders.

Ex.

Un

re illustre e potente,
illustre e potente,
illustri e potenti,

Una regina

An An

illustrious
illustrious

and powerful king. and powerful queen.

I re
Le

Illustrious

regine illustri e potenti.

Illustrious

and powerful kings. and powerful queens.

70.
it is

When

the adjective qualifies two or more singular nouns,

put in the plural.

il

Ex.
The
father

II padre ed
gliosi,

figlio

sono orgo-

and son are proud.

are

La vedova e sua jglia sono povere ma industriose, La rosa e la camelia sono belle.
Il ricco ed
il

The widow and her daughter The

poor but industrious. rose and the camellia are beautiful.

povero sono mortali.

Eich and poor are mortal.

71.

When

the nouns are of different gender, the plural adjec-

tive agrees with the masculine.

Ex.
The mother and the son are deaf. The soldiers and thoir wives were
grateful

La madre e il figlio sono sordi, I soldati e le loro mogli furono

conoscenti e
civili,

ri-

and

civil.

72. Adjectives

may

generally precede or follow nouns, taste


ON ADJECTIVES.
and euphony being the best guide on familiar style, adjectives which denote
s/cZ qualities, this
taste,

35
point
;

however, in

shape, colour, phj-

follow the noun.

and those derived from verbs or names of nations, Ex.

The
il

/ cavalieri
tregua,

della tavola rotonda,

Una bandiera

bianca

segnale di
acuto,

A A

white flag

kniglits of the round table. is the signal of truce.

Un uomo
Le

cieco

ha Vudito

Il Paradiso perduto del Milton,

legioni

Romane non potettero

i

'mai

The Roman

soggiogare

Caledoni,

blind man has sharp ears. Milton's Paradise Lost. legions were never able to subdue the Caledonians.

73.

Two

or

generally placed after

more adjectives qualifying the same noun are it. Ex.

1

Un

Una

oratore eloquente e persuasivo, fanciulla bella e modesta,

An

eloquent and persuasive orator.

A beautiful and modest young girl.

EXERCISE XVI.

The

ancient Caledonians were implacable

(54)

enemies, but

ind. 2 implacabile (53) '^nemico

hospitable and generous friends.

ospitale

beautiful painting often in-

generoso
poetico (61)

(73) *
nobile

pittura spesso inlofty sentiments.

spires (to) a poetic

mind with noble and

of great

spira

elevato sentimento
sacrifices.

Generous minds are capable

capace

Poland
Polonia

grande (57)

sacrifizio (27)

was
ind. 3

for

many

per

years the seat of domestic divisions. molto sede (50) domestico (62) divisione

An

amiable temper and a good education are more valuable amabile [Ql) carattere educazione jjregevole

than great
che

riches

or

ricchezza
Irish

pompous pomposo

titles.
titolo

Dr. (33) Dottor

Petrie, the

celebrated

antiquarian, has proved that the

round
the

celebre (72) Irlandese antiquario

provato

(72) rotoido

towers of Ireland are of Christian origin, and

(61)
triplice

Irlanda
uso

^Cristiano ^origine

served in servivano a
vedetta

threefold capacity of belfries,

strongholds, and watch-towers.

fortilizio

campanile (17)

retentive

ferreo

and cultivated memory, an extensive and varied coltivato memoria variato esteso


36
ON-

ADJECTIVES.
imagination, are necessary to immagina:^ione necessario per

knowledge, and a lively

(62) erudizione
sliine

vivace

in conversation.

brillare

conversazione

wreath of white and red camellias, ghirlanda camelia (72)

entwined with green leaves, was laid on the grave of the intrecciato verde foglia deposto sepoltura
patriot

patriottu

Dandolo, at Milan. Milano.

74.

The

following words are adverbs

;

when governed by

verb or adjective, and are indeclinable with the word to which they relate
Molto, much, very. Tmito, so mucli. Altrettanto, as much.
L'esilio molto penoso,

but when governed by

a noun, they are adjectives, and agree in gender and

:

number

Troppo, too much.

Poco,
little,

few.

Quanto, how much.

Exile is very painful. He has many enemies and few fiiends. How many priests and friars one meets in the streets of Eome. How difficult it is to learn to speak a language fluently and correctly.
I

Egli ha molti nemici e pochi amici, Quanti ^;re<i e frati s' incontrano per
le

vie di

Boma,
Vimpararea parlare

Quanto

difficile

correntemente e correttamente una

lingua,

Vi mando tre fogli del manoscritto, e spero mandarvene altrettanti la

settimana prossima,

send you three sheets of the manuscript, and I hope to send you as many more next week.
is

75.

How
Ex.

LONG, in speaking of time,

rendered by quanto

tempo.

Quanto temjio contate di trattenervi

sul Continente

How long

do you intend

to

remain on

the Continent ?

Quanto tempo avete studiato V Italiano

How long

have you studied Italian?

76.

LITTLE

is

expressed by un poco
1

di.

Ex.
ehall suc-

Prendete un poco di vino, Con un poco di pazienza riusciremo

nella nostra intrapresa,

Take a little wine. With a little patience we

ceed in our enterprise.

EXEKCISE XVII.

The

Italian painters

have

never

been surpassed

they

(72)

pittore

^non ^mai (45)

sorpassato


ON ADJECTIVES.
have many imitators, few equals, and
(74)
slaves
;^7

imitatore (51) eguale

if

no superiors. nessuno superiore

little

Many
many
?

(would become) tyrants

diverrebbero
to

schiavo

tiranno se

they had a subj. 2

(76)

power. potere

Religion (teaches us) c'insegna

trials of this life.

support with patience the sopportare

letters

How many
(74)
their lot

have you received to-day

oggi
last ?

vicenda

vita

Not many.

How long did

(75)

the

concert
'^concerto

Few

persons

^durb
earns
little,

are satisfied (with

contento

in life.)

He

and
is

della loro sorte

spends much. spende

debolezza
of

To be too much
(34)

guadagna (74)
(with ourselves) di noi stessi
a folly.
follia

dissatisfied

(74)

scontento

weakness, but to be too

much
in

pleased
contento

is

The labour
lavoro
are very

many

years was
in

lost

a few moments.
*

Many
in

perduto
cautious
a friend.

momento
careless

(74)

choosing a horse, and very

choosing

cauto nello scegliere

trascurato

77.

Mezzo,

7;r/(/;

when
is

'placed after the noun,

declinable.
I

is

invariable,

but when placed before, Una libbra e mezzo,

Ex.

Due Due
78.

ore e mezzo,
libbra,
\

Two
:

Una mezza

pound and half. hours and a half. Half a pound.

half-crowns.

mezzi scudi,

Two

Half

used substantively

is
\

expressed by met.

Ex.

Qiiasila meth dei soldati jJer irono cU fame e di freddo, Ho vmngiato ia met di un arancio,

'

Almo.st the half of the soldiers perished from hunger and cold. I have eaten the half of an orange.

79.

The

adjective bello

is

curtailed of the last syllable before

s

masculine nouns beginning with a consonant, except an

im-

pure

before a vowel

it

loses the final letter

and receives an

apostrophe.
fT)}

Ex.
I

Un

bel j9Z2so, a fine palace, bello specchio, a handsome mirror,

Bei palazzi.
Begli specchi. Btgli occhi.

Bell'occ/iio, a beautiful eye,

y
80.

ON ADJECTIVES.

The

adjective

grande
This

loses the final letter before

mas-

culine and feminine nouns beginning with a consonant, both in

the singular and plural.

elision does

not take place before

final letter

an

impure; and before a vowel, grande drops the

and receives an apostrophe.

if)i

Ex.
Gran j)opoU. Gran flotte.
Grandi scofli. Grand' imperi.

gran popolo, a great people,

Una gv&n flotta, a great fleet, Un grande scoglio, a great rock,

Un

gvand'i/jjpero, a great empire.

81. Santo, when it means saint, and comes before a masculine proper noun beginning with a consonant, an s impure excepted,
loses the
last syllable
;

this elision does

not take place

when

santo translates holy.

San Paolo
e

Ex.
I

San

Pietro,

II santo sepolcro. Santo Stefano,

The
I

Saint Paul and Saint Peter. holy sepulchre. Saint Stephen.

82.

Buono

loses the final o before

s

vowel or a consonant, an

impure excepted.
I

words beginning with a Ex.

Un buon architetto, Un buon pittore, Un buono scultore,

83.

A
A

good architect. good painter. good sculptor.

few adjectives vary their signification according as they

come before or after the nouns they qualify. Ex. A gentle man. Un gentil uomo, A kind man. Un uomo gentile, A polite man. Un uomo galante, A worthy man. Un galantuomo, A tali man. Un uomo grande. A great man. Un grand'uomo, A certain news. Una certa notizia,
Una
notizia certa,

A
EXERCISE

news which

is

certain.

XVIII. fool
is

great fortune in the hands of a

(80) /or/Ma

a great mis-

dis(37) imbecille The good people of this great city. Saint George is f )rtune. grazia. (81) Giorgio (82) popolo the patron saint of England, Saint Patrick of Ireland, and Saint

(61)

^tutelare

Patrizio

Irlanda
(83)

Andrew Andrea

of Scotland. Scozia.

Polite

men

are not always worthy men,

(83)

ON NUMERAL ADJECTIVES.

39

The Athenians
Ateniese
laurel,

used (to crown) their great warrior with solevano incoronare guerriero di

and

their great poets with ivy

and

laurel.

How

long
a *

alloro

di edera

{lb)

have you studied drawing?

disegno

Two

years

and a
*

half.
i'^'')

Half

pound* of
is

coffee.

A great general makes good

geierale

soldiers.

Cupid
Cupido

caj^.

fa

soldato.

The

represented as a beautiful child with a bow and a quiver. arco rappresentato come faretra. (79) fanciullo

holy

office

of the Inquisition

(81) uffizio

Inquisizione

was founded by Saint ma. Z fondato

Dominic. The countryf of great men. Domenico. (83)

Numeral Adjectives
numbers.

are divided into cardinal and ordinal

40

CARDINAL NUMBERS.

84, Uno, oic, a, is used substantively to signify a mem, a woman, a person, and is the only cardinal number which agrees with the noun it accompanies. Ex.
ITo perduto uno spillo di diamanti, ed una collana di perle,
lutti,

have
is

lost

a diamond brooch and

E uno che dice male di

85.

pearl necklace.

He

man who

speaks

ill

of every

one.

When
it

the noun

is

placed after ventuno, trentuno. Sec,

it

it

must be
before,

in the singular, as

agrees with uno

is
i

but when

it

comes

agrees with venti, and

h'ra,

therefore in the plural.

Ex.

Vendnia

Lire vent'una,

Twenty-one pounds. Twenty-one pounds.

&e.,

8G. Eleven hundred, twelve hundred,

Italian

are rendered in

by

mille e cento, mille e due cento.

in,

In speaking of years,

the preposition

to the definite article.

which is used Ex.

in English, is joined in Italian

Nel mille quattro cento novanta due l'America fic scoperta, Nel mille sei cento sessanta sei fa venduto il t a sessanta scellini la
libbra,

In fourteen hundred and ninety-two

America was discovered.

In sixteen hundred and
tea
8xty-.si.\,

was

sold at sixty shillings a

pound.

87.

The

transposition of the unit before the ten

is

not admis-

sible in Italian.

Ex.
britta-

Ifa combattuto in venti due

fflie,

He

has fought in two-and-twenty

prisoners

battles.

Furon fatti
88.

trenta tre prigionieri,

Three-and-thirty
taken.

were

The

conjunction between numbers

is

not required, but

may

be used after mille and milione.

I

Ex.

Alessandria fu fondata da Alessandro il grande, tre centotrenta due anni avanti Cristo,

Alexandria was founded by Alexander the Great, three hundred and thirty-two years before Christ.
is

89. In speaking of age, the verb to have

be,

used instead of
IIoio old

to
is

and the expression, of age,

is

not rendered.

translated

by quanti

anni, or che et.

Ex.
old is your brother ?

Quanti anni or che et ha vostro

fratello ? Ha venti anni,

How
He
is

Una sua figlioletta

diecianni.

che aveva forse

One

twenty years of age. of his daughters who was about ten years old.

CARDINAL NUMBERS.

41

KXERCI3E XIX.

There are about four hundred famous pyramids in Egypt, Egitto circa famoso piramide
three great ones, the rest

smaller

the
;

largest

of the tliree

pia grande broad high, and 1028 feet great pyramids is 512 feet in circonferenza piede m. alto planets, Herschel, the most distant of the at the bottom.
resto

pia piccolo

base.

Saturn Saturno giro a fare 29 years 5 mouths, and 17 days; Jupiter 11 years 10 months
takes 84 years to
mette

Urano make his

piti distante

[0)2)
;

pianeta

revolution

round the sun intorno a

Giove

and 14 days; Mars,

1

year 10 months 21 days; the Earth,

Marte (85) year; Venus, 7 months 14 days; Mercury, 2 months 27 days. Venere Mercurio
Virgilio

Virgil

was one-and-fifty years of age when he died at mor (89) (87) (88) Brundusinm, and was buried at Naples 18 years before the
Brindisi
Christian Era.
2
1

The

ind. 3 sepolto

avanti
of Diana, at

Temple
tempio

Ephesus, was supEfeso ind. 2 soskings; each ogni (48)

a

ported by 127 pillars, which were built by 127 tenuto colonna ind. 3 eretto
pillar

was sixty

13

feet high.
4 2

How

old are you ?

At Marathon

(39)

Maratona[2>^)

small town, distant from Athens about two-and-twenty miles, distante Atene (SI) (59) was fought the the Persian battle in which ind. 3 combattuto Persiano (72) battaglia cui
piccolo

army, of a hundred thousand men, was defeated by ten armata, forte disfatto (58) thoxisand Athenians. In 1859.

Ateniese

(86)

43

ORDINAL NUMBERS.

ORDINAL NUMBERS.
Primo,

ORDINAI, NUMBERS.

43

Eighth

he,

his

son

Edward Eduardo
*

the Sixth, Mary,

and Queen

Elizabeth,

all

died

on a Thursday.

tutto
lieu,

morirono in

(33) Cardinal Kiche(33) Cardincde

minister of Louis the Thirteenth, ministro

of

was named the King

appellato

of

The fourth scene the scena plauded. Pope Sixtus the Fifth was
the King,

third act
atto

was much apap-

the son of a poor peasant,

plaudito

Sisto

contadino
hog-driver)

and had been

the

(a

himself;
egli
xii,,

guardiano di porci
son of a

tradesman mercante

John

Adrian vi. was stesso Adriano who added a third

life

circle to the tiara,

Giovanni che aggiunse and wore three crowns, (began

port

cerchio

corona
iv.

aveva cominciato

by
col

mending
raccomodare

shoes)

and Adrian

was the son

of a

scarpe

beggar,

and had been a beggar himself.

mendicante
92.

The
;

dates of the

month are expressed

in Italian

by the

cardinal numbers, preceded by the singular or plural definite

article

in
is

speaking of ihe first day of the month, the or dined

used.

number
II,

Ex.
the 20tli of SeptemLer, the Alh'ea attacked and defeated the Russians at the Alma. In Franje, many presents are exchanged on the 1st of January.
is

i, or li venti Settembre, gli Alleati attaccarono e sconjissero i Bussi all'Alma, Il primo di Gennaio si ricambiano in Francia molti regali,

On

93,
dates,

The
is

preposition on, which

employed in English before

the 5th of November tlie gunplot was discovered.

omitted in Italian.

Ex.
On
powder

II cinque di Novembre fu scoperta la cosjnrazione della jolvere da cannone, Sabato prossimo.

On Saturday

next.

94.

What

o'clock is rendered

by che
| |

ora.

Ex.

A A

che ora fate merenda ? che ora faremo colazione ?

At what At what

o'clock do you hinch ? o'clock shall we breakfast ?

41
95.

ORDINAL NUMBERS.

The word

ora,

which translates
le,

o'clock,

may be

omitted

in the phrases

one o'clock, two

article

o'clock, &c., the cardinal

num-

ber, preceded

by the
all

understood, being

that
alle

is

which agrees with the word ore required. Ex.

Noi facciamo
jranziamo

colazione
alle

otto,

We breakfast at ciglit o'clock, we dine

at half-past five,

cinque e mezzo,

prendiamo

il

te alle sette

quarto, e ceniamo alle quarto,

meno un dicci e un

quarter to seven, and quarter-past ten.

we take tea we sup

at a at a

96. Distributive and Collective numbers

uno ad uno, due a due, Tutti c due, Una coppia, Una dozzina, Bimestre, Trimestre, Semestre, Biennio, Triennio,

Ad

One by

one.

Two

by two.

Both.

A A

couple. dozen.

Two Two
Ten

months.

Three months. Six months.

years.
lustre.

Three years.
Five years, or a
years.

Quinquennio, lustro, Decennio,

Una Due
97.

volta.
volte,

Per uno,

or a testa.

Once. Twice. Each, or a head.

Ago
;

is

rendered in Italian

by/a;
;

this

otto

a fortnight, quindici giorni

this

day week, by oggi day fortnight, oggi a

quindici.

Ex.
la Scozia quindici giorni

Lasciammo
fa,

We

left

Scotland a fortnight ago.

re-

or sono,
otto si riapriranno le scuole.

Oggi a

This day week the schools will

open. In a fortnight
lions.

Fra

quindici vacanze,

giorai

avremo

le

we

shall

have vaca-

EXERCISE XXI.

On
(93)

the 24th of April 1849, General Oudinot disembarked sbarc Generale (92)

at Civita Vecchia with twenty-five thousand

men, and on the

(58)

30th of April the French

attacked attaccarono

Eome

and were repulsed,

ind. 3

Roma

respinto


ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.
leaving in the hands of the Komans, lasciando Romano (61)
valiant

45
led

who were
*

by the

condotto
officers.

Garibaldi,

560 prisoners and fourteen

prigioniere

In

valoroso

ufficiale. six.

Germany, we dined at two o'clock, and we supped at Germania desinavamo cenavamo (95) (You will find me) at home from six to eight o'clock. (I

Mi

called

troverete

casa

We
the

on) your brother-in-law twice. were in Berlin a year ago. cognato da Berlino (96) (97) entered (in) the cave one by one, but in proceeding

We

Passai

Entramyno
passage passaggio

girotta

(96)

{nelV inoltrarci)

widened,
[divenne pi
largo)

and we
train

walked

two
?

by two.
(96)

At what

camminammo
leave
for

This day
(97)
ind. 3

(94)

o'clock does the *

London

Hreno ^parte
arrivo

fortnight all the hours of arrival and

were changed.
cambiato.

We

departure [11) partenza

spent

pound each,
(96)

spendemmo

CHAPTER
In Italian the meaning of nouns
are curtailed of the final vowel.

VI.

ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES. may be

;

modified in various

ways, by adding to them certain syllables

98.

nouns so modified

The

terminations one,
size, strength,

otto,
;

&c., are called augmentatives,

and imply

vigour

feminine nouns modified by

one become masculine.

I.a

Ex.
1

campana,
il

il

campanone,

II ragazzo,

ragazzotto,

The The

bell,

the great bell. boy, the strong, stout boy.

99. Accio, astro, icciattolo, aglia, &c., are called peggiorativi,

and imply contempt,

ugliness.

Ex.

46

ON AUGMENTATIVES AND DIMINUTIVES.

Un soldato, soldataccio, Un poeta, poetastro,

Boldier, a good-for-nothing solJicr,

A A

poet,

a poor rhjmster.
little

La
Un

f/ente,

gentaglia, uomo, omicciattolo,

People, mob. man, a despicable

icello, eretto,

man.

100. Ino,

etto, iccino, oncello, elio,

&c., are called

diminutives, and convey not only an idea of smallness, but also

that of beauty and endearment.

II cane, cagnolino, II viso, visetto, Il libro, libricdno, Il bastone, bastoncello,

Ex.
The The The The
dog, the nice little dog. face, the pretty little face. book, the small book. stick, the small stick. poor man, a poor unfortunate man. The river, the rivulet. An old man, a poor old man.

Un
Un

meschino, meschinello,
vecchio, vecchierello.

Il fiume, fiumicello,

101.

Some

adjectives

and Christian names are modified

in

similar manner.
Ricco, riccone. Fresco, freschetto, Bello, bell7io,

Ex.
Rich, very rich.
Fresh, rather fresh. Beautiful, pretty. White, whitish.

Bianco, bianchiccio, Maria, Marietta, Mariuccia,

Mary,

little

Mary.

102. Adverbs also admit of these modifications,

Poco, pochino, pochetto, Adagio, adagino.
I

Ex.

Bene, benino, benone,

very little. Softly, very softly. Well, pretty well, very well.
little,

of these modifications being very numerous, we only give some of the principal practice and attention, better than rides, will guide the One, student in the application of this peculiarity of the Italian language. accio, and ino are the most commonly used terminations, and may be applied

The

list

to almost all words, whilst the others cannot be used indiscriminately.

EXERCISE XXII.

in

walk along a small stream, Every evening we take a Ogni facciamo passeggiata lungo [100) ruscello play. which a thousand little fish You speak Italian

cui
well,

(41)
sister pretty well,

pesce sguizzano

parlate

your

but your brother very well.

This
and

(102)
piece of music

must be played very slowly

dev'

at the beginning,

pesso

sonata

(1^2)

principio

OM COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.

a
little,

47

very
for

little

faster

at the

end.
fine
little

I will

buy a

little

pia presto
doll

ruy
art.

little sister.

Her

(100)

hands are too small

piccolo

fantoccio

for these great gloves.

We have given some

dato

money
danaro

to the poor

(99)
old

man, who
che

is

led

by a nice

little

dog, that carries a

little

basket in his mouth. * bocca. paniere

bell

Avery on Sundays. She pronounces pronunzia (98) (93) Domenica. should read a very A
little

(100)

condotto

porta (100) strong lad rings the great church * (98) suona
Italian very well, but she

slower.

great dog

frightened

(100) poor little Margaret. (101) Margherita.

dovrebbe

piiX

adagio

ha spaventato

CHAPTER

VII.

ON COMrARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES,

In Italian, the comparative degrees of superiority and
feriority are
in-

formed by translating more., pi;

generally translated by

less,

mono

and

than by di or che. 103.

I'/'ian

is

(Z/

before all pronouns

and numeral

adjectives.

Ex.
There are none more credulous tLan those who have an interest in
being deceived.

Xon

vi gente pia credula di quella che ha interesse di essere ingannata, La Grecia era pi colta di tutte le altre nazioni dell' antichit, Non mi mandate meno di cento lire,

Greece was more polished than any

Do

other nation of antiquity. not send me less than a hundred

pounds.

104.

The

personal pronouns following di must be in the ob-

jective case, not, as in English, in the nominative.

Ex.

48
J^lla pill dotta di lui,

ON COMPARATIVES.
She
di
is

more learned than he.

wiser than
I.

Eglino sono

stati

pi saggi

me,

They have been

by a verb, of which it is the subject, than is rendered by che, and the pronoun is used in the nominative, as in English. Ex.

But when

a personal pronoun is followed

La

lingua Italiana pi facile che

The

io

non credeva,

Italian language I thought.

is easier

than

105. When the comparison is made between two mjimtives, two adverbs, or two adjectives, than is translated by che, and also when the two 7iou7is compared are only separated by than.

meglio salvare

condannare un Faceva pi caldo

un colpevole che innocente, ieri che oggi,

It is better to acquit a. criminal to It

than

condemn an innocent person. was warmer yesterday than tothan never. hair was more white than
there

E meglio tardi che mai,

I suoi
caplli erano biondi,

day.
It is better late

pi bianchi che
che

Her

fair.

Vi s'incontrano pi uomini
donne,

One meets women.

more men than

106. Before proper names, as in

many

other cases, than

may

a comparazione, in comparison of, is understood, and when che is employed, the verb of the proposition, accompanied by non, can be repeated if the sense of the phrase does not admit of this reEx. petition, che is not to be used.
is

be rendered by di or che ; when di

used, the expression

Cesare pi stimato (a comparazione) di Pompeo, or che (non )

Cfcsar pey-

is

more esteemed than Pom-

Pompeo,

L'uomo
)

meno paziente (a comparazione) della donna, or che [non

Men

are less patient than

women.

la donna,

107.
it IS

When

than

is

followed by a verb not in the

infinitive,

expressed by di quel che, or che non.

terra son

Ex.
to

I grandi della

meno da in-

The

vidiarsi di quel che or che non si crede, II savio ascolta j)i di quel che, or che non parla,

great of the earth are less envied than we think.

be

wise person listens more than he

speaks.

ON COMPARATIVES.
EXERCISE
Silver
is less

49

XXIII.

precious than gold.

argento
robbers.
ladro.
is

preziosailOQ)
is

[bl] usuraio

Usurers are worse than peggiore

is

He

richer than a.krog, because he

happier.

It

better to

forgive

perch (103) than to revenge, In the

first

centuries the
secolo

meglio * perdonare [105) * vendicarsi. Eomans were more warlike than literary. guerriero (105) letterato.

feigned
[12) simulato
is

peace

is

more dangerous than an open war.

pericoloso

Nothing
Niente

more

pace
passeggiero
attract

aperto

transient than

beauty.

The

charms of a cultivated mind

incanto
coltivato

more than the graces of the most

grazia
is

faultless forms.

He

allettano
is less

poor than

believed.

He

perfetto forma. owes his success more to chance

piil

(107)
tlian to merit.

si

crede.

deve

successo

caso
really

Many
am

strive to obtain

more than they

merito. cercano ottenere realmente (107) want, and to appear better than they are. You are richer sembrare migliore abbisognano

(105)

than

I,

but I

happier than you.

(103) (104)

quired) in good fortune than in chiede fortuna {105) cattivo

Greater virtue hnaggior bad, Croesus had more gold

(is re^si ri^

Creso ind. 2

oro

but Cyrus had better iron than conquistatore Ciro miglior ferro {106) early than late. Croesus. It is better to rise meglio levarsi di buon ora (105) tardi.
than his

conqueror

Cyrus

108.

The

following adjectives

may

form the comparative de-

grees in two ways,

Ex.
pia buono, or migliore*
p)i cattivo, ox peggiore,
are

Buono,
Cattivo,

good, bad,

better.

worse,

* Migliore, peggiore,

things
ciali-

War

is tlie is

worst of social

move generally used in speaking of abstract evils, la guerra il peggiore dei mah soil

Possession

better than hope,

possesso migliore della speranza.

50
Graide,

ON COMPARATIVES.

pi grande^ or maggiore^\
larger, greater.

Large, great,
Piccolo^

pia piccolo, or minore,

smaller.

Small,

109. In speaking of physical size, piii grande, pi, piccolo,

must be
vostro,

used,

and not maggiore, minore.

Ex.
is

// mio giardino e pi grande del

My

garden

larger than yours.

La

luna e pi piccola della terra,

The moon

is

smaller llian the earth.

110.

The

following adverbs form the comparative degrees

without the help oi pi or meno.

Ex,

Bene,


COMPARISONS OP EQUALlTV.
the desire
desiderio
lizard,

51
is

of doing better.

fare

but of the

The (110) same Xenophon

crocodile
coccodrillo
fatoily.

hirger than the

(109)
acquired greater
acquist

lucertola

stesso

Senofonte
2

(108)

glory from his celebrated retreat than celebre ritirata {107) con

(many modern

(have obtained) from great victories, ^sub. 1 ottenuto con

COMPARISONS OF EQUALITY.
111. Comparisons of equality arc formed as follows
:

FIRST TERM.
Cos or si, as or so, Tanto, altrettanto, as or so

SECOND TEEM.
Come, as. Quanto, as.
Quale, as. Pi, or tanto pi, the more. Meno, or tanto meno, the less.

much.
Tale, such,

Pi, or quanto

pil,

the more,

Meno,

or quanto meno, the less,

Tanto, quanto, should be used in forming comparisons of quantit!/.

Ex.
Naples has not as

Napoli non ha tanti abitanti quanti ne ha Parigi, L'occhio del servitore non xmle mai cos bene come l'occhio delpadrone, Questa stanza tanto lunga quanto
la vostra e larga,

many

inhabitants

Ve

lo

descrivevo tale quale l'ho veduto.

as Paris. servant's eye never sees so well as a master's. This room is as long as yours is broad. I will describe it to you as I have

seen
Pi, or quanto pi, pi, or tanto pi, giudicare,

it.

uno uno

e ignorante
j)'''onto

The more ignorant one

ready one
is to

is,

the moro

judge.
less

Meno, or quanto meno, studierete meno, or tanto meno, imparerete,

The

less

you study, the

you

will

know.

112.
if

The

first

terms, cos, tanto, tale,

maybe
Ex.

omitted, but not

they relate to nouns of different gender.

non
gonzo

Ef]li

come ne ha

l'aria,

Non ha
cato,

studiato quanto sua sorella,

He He

is not so silly as he looks. has not studied as much as his

sister.

Si e mostrato quale l'avevamo giudi-

He

has shown himself such as

to be.

we

judged him


52
COMPARISONS OF EQUALITV.

il

La povert

nemico dell'indigente, il dissoluto ne ha tanti, quante sono le sregolate sue brame,

solo

Poverty

is

man
\

numerous as

tbe only enemy of the poor those of the dissohite are as his unbridled desires.
.a

113. Tanto, quanto

are used as adjectives,

tale, quale,

when governed by
Ex.

noun,

and are declinable.

1

I tiranni hanno
sono
i

tanti nemici quanti

loro sudditi,

Tyrants have as many enemies as they have subjects.

114. Al

par

di,

equally, as,

may be

used instead of

cosi,

come

tanto, quanto.

Ex.
al

Si mostrarono valorosi

par degli

They proved themselves

Non

antichi Spartani, sarete ricompensato al par di vostra sorella.

You

as valiant as the ancient Spartans. shall not be equally rewarded as

your

sister.

EXERCISE XXV.

The

inhabitants of towns are not

country.

as healthy as those of the quello (111) sano The more he studies the more he wishes to study. desidera studia (HI)

She

is

not so

proud

as her sister.

This
as

orgoglioso
other.

Aristides

was

as valiant

Aristide
are not so high as they
alto

valoroso

appear in

pen is as bad as the penna (112) Those mountains just. giusto. Quello montagna the distance. The more

* distanza. sembrano others (we praise ourselves,) the more we dispose

ci

to criticize

lodiamo

disponiamo
as a good

our defects.
be.

He was such

a criticare and happy man should

art. altro

dovrebbe

His conduct was not such

condotta

as his enemies
la

represented.

rappresentarono
veneration for

The more he

studied nature, the

more he

felt

studiava

(25)
of the

sentiva

the wisdom and omnipotence onnipotenza sapienza

Creator.

The

soldiers

were praised as much as

ind. 3

their officers,

(114)


ON 6UPEELATIVE8. 58

ON SUPERLATIVES.
115.
Is/,

The Superlative Absolute By changing the final vowel of

Ex.
grandissimo.

is

formed,

adjectives

and adverbs

into

issiiuo.

Grande,
Great,
Piccolo,
Little,

very great.
piccolissimo.

very

little.

Male, Badly, Bene, Well,

are formed

malissimo,

very badly.
benissimo.

very well.
to ad-

Observe
jectives,

Adverbs which

by adding mente
final

form the superlative by omitting the

vowel of the

adjective,

and adding issimamente.

grandemente,
greatly,

Ex.
cjrandissimamente.

Grande,
Great, Dotto,

very greatly.
dottissimamente. very learnedly.

Learned,
2dly,

dottamente, learnedly,

By

translating very by the adverbs molto, assai, oltre-

modo, &c., or by a repetition of the adjective.

Egli ajjpartiene ad una famiglia assai ricca e molto stimata, Voi mi sembrate oltremodo afflitto, Quando mi vide, ella divenne rossa,
rossa,
I

Ex.

He

belongs to a very rich aud esgrieved.

teemed family.

You seem very much

When
red.

she saw me, she became very

116. Adjectives ending in io lose these two vowels before the

superlative tennination zWrno
;

and those ending in co and ^o,

ca and ga, which take an h in the plural (see 50, 51), also
take
it

before issimo.
wise.
rich.

Ex.
Savissimo,
Biechissimo,

Savio,

Bieco,

Largo,
117.

wide.

very wise. very rich. Larghissimo, very wide.

A few adjectives
miserable.
bitter.

form the superlative absolute in errimo.

Ex.
Misero,
Acre,

Miserrimo,
Celeberrimo, Acerrimo, Integerrimo, Saluberrimo,

Celebre, celebrated.

Integro, honest.

Salubre, salubrious.

very very very very veiy

miserable.
celebrated.
bitter.

honest.
salubrious.


54

ON SUPEKLATIVEB.
EXERCISE XXVI.

Tlie study of languages studio (25)

liouis the

is

very agreeable and very useful. piacevole

Eleventh and Ferdinand of Spain were both very

(91)

Spagna
nondimeno
and
questi

(96)

cruel

and very
of very

perfidious, nevertheless (the former)

assumed the
assunse

perfido
title

quegli

Christian,

(the latter)

of Catholic.

wise

men have

very often made great

spesso fatto

Very (116) mistakes. He

Cattolico.
2

is

savio (58)

very rich

and very honest.

(117)

Michael
and

(80) (57) sbaglio.

Angelo was a (very

(116)

Michelangiolo
architect.)

celebrated) (painter, sculptor,

Napoleon

made

architetto. ^pittore scultore (117) very favourable laws for the Jews, and during his reign durante Ebreo regno favorevole legge

many

occupied very high posts. Tlio ancient Gauls were very occuparono Gallo eminente carica.
vain and fond of ornaments, and wore bracelets, necklaces, portavano smaniglia collana vano amante

and rings of gold, of very great value.

anello
salubrious.

The

sea air
(3) aria

is

very

valore.
It is

much

easier to
facile

(117) example. esempio.

teach by precept than by insegnare per precetto

118.
il

The Superlative Relative

Ex.

is

formed by placing

il piii^

meno, before the adjective.

T^ixx

11
Il

felice degli uomini,

meno

La

grazia

allegro della brigata, la pi nobile parte della

The happiest of men. The least gay of the party.

Grace
is

the noblest part of beauty.

bellezza,

119. Tlie article

the noun.

may

be omitted when pi and meno follow

Ex.

 A
ON SUPERLATIVES.
Kossuth

55
is

Voratore pi eloquente dei

Washington

nostri tempi, il cittadino pi grande che abbia prodotto l'America,

the most eloquent oiator of our day. Washington is the greatest citizen

Kossuth

America has

proihiceJ.

120, Adjectives ending in ore require no adverb to form the

superlative relative.

Ex.
il

// maggiore,

minore,

il

migliore,

il

The
121.
gree,

greatest,

the least,

the best,

peggiore. the worst.

The

following words express the superlative absolute dearticle the superlative relative
:

and preceded by the

Ottimo, very gooJ, Pessimo, very had,

Massimo, very great, Minimo, very little.

Sommo, very high. Infimo, very low.

L'ottimo, the host. Jl pessimo, the worst. Jl massimo, the greatest. II minimo, the least. // sommo, the highest. L'infimo, the lowest.

EXERCISE XXVII.

The language
their history.

of a people

is

the most important

monument
monumento

of

popolo

Gold
(25)

is

sua

storia.

the purest and most precious of metals. puro prezioso metallo.

God's power extends (1) potere si estende

from the lowest abyss of the earth to the {121) abisso Men gifted with the best underhighest part of the heavens. cielo dotato di (120) intelstanding and the greatest genius do not always shine in congenio sempre brillano letto (17)

fersation.

The

richest people are not always the

most

satisfied.

contento
is

The most pernicious of crimes

pernicioso
delitto

slander,

it

often

ruins the
the

ccdunnia essa spesso rovina

it

reputation of the most honest people,

disunites

gente {mette la discordiafra)

most intimate
intimo
peaceful

friends, and, in short, is the worst of crimes.

fine
is

conscience

the

highest

happiness

of

man.

^tranquillo ^coscienza


5G

ON SUPERLATIVES.
highest Christian virtue, and the most difficult to practise, ^ * praticarsi
love our enemies.
seat of true

The
is to

(121)

Nature
(25)
is

is

a temple worthy of Deity. Divinit tempio degno

heart.

The

religion

the

Public worship
cidto

is

the

sede

[^'2) religione

{&\) cuore
to the

public expression of

homage
omaggio

Sovereign

of the universe.

(62)

Monarca

ADDITIONAL EXERCISE.
Adversities and difficulties

weaken
indeboliscono
^

ordinary minds, and

^

(48) Avversit

(57)
^

^spirito

redouble

the faculties and energy of superior souls.

Sudden
repentino

raddoppiano changes are always dangerous.

who

lives

indefinitely,

and

Humanity (25) umanit learns In

is

like

man

{simile a)

ever.

1667 theatrical
Heatrale
o'clock,

vive

indefinitamente
in

representations

impara France began

(28)
four.

(86)
at

two
of

and
tlje

^rappresentazione

cominciavano

ended at half-past terminavano

The

(95)

mosaics

Rome

are

(53) mosaico

most famous

in

Europe.

Florence
may

produces the most beautiful

produce
inlaid woods.

Mosaics

(79)

{intarsi in legno)

a kind of painting, be called pittura {si possono appellare)

landscapes being formed of atoms of stone, atomo {51) paesaggio south marble, or wood. The twilight in the is much mezzogiorno crepuscolo
the figures and
shorter than in the
north.
settentrione.

(106)

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

57

CHAPTER

Vili.

58

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

Third Person

Fern.


PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
on the pronoun
after the verb.
;

59

in this case the

pronouns are generally placed

Ex.
I teacli you Italian and you teach

10 insegno a voi l'Italiano e voi insegnate a me l'Inglese, 11 maestro lod lei perche stata diligente, e biasimo lui per essere
negligente,

me

English.

The master

praised her hecause she has been attentive, and blamed

Farlo a

voi

Enrico,

him for being negligent. I speak to you, Henry.

123.

The

conjunctive pronouns are used

when

there

is

dative or one accusative in the

same phrase,

they

one

are placed

before the verb,

lo cajnsco,

and

in

Egli mi 2)arla Francese, Io

le

compound tenses before the auxiliary. Ex. He speaks French to me, but I do ma io non
deW AlI

ho promesso

le

tragedie

not understand him. have promised her Alfieri's tragedies.

fieri,

' EXERCISE XXVIII.

The
maker
zolaio
little,

milliner has not

sent

me my

modista
sent (to)

mandare (123)
him
his boots?

bonnet. cappellino
cost

Has
me

the shoecal-

My

verses

very

(123)
said a
disse

stivale
;

costare

(H^)

bad poet
(99)

they cost you what they are worth, was (ceo che vagliano) ind. 3
to

answered
risposto

to

him.

Did you speak

this

me

or to her ?

The

letter

(123) (122) was addressed to me, but was brought to indirizzare (122) portare

my

brother.

I have
did not

met
incontrare
recognise

them
me.

morning

in the

museum, but they

galleria

riconobbero (123)
(to)

John's barons forced liim to grant Giovanni (1) costrinsero a concedere

charter,

them the famous

and they
(to)

called

it

Magna
us.

carta
Charta.

-chiamare Ha
those

Men
*

Carta
(25)

(We should not believe) Non dovrebbe dar

si

who
;

flatter

fede

coloro che adular e {12 o)

naturally love friends

who

love

them

but religion

The

regular verbs will be henceforth given in the present of the infinitive.


60 PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

The book he gave

he gave
(to)

teaches us to love our enemies, and to do good to them. 2 insegnare ad [far ^del bene
(to)

you
(122)

is

better

bound (than the one)

di quello che

die dette

{110) rilegare (123)

me.

Have you

invited her ?

124.
2ia(\

The CONJUNCTIVE pronouns

it

are placed after the verb

:

joined to

in the following cases

1st,

When
is

they come with a verb in the

omitted.

infinitive,
if it

in

which

case the final e of the infinitive is dropped,

and

ends in rre,

the final re
disegno,

Ex.
il

Aveva incominciato ad insegnarmi

Spero (^'indurlo a venire a passare vacanze con me,

He had begun

to teach

me

drawing.

le

I hope to induce him to come and spend the vacations with me.

2dly, '^'xih present &xi.past participles.

Scrivendogli potete informarlo del vostro progetto, Fattaci Vimbasciata, par a gambe,

Ex.

In writing to him, you can inform him of your phan. Having given us the message, he ran
off.

2dl>/,

With

the imperative used affirmatively.

Ex.

Eipetetemi la lezione.
Consigliatela
nente,

ad andare

sid Conti-

Kepeat your lesson to me. Advise her to go on the Continent.

Prestatemi

il

vostro temperino,

Lend me your

penknife.

With

the imperative used negatively, or with the third per-

sons of this mood, even

when used
Ex.
1

affirmatively, the conjunctive

pronouns />receJe the verb.

Nonmi parlate pili su questo

Le dica la Mi dicano
125.
verit,

soggetto,

Do

not speak to
tell

me any more

on this

subject.

Let him

quello che

hanno fatto,

her the truth. Letthem tell me what they have done.

is

When

the verb to which the pronoun

is

joined ends in
initial confirst

an accented vowel, or
case the accent

composed

of

one syllable, the

sonant of the pronoun, except of

is

gli, is

doubled, and in the

omitted.

Ex.


PEIISONAL I'KONOUNS.
CI

Appena

ci vide, invitocci

a pranzo,

As

soon as be saw us, he invited us

the favour of translating thy
is

to dinner.

Fammi

il

favore di tradunx la tua

Do me

lettera in Inglese,

letter into English.

Dalle la musica che sid inanofurtc,

Give her the music which

piano.

on the

EXERCISE XXIX.
us, makes us healthy and happy. Mirth, by cheering * rallegrare {\2i) rendere [l^Z) sano gioia felice.

Did you repeat

you see
Lord. Signore.

to her

my

words

Do not speak
take

to

me when
quando
sailh the

ripetere (123)

me

occupied.

Give

me

occupare.

(125)

(thy whole heart,) tutto il tuo cuore

dice
to Italy

My father has promised me to

promesso

me

when

(I

condurre (124) in In praising you he shall be able) to speak Italian. * * lodare (122) potr

by railway either [colla strada ferrata) o (124) steam-boat. It was customary amongst the ancient or by the {battello a vapore.) costume fra
praises himself.
se stesso.

Send me the books

Gauls
Gcdlo

to

immerse their children in cold water ^ ^ immergere

strong.

(in order to)

onde

make them
rendere
shall

Teach

(to)

insegnare
thee
;

thy son obedience, and he ubbidienza

bless

teach

him

science,

and his

life

shall be use-

benedire
fui;

(124) scienza
viorte

teach him religion, and his death shall be happy.

Let them
(to)

write to

me

often,

and
[io

I will never fail

to

answer
rispondere

non mancher mai)

them.
126.

The English neuter

objective pronouns
Zo,

it.,

them,

aie

rendered in Italian by the conjunctive pronoun

w-hich in this

case serves as a relative pronoun, and agrees with the antecedent

to

which

it relates,

tlie

rules given for the conjunctive pronouns.

and precedes or follows the verb according to Ex.

62
Chi ha preso

PHK30NAL PRONOUNS.
U mio
zio,

ombrello

Lo

Who

ha preso vostro
Idajete la lezione

Non

la so,

Do you know
know
it.

has taken my umbrella ? Your uncle has taken it. the lesson ? I do not has given you those Leautiful

Chi vi ha dato questi

bei fiori ?

Who

flowers ?

Li ho comprati, Sulla piazza di Palazzo Vecchio a Firenze vi sono delle bellissime statue ; le avete vedute ?

I have bought them. In the square of the old Palace statues.

in

Florence there are very beautiful Have you seen them ?

ti,

127.

The
ne.

conjunctive pronouns mi,

ci, vi, si,

change the
lo,

final i into e
la,
li,

when followed by any

of the relative pronouns

These pronouns are written separately when they come before the verb, and are joined to it when they follow. Ex.
le,

me hfece vedere, Nel mostrarmelo, egli mi disse. Ve ne abbiamo avvertito in vano. Dove avete comprato questi aranci Ce li ha regalati il nonno,
II custode

Tlie keeper

In showing

We
:

showed it to me. it to me, he said to me. warned you of it in vain. Where have you bought tliose Our grandfather has oranges ? made us a present of them.
I cannot lend
it

Non posso
So ne sono

prestarvelo,
jjentiti,

to you.

They have repented

of

it.

Observe

By the above

examples

it

will

be seen that in Ita-

lian the relative

pronouns are placed after the conjunctive, and

not, as in English, before.

In poetry, and for elegance, mei,

tei,

eel, vel, cen,

&c., are

used instead of
Ors
Mirtillo,

me

lo, te lo,

ce

lo,

ve

lo,

ce ne, &c.

Ex.

Non

Zan. Dio vel perdoni, Temo cen privi. Tasso.

mei jermise.

vada.

G.

tempo che tu ten

Mirtillo, it is time

thou wert going.

to

P. Fido.

He did not allow May God pardon

it

me.
this.
it.

you

I fear he will deprive us of

same pronouns, the pronouns are generally repeated with each verb. Ex. Niuna accademia si puo attribuire No academical body can arrogate the
128.
several verbs govern the

When

piena e sovrana signoria sopra una lingua. L'uso del popolo che la parla il sovrano padrone ; i dotti, gli scrittori, jossono bens mantenerla, illustrarla, pulirla, ed accrescerla,

entire and supreme control of a The custom of the language. people who speak it becomes an absolute standard authors and scientific men may, however, maintain, illustrate, puiify, and enrich it.
;

Lo amiamo

e lo

stimiamo,

We

love

and esteem him.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

G3

EXERCISE XXX.

Fear

warns

us

of dangers,

firmness

removes

them,

timore avvertire (123)

pericolo fermezza allontanare (126)

and restores rendere

exercise, read

composure to us. calma (123)

me, and (12G)(127)
it

When

you have written the

fat.

scritto

to

I will

correct

it.

A bad poet
(99)
sent
it

correggere

having written a

Benedict the Fourteenth, the satira contro Benedetto (91)

satire against
it,

Pope examined
back
*
sell it

and

after

having corrected
inf.

it

to

rimandare the author, assuring him that thus corrected he would

(12G)

dopo

corretto

much

better.

The

accertare (124:)
libraio

cos

bookseller begged

me

to tell

you that
send

pregare

he has not

yet

received the French books, but he will

ancora

(72)
tosto che

them
to

to

you

(as soon as) they arrive.

Either

mandare
sell

or lend

it

me.

Dante
it

(127)

fut.
its

found the Italian language in

trovare

cradle,

m. and

(128)
placed

cuna,

on a throne.
[sul trono)

Courtiers
tell
it

pose

from monarchs cortigiano nascondere a

hide
to

the truth, historians alone

storico

them.

dicono

129.

The pronoun

gli,

when followed by a
i
i,

relative pronoun,

instead of changing the final

into e like the other conjunctive

pronouns, takes an e after the final

the relative pronoun.

and forms one word with

give
it

Ex.
I will

Glielo dar volentieri, Glieli /iO spediti, ed a quest'ora deve averli ricevuti, I suoi amici gliene parlarono in

to

bim

willingly.

have sent them to him, and he must have received them by this. His fi lends spoke to him of it in
confidence.

confidenza,

130. Glie

is

also used for the feminine instead of

le,

when

fol-

lowed by a relative pronoun.

Ex.

64
Su che mia cur/ina
gliene

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

ama

fiori,

ed

io

know my

mando

sovente,
x>oicli

Dovete darglielo avete promesso,

voi glielo

You must
foi-

cousin likes flowers, anJ I send lier some often. give it to her, as you have

promised

it

to her.
is

131.
Avith or

loro,

to them, serves

both genders, and

used

without the preposition a;

it

always follows the verb,

and

is

never joined to any other word.

1

Ex.

Presentai a loro, or loro mia moglie, Nc detti a loro, or loro la met, inutile dar loro, or a loro dei

I introduced my wife to them. I gave them the half.

It is useless to give

them good

ad-

huoni

consirjli,

vice.

132.

When
Ex.

a conjunctive
is,

word
to
it.

ecco, here

there

is, it

pronoun is accompanied by the must be placed after it, awjomed

Here I

Eccomi iironto a

servirvi,

am

ready to serve you.

llere they

Dove sono

gli altri

Eccoli,

Where
are.

are the others ?

arc

Eccoci giunti,

Here we

an

133. Wlien the pronouns myself, thjself himself e^c, only

repeat the subject of a verb which
is

not reflective, they are

omitted, or rendered by io stesso, tu stesso, egli stesso, &c., and

not literally by
L'ho tradotto io, Gli ho parlato io
Ella stessa
ci

me

stesso, te stesso, lui stesso,

&c.

Ex.

stesso,

ha

sgridali.

I translated it myself. I spoke to him myself. She scolded us herself.

134.

But when
aWomhra

these pronouns are used as reflective pronouns,

ti, si,

they are expressed by mi,

ci, vi, si.

Ex.

Mi

riposai
si

di

una guer-

cia,

Ella

abbigli elegantemente,
si

In vano

lusingano di persuaderci,

1 rested myself under the shade of an oak. She dressed herself elegantly. They vainly flatter themselves that

Ci rassegnammo al nostro destino,

We
oblige

they will persuade us. resigned ourselves to our

fate.

EXERCISE XXXI.

The

Greeks, (in order to)

(51)

their wives to remain at

onde
(to)

costringere
to

(58)

home, forbid
proibire

them
(131)

wear shoes

in the house.

He wrote
scrisse

portare

*
sister

himself (his own epitaph). n33) il proprio epitaffio

Your

wished
desiderare

to

see

tho


TEIISONAL PKONOUNS.
pictures that I

65

have bought

Florence, and I have sent Ihcni

quadro
to her.

Virtue unites men

;

(126)

by inspiring
coll'
inf.

(to)

them with
(131)
^'"<^

mu-vicen-

(25) tual confidence devole 'Sfiducia

(130)

vice,

on

the

contrary,

separates

them, by
(1'23) col

opposto

dividere

keeping them (on their guard one against the other.) Here is a inf. in guardia gli uni contro gli altri (132) (124) letter for your master, have the goodness to give it to him. bont padrone (129)

Where

are

my aunt's
,
zia
it to

gloves ?

I sent

them

to her after breakfast.

guanto
her,

is.

I will

show

but

mostrarei. (130)

(130) can not give it to her. posso (124)

to you.

Here

it

(132)m.
ready to

have brought it to show portare per follow you. ! saw it myself.

I

it

Here we

are,

(123)

seguire

r/fZ/m. (133)

Ci, Vi,

Ne.

Ci and vi are not only used as conjunctive pronoims, as

we

have already seen, but also as relative pronouns, and as adverbs,

when they
they

generally answer to the French word y.

However

may

be employed, they follow the rules already given for

as relative pronouns, signify

conjunctive pronouns.
135. Ci and
vi, cf,
to,

for, in, at,

upon

it,

them.
ci

Ex.
AVlien I Lave thought of it, I will take a resolution. are great misfortunes, but we cannot help them. Ecfore undertaking anything, one

Quando

avr pensato risolver,

Sono grandi sventure, siamo rimediarvi,

ma

non poscosa

They

Prima
136.

d'intrapreidere
riflettervi,

una

convien

should reflect about

it.

Used
ci

as adverbs, ci translates here, and vi there.

Ex.

Ora die

sono, voglio restarci fino

Now

alla fine,

To non ce la ho mai veduta,

Xoi

vi

andremo

(pianto

imma,

that I am here, I will remain here to the end. I have never seen her here. "We will go there soon.

G6

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
137. In order to prevent repetition, vi and ci are substituted

for

each other.
ci

Ex.
1

Vi

condussero, not vi vi condus-

They took you

there.

sevo,
I

138.

Ne

is

used as a conjunctive pronoun, instead of

;

ci,

in

poetry, or in a lofty style

it is

also

employed as a
to the

relative proit,

noun, to render some, any,

them, away,

of,

for, about, concerning him, her,

from a
mi

place.

It

answers

French word

en.

Ex.
Ne ho
^Q
tanti che
il

bastano,

1 htave quite

enough of them.
it

parliamo costantemente,

We

speak of

constantly.

Dopo
Efjli

primo

atto se ne and,

ne parla con molto interesse,

After the first act he went away. He speaks of bini or it with much
interest.

Avete danari ?

Ne

ho,

Have you money ?

to

have some.

139.
in

Ne

is

employed

supply the omission of a noun, which

English

is

often understood.

Ex.
Have you any
I I will give one. Italian books ?

Avete dei libri italiani? Ne ho dueo tre, Ve ne dar io uno interessantissimo,

have two or three. you a very interesting

often brings

Una

disgrazia spesso ne conduce

One misfortune

many.

seco molte,

EXERCISE XXXII.
Flchier

was of low
basso

extraction
estrazione

bishop
vescovo
:

having once
(96)

alluded to it with contempt, he replied (My lord,) there rispose Monsignore disprezzo fare allusione {135) is this difference between you and me, if you (had been) born in

my
of a

father's shop,

fra you would be there

still.

foste

nato

It is characteristic

[1) bottega
fool

to say, I did not think of

proprio ancora This rule is not difit.

sezocco (34)
ficult if

pensare (135)
to
it.

regola
it.

you pay attention fare

sapere

You

will succeed in

If

riuscire (135)
will

you do not know the way, I

accompany you there. accompagnare (137)

It

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

G7
orations at the

was an ancient Roman custom

burial of old

to recite

funeral

recitare funebre orazione

women

Cajsar

was the

first to recite

one at the

funerale
death of his wife. morte
viation,

Cesare inch 3

Stenography,
in

(139) or the art of writing in abbreinf.

Stenografia ossia

abhre-

was used
[si

Eome
it.

in the time of Cicero,

who
some

viatura
(it

cominci

ad usare)
(138)

Cicerone che

is

said)

was the inventor of

it.

Some
Chi
s.

laugh at

it,

si dice

weep

for

piangere

There are
(139)

three.

Are there any public pubblico (50) Here some nuts

are
fine

ridere (138)

libraries in this

town?

biblioteca
;

take some yourself,

{\2A.)

(132)
to

bello noce

{n^) per

voi

and give some

your

little sister.

art.

(100)

ON POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE.
FEMININE.

PLURAL.
MASCULINE. FEMININE.
miei,
tuoi,

Mio^
Tuo, Suo, Nostro,
Vostro,

nna,
tua,

mie,
tue.

my, mine,
thy, thine,
his, hers, her, its.

sua,

suoi,
nostri,
vostri,

sue.

nostra,
vostra,
loro,

nostre,

our, ours,

vostre.
loro.

your, yours,
their, theirs.

Loro,

loro,

140. In Italian, possessive pronouns agree with the thing j90ssessed,

by the
II

definite article.

and not with the possessor; and are generally preceded Ex.
la vostra giustizia, lo

mio dovere,
loro virt.

My
He

duty, your justice, their virtues.

Egli

amo

la stia

patria pi della sna

loved bis country more than his

vita,

life.

141.

The
is

article is

omitted when the pronouns, loro excepted,

In the plural,

precede nouns of kindred or rank in the singular.

the article
used.

Ex.

C8 Tua madre
e

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
Ina sorella furono a
Vittoria,

Tliy mother and tLy sister were at

casa di mia zia, Sua Ifaest la Ber/ina

Il loro

my

aunt's.

cugino abita in Firenze, Le mie sorelle ed i miei fratelli sono adesso in Italia,

Her Majesty Queen Victoria. Their cousin lives in Florence.

My

sisters

and

my

brothers are

now

in Italy.
is

142.

When

the noun of kindred in the singular

preceded
ter-

by an
II

adjective, or modified
is

by a diminutive or augmentative

mination, the article

amorosa madre,

prefixed to the pronoun.

Ex.

vostro ottimo j^ndre, e la vostra

Your
I

excellent father, and your affectionate mother.

little

Ho

dato

al

vostro
voi,

fratellino

una
dis-

gave your
you.

brother a letter for

sister

lettera

per

La sua

sorellaccia

mi fa sempre

jnacere,

His disagreeable pleases me.

always

dis-

143.

The

possessive pronouns
is

may

be placed after the noun,

and

in this case the article

placed before the noun instead of

the pronoun.

Ex.
I

L'Eccellenza vostra, II padre nostro, II dover mio, Vonor suo,

Your Excellency. Our father.

My

duty, his honour.

144.

The

possessive pronouns require the article

when they

precede the following nouns of kindred.

II mio genitore,
instead ofjmdre,

,,

father.

La mia genitrice,
Il tuo germano, La tua germana, Il suo sposo, Il suo consorte,

madre,
sorella,

mother.
sister.

fratello, brother.

marito,
moglie,

husband.

wife.

La La

vostra sposa, vostra consorte,

EXEUCISE XXXIII.
Cornelia, the mother of the Gracchi,
said
disse
to

her friends
(140)
f.

as
mentile

she showed (to) them her sons,

"There

are

my jewels."

His

gioiello. mostrare (132) (131) Holiness Pope Adrian the Fourth, the only Englishman [III) Santit solo Adriano {l\)

che sia

(who ever attained) mai pervenuto

to that dignity, rendered rese

his

memory

(140) memoria


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
G'J

infamous by condemning Arnaldo da Brescia

to

be burned.

* bruciare. ad infame " If you lose your colours, round rally to be sure raccogliervi intorno stendardo [non mancate)

my

white

feather

you

will

ever

find

it

in the

road

to

pennacchio
(35)
ind. 3

sempre
celebre

(12G) su

cammino
(141)

di

honour and glory," were the celebrated words of his Majesty,

Henry
Give

the Fourth, to his troojjs

before the

battle

of Ivry.

truppa innanzi

battaglia

my

compliments
saluto

to

your
(142)

little sister

and

to

your aunt.
obstinacy
ostinazione

Fare
(It

(141)

has been) remarked of rimarcare Fu

the

Jews, that

their

Ebreo

aumentare

increased with their misfortunes. sventura.

his

Cato,
Catone

surnaraed the censor, censore

the

was distinguished by per distinto

austerit

ardent love of his country,

(17)
his inflexible integrity.
inflessibile integrit.

austerity of his manners,

and

costume

145.

When

the noun, preceded by the possessive pronoun,

is

is

used in a vague and indefinite sense, the article

before the pronoun.

not required

Ex.
lettere,

Aspetto con impazienza vostre

I expect impatiently letters from you.

Per amor mio

egli vi consent,

He
It

Era

suo parere che non vi andassimo,

was

consented to it for my sake. his opinion that we should

not go.

146.

The
by

possessive pronouns mine, thine, &c., are rendered

il

in Italian

mio,

il

tuo,

&c.

these pronouns agree in gender

and number with

Ecco
il

their antecedent.

Ex.
is

vostro cappello, mio,

il

non prendete
della

Here

your hat, do not take mine.

is

La

sua casa
i

pi grande

His house
I

larger than ours.

nostra.

Conosco
vostri,

suoi fratelli,

ma

non

know

his brothers, but not yours.

147.

When

these pronouns

accompany the verb

essere, the

article is usually omitted.

Ex.


70
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
1

Questi fogli sono miei, , t>i cJd questa scatola ? sua, Le vostre cugine son mie scolare,

These papers are mine. Whose box is this? It is hh. Your cousins are pupils of mine.

148.

The

expressions a friend of mine, a sister of yours, &c.,

:

by un mio amico, una vostra sorella, &c, one of more specified meaning, is rendered by im dei miei amici, &c. Ex.
are rendered

my friends,

&c., having a

Scrivo in questo momento ad un mio amico, un mio nemico, Un dei miei amici ha sposato un'amica vostra, Un dei miei servi ammalato,

writing just now to a friend of mine. is an enemy of mine. One of my friends has married a
I

am

He

friend of yours.

One

of

my

servants

is sick.

bj' a numeral by a demonstrative or an indeterminate pronoun, with the exception of tutto, or when followed by a noun in the vocative, the article is omitted. Ex.

149.

When

the possessive pronouns are preceded

adjective,

Due

rdici condiscepoli sono orai^rofessori neir Universit,

Two
Give

of
it

my

fellow-students are

now

professors in the University.

to this friend of

Datelo a questo mio amico. Ila venduto alcune sue terre,

mine.

Ogni nostra speranza.

Tutte
le vostre

ragioni non mi appa-

He has sold some of his estates. Our every hope. All your reasons do not satisfy me.

gano.

Mio carissimo amico,

My

dearest friend.

EXERCISE XXXIV.

The customs
than
ours.

of our ancestors were

more simple and healthy

antenato ind. 2

friend of

mine has been appointed Professor of

iiominare

(148) Greek, in place of a brother of theirs.

vece
the glory
is his.

(103) (146)

The
also.

labour

was mine,

travaglio ind. 3 [lAl)

All her thoughts are

it is

centered in her son. concentrare

It is

my

opinion, and

(147) so lame,

vours "(146)
drive

One

of our horses

is

'pure.

we cannot

to-day.

zoppo

clic

[andare

in legno)

do fare

this
lo

for

POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

71

your sake. One of my favourite studies is lotany. I was at 1 2 botanica. (145) your house tbis morning. I have seen one of your nieces, and " ^ (148) nepote have spoken to her. The ribbons that you have sent to tlie

nastro
milliner are

mine and not yours.

sister's

If

you do not find your

fan,

modista
take mine.

Your

(147)

ventaglio
exercise
is

better written than ours.

(146)

(110)

150. In Italian,

i\iQ

possessive pronouns

may

be omitted and

replaced by the article

sessor.

when

there can be no doubt of the pos-

Ex.
perduto
al licde,
i

Egli

lia

henl nella rivolu-

He

has

lost liis

property in the revolu-

zione,

tion.

Ho

male

My

foot pains

mo.
in

Mettete in tasca la lorsa, Volgete gli occhi alla cupola,

Put your purse

your pocket.

Turn your eyes towards the dome.

151.

When

in

English the possessive pronoun precedes a noun,

o

indicating mental

physical qualities, or any part of the dres?

or body, if the action expressed

by the verb

falls

on

its

subject,
is

the p)ossessive pronoun

reflectively.

is

not translated, and the verb

used

Ex.
la salute col

Egli

si

guasta

troppo stu-

He

diare.

Egli s'invgoriscela, mente collo studio

della filosofia,

ruins Itis health with too much study. lie strengthens his mind with the

study of philosophy.

Eglino si bagnarono \ piedi nel fiume, Si mise il mantello e usc,

They bathed

their feet in the stream.

He

put on his cloak and went out.

is

152. But
siibject,

when

the action of the verb

is

not directed to

its

the possessive pronoun

case.

replaced by the conjunctive.

pronouns in the dative

II perrucchiere
gli taglio
il
i

Ex.
The hair-dresser cut his hair. The surgeon set my arm.
I pressed her

capelli,

Il chirurgo mi rimise

braccio,

E in questo modo scdvo loro la vita,

Le

strinsi la

mano,

hand.
their
life.

And

in this

way he saved


72
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

EXERCISE XXXV.

He
having

lost

his

life in

perdere (loO)
sculptiiretl

a naval engagement. "navale ^battaglia

Michael Angelo
(it

scolpire

a sleeping Cupid, (broke off) its arms and dormente Ciqoido ruppe (152)
;

hnried
sotterrare

the

statue

when

it

was found,

was thought)
si credette

to be a precious relic of che fosse reliquia soon proved it to be his own * hen tosto (147)

Grecian art;

but the sculptor

in

pocket
short.

when

I left

had my purse my (150) yonr house. He cut my hair too

work. opera

Greco

[sono uscito di)

abandoned his wife and saved liis father. corto Enea abbandonare (150) salvare A brave soldier having lost both his arms, his colonel offered
(96) (150)
(to)

^neas

(152)

p.

colonnello offrire

him a guinea; "You

(123)

think, perhaps, that I

have
sub. 1
boots.

lost

my
not

ghinea

gloves," answered the soldier. rispose

(Take off) your Levare (151)

vestito.

Do

stivcde

hurt

my

hand.
(61)

far male a [152)

mettere

(Put on) your coat.

153.

The

possessive pronouns

il

mio,

il

tuo, &c., are

sometimes

used substantively, and signify, in the singular, one's iwoperty,

share, &c., and in the plural, one's friends^ relations, supporters,

party, followers,

Szc.

EfjU ha scialacquato tutto il suo, Finche spendete del vostro, I nostri si son portati valorosamente,

He

has squandered

all

his fortune.

As long as you spend your own monei/. Our troops conducted themselves
valiantly.
.

Andra a
Parigi,

passare Vinverno coi suoi a

nostri

He

Quando
154.

avranno

tutti votato,

When

will go to spend the winter in Paris with his relations. our supporters shall all have voted.

When

h>'s,

her^

do not refer

to the subject of the vert, or


POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
i3
tlie

when
di
lei,

there are two nonns of different genders in

same proof him,

position, in order to avoid ambiguity, the

prononns di

lui,

of her, replace suo, sua.

Ex.
She has taken

Ella Jtapreso il d lui omhrelo, Egli ama sua sorella ed i di hi figli, Antonio trovT) il di lei anello in un
viale del parco,

He

his umbrella. loves his sister and her sons.

lier

Anthony found
the park.

ring in a path in

155.

The

relation

expressed by the possessive pronouns

is

sometimes conveyed in Italian by means of the conjunctive pro-

nouns in the dative case.

E(]U mi
e fratello, instead of,

Ex.
Egli
of,

He
I I

is

my

brother.

mo fratello, Io non gli sono amico, instead non sono suo amico,
10
le

Io

am am

not his friend.

son figlia, instead

of,

Io son sua

her daughter.

figlia,

156. One^s
to

own

is

rendered hy iir oprio

but

if

own

is

added

one of the possessive pronouns, my,

thy, &c., it

may

be trans-

lated with the possessive pronoun, or alone.

11 confessare i propri /aHt il ijrlmo passo verso Vemenda, Llio vedxdo coi miei propri, or, coi
propri occhi.

Ex.
own
fiiiills

To
I

confess one's

is

the

first step towards amendment. have seen him with my own eyes.

Me

lo

porse

colle

sue proprie, or, colle

He

gave

it

to

me with

his

own hands.

sue mani,

EXERCISE XXXVI.

He

is

charitable

to

caritatevole verso

(every one) except to his family. tutti verso (153)

(They endeavoured)
S'ingegnarono
I

to

persuade

me

not to

claim
ripetere

my

own.

(153)

know

her

by

sight,

but

am

not a friend of hers.

The

conosco (123) di vista

historian
storico

(148)
all

Suetonius relates, that almost Svetonio narrare quasi

Caesar's assassins

uccisero

own hand. We arc seldom di raramente (134) (156) conscious of our own defects. I have spent Christmas with consapevole passare Natale (156) difetto
killed

themselves with their


74

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
family.

my

She

lent

mc

liis

seal.

He

gave her
diede

liis

purse to

(153)

{\5i)

sigillo
is

reward her honesty. ricompensare [l-)

her sister-in-law. cognato (154)

He

my

brother, and has married

Their

sposare
sailors

are always beaten

by

ours.

marinaro

The games
her

ended, she distributed the prizes and crowns with terminare premio

own hand.

Remember that he
ref.

is

(156)

your relation. (155) parente.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
157. Questo, this; cotesto, quello,
</?af,

used as adjectives,

agree with the nouns they accompany, and, as pronouns, they

agree with the noun they represent.

Questa chiesa,
e quel collegio,

Ex.

Datemi un dizionario, ma non

di vostra sorella,

quello

J tiranni

d'Italia, e quelli di

Un-

gheria e di Polonia,

This churcli and that college. Give me a dictionary, but not that of youv sister. The tyrants of Italy, and those of Hungary and Poland.

158. Questo* indicates a thing near the speaker, either with

regard to time or place.

questa crema, Questi ^7tt, e queste ^esc7(C,
e

Ex.
1 |

Questo cacio,

This cheese and this cream. These figs and these peaches.

159. Cotesto points out an object near the hearer, and distant

from the speaker.

Dove

Ex.
Where
did you buy that watch and that chain ? girls are very

avete comprato cotesto oriolo. e cotesta catena ? Cotesti ragazzi, e coteste ragazze

Those hoys and those

intelligent.

sono molto intelligenti

160.

Quello

points out an object alike distant from the person

who

speaks and the person addressed.

its

Quello, and

plural quegli, are used before masculine nouns

s

beginning with a vowel or an

in the singular, * Questa

followed by a consonant; quel,

in

and quei or que\

the plural, are used before

may

be abbreviated to sta before the words mattina, sera, notte

as stamattina, stasera, stanotte.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
words beginning with a consonant.
nine
is resfular.

75
of the femi-

The formation
tliat

Ex.
That garden and
to those

Quel giardino, e queIl'o?"f ajipartengono a quei/ra^/, Quello scudo, e quegli scJnopjn sono
anticJiissimi,

orchard belong
are very

monks.

That shield and those guns

ancient.

Comprammo
161,

quelle ciriege e quelle

We

bought those cherries and those

olive dalfrutlaiolo,

olives at the fruiterer's.

noun.

These adjectives are generally repeated before each Ex.

These
cups and saucers do not match. These tumblers and wine-glasses are
of-

Queste tazze, e questi piattini sono scompagnati, Questi bicchieri, e questi hicchierini sono di cristallo di Boemia,

Bohemian

glass.

162.

Questi^ cotesti, quegli, are used often in the nominative

this

singular to express

man, that man,

this one, that

one; in

reference to things, this one, that one, are rendered

testo,

by

questo, co-

quello.

Ex.
quegli or cotesti

Questi

fu

felice,

This

man was
liim,

fortunate, that one

is this

sfortunato,

unfortunate.

Interrogandolo cJd questi,

Asking

who

man

Quale

volete

questo

di questi quello ?

mazzolini,

AVliich of these

two bouquets

will

you have,
the
latter,

this one or that

one ?

163.

The former,

may be

expressed by quello,
;

questo, with reference mostly to inanimate things

in speaking

of persons, quegli, questi

may be
Ex.

used, but only as masculine no-

minatives in the singular.

Un

clima freddo e asciutto pi salubre di un clima caldo; quello invigorisce, mentre questo infievolisce,

lacine e Corneille

hanno rappresen-

tato gli uomini, quegli quali essi sono, questi qucdi dovrebbero essere,

cold and dry climate is more healthy than a warm one the former invigorates, while the latter weakens. Racine and Comeille have represented men, the former as they are, the latter as they should be.
;

EXERCISE XXXVII.

That brevity which

brevit

weakens
[indebolisce)

the vigour of a
of these statues

narration.

Is

che

a defect of style.
stile

The models

narrazione

were
ind. 2

Roman


7C
peasants.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

contadino
poor

That spendthrift scialacquatore tradesman. When Crossus

bottegaio

lias

ruined his family and that rovinare (160)

showed
mostrare
alcuno

(to)

Solon his vast Solone (1^8)

treasures, the latter said, Sire, if another

comes with better iron

viene

(163) disse than yours, he will be (103)

master of this gold.

This

fiction

padrone
is

favola

us that honesty teaches 2)robit insegnare (123)

the best policy.

We

did not

[120)politica

know

this

morning that we

sapere (158*)

should sec you this evening. (^avremmo veduto)

can not distinguish the bones of your father from those of distinguere posso

his slaves, said

Alexander, as the latter asked (to) mentre (163) what he saw the philosoiher ina heap of bones. I have che [ci riguardasse) mucchio fdusofo
to

Diogenes

schiavo

bought two shawls,

scialle

this

one

is for

you and that one

idleness,

is

for

me.

(162)
bigotry,

That
fools.

pride,

and

which characterize
che
caratterizzare

[&Q) orgoglio {l&\.)higotteria

pigrizia

We

are

body and

soul, the

former

stolto

latter

command.

Those
(159)

(163)
knives,
coltello

should obey, the dovrebbe

forks,

and spoons.
cucchiaio

(161) forchetta

Costui,
Costei,

this this

man.

woman.
women.

Costoro,
Colui,
Colei,

these men, these

that man.
that

woman. women.
is,

Coloro,
164.

those men, those

The above pronouns

are always used absolutely^ that

;

without reference to an antecedent

style,

they are used in a familiar

to

and sometimes express contempt, when they correspond

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
the English

77
to

word

fellow, loretch

they always refer

pcsons.

Ex.
Elettra

Io

serbo,

Oreste,

ancora

Electra

Quel ferro io serbo, che al marito in petto Vibri) colei, cui non osiam

I stili keep that dagger, Orestes, which the woman, whom

2n madre
fieri.

Nomar

dajipoi.

Al-

dare uo longer call our mother, plunged into the breast of her consort,

we

Here Electra makes use of the word colei, in speaking with horror of ber mother, by whom her father had been killed. Che farem noi, diceva l'uno aW alWhat shall we do with this fellow
tro di costui ?

Non

seguitar l'esempio di costei,

Do

said one to the other. not follow that woman's

ex-

ample.
Coloro sono appunto usciti di prigione,

Those fellows are just out of

prison.

Colui

mi

disse che

non era

ricco,

That man
rich.

told

that he was not

165. These pronouns, followed hy the relatives che or

express the

il

quale^

man

who, the

woman

who, he who, she who, those who,

&c., with no reference to an antecedent.

Colui che veramente ama la virt la pratica, Colei che lascio i comodi di una vita agiata, per andare negli ospedali
dell'

Ex.
really loves virtue practises
left

He who
it.

She who

the comforts of home,

to attend the sick

and wounded, in

Oriente,

ad assistere

malati,

the hospitals of the East.

ed

i feriti.

Coloro che offendono, raramente perdonano a coloro che essi hanno

Those who

offend,

rarely

forgive

those they injure.

166.

He

ivho, she ivho, those ivho, that ivhich, those which,

used

in reference to an antecedent, are expressed

che, quella
che, quelle

hy

quello che, quelli

che,

according to the preceding noun.

Ex.
Tutti i soldati ricevettero una medaglia, quelli che si distinsero ricevettero

una

croce,

Il tappeto che vi mostrai,

quello

Ali the soldiers received a medal, those who distinguished themselves received a cross. The carpet I showed you is that

che abbiamo portato di Turchia,

which we brought from Turkey.

EXERCISE XXXVIII.

That man has chosen a wife with

(164)
scelto

his

eyes,

hut not with his

(150)

78
reason.

DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS

Fortune often

pursues
{corre dietro a)
is

those
too

who do

not
to

the capricious goddess.

often obliged to

is

He who (165) bog. The man

(165)

(165)

seek cercare

proud

work

orgoglioso per lavorare

who

assassinated

Henry

a mendicare

the Third, King of France, was a monk, by name James ind. 2 di Giacomo frate

Clement.
liked

" (How
Donde
tutti

is it)

that this fellow,

who

is

fool,

is

avviene

(164)

saocco sub. 1
a prince asked
(to)
lo siate)

by every
;

one, and

you

are not ? "

grata a

{non

Dante
like

the poet replied, " Those

who resemble
somigliare
is

(one another)
si

one another."

Common
2 is

(165)
sense
i

that which

we most
^j/ii

amare
rarely

(igc)

meet. That man incontrare (164)

is

bore.

That which
leads

pleases (to)

seccatore

the eyes

not always beautiful.

Those who believe themselves

(165) (134)
the

(57)

happy are

so.

True

taste

is

that which

mind

to

lo

gusto

(166)
is

conduce
beautiful.

understand and appreciate that which apprezzare

girls

These

little

are very clever, particularly she

who

(161) repeated the

(100) ragazza

(166)

hymns.
inno.

167.

That which, what, when

superfluo spesso costa
clie necessario,

not referring to any ante-

cedent noun, are rendered by ci che, quel che^ or quello che.

Ci die

Ex.

pi

di quello

Ci che mi dite non, mi sorprende,

That whicli is superfluous often costi more than that which is necessary. What you tell me does not surprise
me.

168. That, this, so,

are translated

when
is

referring to an anterior sentence,

by

ci,

which

never joined to a noun.

Ex.

DEMoNSTPwVTIVE PRON'OUXS.
Di
ci

79

parleremo a miglior comodo,

ricordo di aver

'\^''e

Kon mi

mai

detto ci

I do Dot that.

shall speak of tliis at a more convfuieiit time. remember liaving ever said
is

Ci non sta lene,

That

not well.

169. All, all that, all wiucii,

ci che, tutto quello che, or quanto.

may
Ex.

Le expressed by

tiilto

Tutto ci che risplende non oro, Dissi quanto seppi onde distorlo dal stto proponimento, Io faro tutto ci che, tutto quel che or quanto dipender da me,

All that glitters

is

not gold.

I said all that 1 could to him from his intention. I will do

all

dissuade

that depends on nie.

170.

All those, all those which,

Ex.

are expressed

by quanti,

tutti quelli che.

Di

quanti ho sentiti parlare, nessuno

mi piace.
Tutti quelli che, or (\\\m\\ predicano il vancjelo dovrebbero seguirne i
precetti,

Of all those I have heard speak, not one pleases me. All those that preach the gospel should follow its precepts.

171.
phrase,

is

Which, used in expressed by il

il

reference
che.

to

a clause of a precedine

Ex.
ci

Egli parti senza congedarsi,

sorprese
tutti.

che

He

left

without taking leave, which

surjirised us all.

Quando ritorneranno in Italia, il che spero sar fra poco, utilizzeranno a pro della patria, ammaestramenti dell'esilio.
gli

When

they return to Italy, which I hope shall be soon, they will employ in the service of their country the experience gained in exile.

EXERCISE XXXIX.

Modesty
(25) painting.

is

to merit

Let ns not speak (of that) (any more.) PLato says 2 (168) quadro Platone ^pm that knowledge is what man, but witliont religion perfects
sajjienzcc

merito [1^1)

what shadows ombra

are

to the figures of in

knowledge

(167) perfezionare cannot do so. Men first invent that which [non pu) (1G7)

is

is

necessary, then that

which

comfortable, and,

finally,

all

that

quindi

comodo

finalmente (109)


80
is

RELATIVE PE0N0UN3.

superfluous and luxurious. dilusso superfluo

From

that virtue

leads

to happiness.

conduce
his

that we may conclude, [168) possiamo concludere Homer informs us, that in Omero informare a

time husbands gave a dowry to their wives, whicli, says

la

dote

(58)
to do) (also).

Tacitus, the ancient

Tacito
of a sovereign
is to

Germans (used

The

(171)
policy
politica

-costumare

^pure

sovrano

he has not.

That which changes

(167)
is

preserve what he has, and to usurp what usurpare conservare (167)

True eloquence
eloquenza

has no character. easily cambiar e facilmente that which springs from the heart, and

is

nascere (166) enriched by the imagination. The highest courage immarjinazione arricchire (121)

is

that

which

is

tempered by prudence and humanity. temperare

RELATIVE PRONOUNS,
Chi,

Who.

NoM.

Chi,

who.
of
to

whom, whose. whom. whom. Ace. Chi, Abl. Da chi, from whom. 172. The pronoun who, when used without reference
antecedent,
is

Gen. Di chi, Dat. a chi,

to

any

rendered in Italian by

chi,

serves for both genders and numbers.

which Ex.

is

invariable,

and

Xon

indovinereste
disse

mai
i

chi stato

You

could never guess

told

who has been

eletto,

elected.

Mi

chi

erano

suoi scolari

He

me

wlio were his favourite

prediletti,

pupils.

Mi- ha confessato chi la sua benefattrice,

He

has acknowledged to
is.

me who

his

benefactress
scoprire chi sono
le

Non posso
che
lo

signore

proteggono,
notizia,

Da chi avete

avuto queda a chi V avete ripetuta ?

ed

1 cannot discover who the ladies are that protect him. From whom have you heard this

news, and to peated it ?

whom have you

re-

REr.ATIVF,

PRONOUNS.

81

173,

Chi may

also be used to express luhoever, whichever, the

man

who, he ivho, she who, those tvho, some one ivho,

when em-

ployed in a vague sense, and without reference to a noun expressed before.

Chi
ci

Ex.
difetti,

ama

ci dice i nostri

Those wlio love us

tell

us our defects,

perci diffidatevi di chi vi adula continuamente, Chi vi ha detto ci si burlava di voi,

therefore distrust those you continually.

who

flatter

Whoever has

told

you

that

was
will

jesting with you.

Troverete chi vi additer

il

cammino,

You

will

find

some one who

waj'.

show you the

174.

The

interrogative pronoun

who

is

rendered by

chi,

and

can only refer to persons or things

Chi l'autore di questo saggio ? Chi la vostra modista? Chi sono coloro che fecero fiasco nella nuova opera ? Di chi sono questi baidi?

persoiiified.
is
is

Ex.
?

Who Who Who

the author of this essay ?

your milliner

are they
?

who

failed in the

new

opera

Whose

Da

chi stata scoperta V America ?

trunks are these ? By whom has America been covered ?

it is

dis-

175. Chi requires the verb to which

singula?^, essere excepted.

subject to be in the

Ex.

Chi sono i pi famosioratori dell'antichit

Who are

Chi vince le proprie passioni, degpo ddV altrui rispetto, Chi semina raccoglie,

the most famous orators of antiquity ? their own passions, deserve the respect of others. Those who sow reap.

Those who conquer

176. Some. ..OTHERS, used as distributive pronouns,

may

be

rendered by
Chi
si

chi... chi.

Ex.
alle

occupa al commercio, chi

Some

are

engaged

in

commerce,

belle arti, chi siegue

una

profes-

sione, chi

un

altra.

some in the line arts, some follow one profession, some another.

EXERCISE XL.

Those who follow

(173)

blindly

their

own

passions, are not

fit

(156) (175) ciecamente "Who has sent (to) you to lead others.

atto

those beautiful
(79)

(a condurre gli altri) (174)

flowers?

Who

(123) (159)

has greater pride and less humanity than a (108*) (103) (172)

82
fortunate
fool ?
^

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

The

man who
(1^3)

fears the

least to

err,

is

Sfortunato

(HO)
least of virtue.

errare

generally he

who
love

knows the
of virtue,

Whoever does
(173)
praise nor

(165) conoscere

good
bene

for

the

neither seeks [non) cercare ne

n
reformers ?

reward. ricompensa.

Whose
like

fault is

it

Who
(to)

were the

first

colpa

(l'^5) ind. 3
;

riformatore

(To) some
some
with

one author, [11 Q)) piacere

the same work. opera.

blame
biasimare

some another some praise, un altro Whichever of you will come

(173)
vuol
it ?

me may
pu
sonno

(get ready.)
allestirsi
first

To whom have you told

having endured fatigue
inf.

Who

(126)
?

enjoys sleep without

food without having
cibo
inf.

Who relishes
gustare

patire
?

felt

hunger

Whose
^

Whoever has
(173) not admire

sqfrire

children are those ? s^jgo)

told

you

this,

(168)

has misinformed you. mal informare

Who does

the classical severity and simplicity of Alfieri's ammirare classico tragedies ? Those who sow oppression and tyranny, will inevi-

tragedia

(173)

tably reap discontent, hatred, and rebellion. scontento odio

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.
Che, Quale,
singular.

NoM. Che^ il Gen. Bi cui,

quale.,

who, which,

that.

whom, of which. Dat. a cui, cui, al quale, to whom, to which. Ace. Che, cui, il quale, whom, which, that. Abl. Da cui, dal quale, from or by whom or which.
del quale, of

RELATIVE TRONOUNS.
PLURAL.

83

NoM.

Che,

quali, wLo, which, that.

Gen. Di cui, de quali, of whom, of which. Dat. a cui, cui, a! quali, to whom, to which.
Ace. Che,
cui, i quali,

Abl.
177.

Da

cui, da' quali,

whom, which, that. from or by whom or which.

When

these pronouns refer to an antecedent expressed,

they are rendered in Italian by che or

both genders and numbers, a-nd

quale requires the
relates.
article,

Che serves for il quale. employed without the article and agrees with the noun to which it
is
;

Ex.
che or
il

Uuomo
le

quale valuta pi

The man who

ricchezze che la scienza, e simile che or il quale getta via la noce e conserva il guscio, Il l maestro di cui or del quale vi ho
allo stolto,

values wealth more than knowledge, is Hke a fool, who throws away the nut and keeps
the shell.
of

The master
to you.

whom

I have spoken

jmrlato,

Lc farfalle
L'uomo

che or

le quali

avete ac-

The butterflies that you have caught.

chiappate.
e il solo animale che or il quale conosca il bene, e che or il quale segua il male. Il paese in cui or nel quale dimoriamo,

Man
is

is

the only animal

is right,

who knows

what

and who does what

live.

wrong. The country in which we

178. Che, referring to an antecedent, can only be used in the

nominative and accusative

the other cases of this pronoun are

;

formed with
L'uomo

cui,

accompanied by prepositions

the latter

may

in

some cases be omitted.

Ex.
The man
to

di c\np)arlate, ed a cui aete dato vostra figlia, mio amico,

of

whom
river

whom you speak, and you have given your

is

daughter,
Il fiume

my

friend.

da

cui

il prato

irrigato,

The

by which

the field

is

watered.

179. Cui, as well as che,

there
is

may be used in the accusative; when ambiguity between the subject and the object of the
and Ex.

phrase, cui, which can never be the subject, should be used,

not che.

Luomo
Conosco padre,

cui uccise vostro fratello.

il

ministro cui lodo vostro

The man whom your brother killed. I know the minister whom yonr
father praised.

84
180,

REr-ATIVE PRONOUNS.

When

cui translates wJiose,

it is

generally placed between

is

the article and the noun,

L'eroe
le cui

and no preposition

required.

Ex.
asto-

gesta

hanno fatto ma-

The hero whose deeds have

nished the world.

ravigliare il mondo, Il chimico alle cui scoperte la scienza va tanto debitrice,

The chemist

La regina
glorioso.

il

cui

dimenticato, ed

nome non sar mai il cui regno fu s

whose discoveries science owes so much. The queen whose name shall never be forgotten, and whose reign was
to

so glorious.

181.

When

the pronoun relates to one of two nouns of different

article,

gender or number, quale, preceded by the definite

be used, and not
to

must

che, in order that it

refers.

may be

clearly understood

which noun the pronoun

ci

Ex.
progress of science, which has revealed to us so many secrets of nature. The love of country, which exile cannot eradicate from the heart.

II progresso della scienza,

la quale

The

ha

svelato tanti segreti della

natura,

L'amore della patria, il quale Vesule non pu cancellare dal cuore.

EXERCISE XLI.
Voltaire used
solere ind. 2
to say, I

have three

kinds
(48) specie

of friends;

the friends

who
I

love

{111) amare
those

by whom

am

me, those to (160) detested. In

whom
all

am

indifferent,

and

countries, says

Ugo

detestare

tutto art.

Foscolo, I have seen two kinds of men, the few

who command,
comandare
or
o

and the generality generalit

who

serve.

Persons

who speak much,

The
historian
storico

who

persona

always laugh, are tiresome companions. ridere compagno. noioso

relates

narrare

things which have happened, the poet imagines things which essere avvenuto immaginare

may

happen.

Humility

is

a virtue without which all

art.

[possono) accadere.

other virtues perish, and by which [periscono) altro

men

learn to

know them-

a conoscere

A
IIKLATIVE PRONOUNS
selves.

85
is

The
in

Christian
2

religion,
1

whose origin
(180)

divine.

Spartan was reprimanded rimproverare Spartano

for

having
inf.

divino. {37} three words on used in impiegare

an occasion

which two would have

sufficed.

The hero whom

eroe (179)

[sarebbero bastate.)

England honours.
onorare.

The

watch-key

that

you bought on
ind. 3 (93)

oriolo (4) chiave (181)

Saturday.
182.

Quale and che

are also used as interrogative pronouns

;

quale means ichich of two or many, and requires no article

or che cosa only

che,

means what.

Ex.
Which
horses are to run the race
?

Quali sono i cavalli che correranno il palio ? Quale preferite di questi due quadri ?

^Vliich of prefer?

two pictures do you

last

Che opera hanno dato

teatro ?

ieri sera al
? !

Wliat opera did they perfonn

night at the theatre ?

Che or che cosa faremo

183.

What
Ex.
la
1

shall
!

we do ?
are translated

The exclamations what

gli

ivhat a

by che

or quale, without the article.

Che sventura e per nascita di un eroe !

Che
belfiore!

uomini
!

A^liat a misfortune the birth of a hero

is for

mankind

Quale incantevole colpo d'occhio

What What

a channing view a beautiful flower

184. Quale
tively.

may be

used to render some.. .some used distribu-

Ex.
They were
in

Erano in uno stato da far piet, quale

cogli biti stracciati,
testa rotta

a pitiable

condition,

quale

colla

grondante sangue,
le viti,

Quale potava, quale legava

some with their clothes torn, some with their headsbroken, and streaming with blood. Some were pruning, some were tying up the vines.

185. Quale

is

often used to translate such as, as, instead of

(ale"-quale, tale being understood.

&pe>-o che lo troverete quale ve Ilio
descritto,

Ex.
hope you
will find it
it

such as I have
seeing

described
le

to you.

La

vera filosofia consiste nel vedere

True philosophy

consists in

cose quali sono.

things as they are.

tale, as,

such a

* Such a is translated by un man, un tal uomo.

such ai

sfortune,

una

tale

sventura;

86
186.

RELATIVE PRONOUNS.

Onde

is

often used in poetry, or in an elevated style, in

place of di cui, del quale, &c., to render of which, tuith which,

&c.

in prose, onde translates in order

il

to,

in

order

that.

Ex.
I fed

Di quei sospiri ond' jo nutriva Un

cuore,

Of those sighs with which

heart.

my

P. regno^oni'io la corona atfevdo, B. Onde salvar la patria, Bruto si finse pazzo,

kingdom whose crown I expect.

In order to save his country, Brutus feigned madness.

EXERCISE
Fontenelle
I

XLII.

said at

liis

deatb, It

was time

I should die, for

[disse al

punto

di)

che dovessi

poich
a

was beginning
*
ind. 2

to see

things

such as

they are.

What
(183)
* *

pity (that)

a we have not a

(185)
telescope,
in order that

we might
a brother.

peccato
see

cannocchicde
vessels.

those

What a happiness
(183)
felicit
^

(186)

to

have

sncli

inl{l&0)lastimento

What a divine
sake

(185*)

spectacle religion offers,

when

spettacolo

'^offrire

Christians forab-

(everything) iu order to carry truth to the Heathen.

tutto

handonare

portare

What a
of these

noise those children

make

Which do you
(182)

Pagano
prefer

chiasso

Sfanno

preferire

desks
(56) leggo

I tell

you

this in order to

show
mostrare

you

dico

what powerful enemies you have.

What

can be more sublime

(182) potente (182) pw than great genius united to great modesty ? Historians reprerajjpremodestia (80) genio sent men such as they are, poets depict them such as they

sentare

(185) should be. Conscience {dovrebbero) coscienza

dipingere
is

that of the body

corpo

the voice of the soul, the passions voce should we listen ? to which voice * (182) dovremmo ascoltare

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

87

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

187. Tutto,
all,

the whole,

used adjectively,

lowed
it

in Italian

refers to.

by the Ex.
i

definite article,

is always foland agrees with the noun

La
le

storia di tutti

costumi di tutte

The

history of

all

the customs of

al

nazioni.
il

nations.
lo

Tutto Tutta

paese

piange,

]a flotta fu dispersa,

The whole country regrets him. The whole fleet was dispersed.
it is

188.
lated

When
tutti,

by

all is used as an indefinite pronoun, unaccompanied by the article. Ex.

I

trans-

Tutti volevano comandare, e niuno voleva ubbidij-e, Tutti/eeero il loro dovere,

AH

wished

to

command, and nobody

would obey. All did their duty.

;

189. II tutto*

is

used substantively to signify the whole

all.

tutto

without the article means everything,

Qui tutto a buon mercato, Neppure il tutto lo contento,

Ex.

Here everything is cheap. He was not even content with the

whole.

Hanno

confessato tutto,

They have

confessed

all.

190. Tutto, and more generally del

to signify quite, completely.

tutto,

are used adverbially

Ex.

Noi slam

del tutto hagnati,

We

are quite wet.

IlcoccJiiere tutto furioso risicose. Il nemico non fu del tutto vinto,

The coachman quite angrily replied. The enemy was not completely vanquished.

Observe
translate

Tutto quanto,
Ex.

tutti

quanti, &c.,

may

also be used to

all.

Tutte quante penrono, avrebbero derubati tutti quanti,

All perished.

They would have robbed us

tutto,

all.

191. Before a numeral adjective preceded by

e is placed.

the particle

Ex.

* Observe

Tlie iclwle

used adjectively,
tlie

is

expressed by tutto followed by

is

the article, but taken substantively,

Jirticle

wJwle

rendered by

il

tutto,

tho

preceding

tutto.


ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.
die andate voi cercando a quest'ora
tutti e tre ? B. Tutti e quattro venfjon chiamati Evangelisti,
(jli

What
this

are

you
?

all

three looking for at

hour

All four are called the Evangelists.

EXERCISE

XLIII.
is

A
hail

flatterer,

of

all

domestic enemies,
i

the worst.

The

adulatore

{1S7) ^domestico
all

(120)
all

has destroyed grandine guastare

garden.

the fruit and

(60^)

the flowers in our

If

you

cannot

give

me

the whole, give

me

the half.

The eloquence
eloquenza

non potete
of the

(124)
orator

(189)

(78)
the whole nation.

moved

oratore [commosse)

(187)

Courts in Corte
cos
imitators.

all ages,

and

in all countries,

et

lead the fashions, {introducono) vioda

so that all the ridicule

must

fall

on them, and not on their servile

su
quite neglected. (190) trascurare
joy,
pity,

ridicolo deve

Their education was

come
whilst
all

All virtuous
^

imitatore
affections,

(such as) love, hope,

^affezione
beatity,

gioia piet

add aumentare
deform
[contraffanno)

to

*
the

the bad

passions

bellezza

mentre che

All three have rob it of allits charm. privare (126) vezzo p. (191) confessed their crimes, and they have all been condemned to delitto (188) death. The laws of Nature are immutable, and the same for

countenance, and

fisonomia

p.

legge
all

stesso

per
at di

people. It

is

a great

sign
segtio

of

folly

to

laugh
ridere

follia

(34)

everything.

(189)

192, Ogni, every, each,

is

of both genders,

and can only be

used in the singular

it

takes no article.

Ex.

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

89

La

guerra produce ogni male, Ogni scienza ha i suoi principii, ed

ogni et
i

War

begets every
its

evil.

Every science
I

lias its principles,

and

suoi divertimenti,

every age

enjoyments.

193. Ogni is used adverbially in some locutions, as ogni per ogni dove, in ogni luogo, everywhere, wherever. Ex.
In ogni luogo s incontrano viaggiatori Inglesi,

dove,

Chiaro mi fu allor come ogni dove lu cielo Paradiso, D.

English travellers are met everywhere. It was then clear to me, that everywhere in heaven Paradise exists.

194. Ognuno,

ciascuno,

ciascheduno,

every

one,

each.

Ognuno

is

only used in the singular, with or without reference to

;

an antecedent, but always as a pronoun

it

conveys a

collective

sense, while ciascuno, ciascheduno, are used both as

pronouns

and adjectively, and imply a

Ognuno
appellerebbe
colui

distributive idea.

Ex.
call

un

ti-

Every one would

tyrant.

that

man

ranno, Ciascun paese ha i suoi costumi, Ciascheduno dinoi ha dei doveri da adempiere,

Each country has its customs. Each of us has duties to perform.

195.

The

expressions each other, one another, are rendered by

Vun

l'altro.

Ex.
They assist each other. They speak ill of one another. They were never seen separated
from each other.

Si assistono Tun l'altro, Sparlano I'un dell'altro,

Nonfuron mai
divisi.

veduti I'un dall'altro

EXERCISE XLIV.
great men have protected literary men and " grande {protetto) letterato encouraged arts. Every century, every generation, and every

In every age

secolo

"'

incoraggiare arte.
country,
is

generazione (192) secolo remarkable for some useful discovery. The customs

rimarchevole
of each country
differ,

utile

scoperta.

and every one of good sense

(194)
uso

differiscono

should {dovrebbe

conform, as

much

as

possible, to the usages of the country in

)

conformarsi per quanto

which one dwells.

(177)

Every obstacle may be

pu

dimorare.

overcome with persuperare


90
Beveivance.

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

Every
life

good

citizen should willingly sacri(82) cittadino dovrelbe di buon animo sacri-

fico

liis

in defence of his country.

Wherever
(193)

we

turn

ficare {150)

difesa

{ci

voltiamo)

we

see

beautiful

and picturesque

views.
prospettiva.

The Ota{Gli abitanti

one another, and each maintains {Idi) {maitiene) (195) profound silence during meals. Every truth may be told profondo silenzio durante pasto. narrare pu
heitans
d'Otaiti)

cat separated from

separare

under the disguise of an allegory.

sotto

velo

allegoria.

196. Altro, other

.^

used adjectivehj^ ;igrees with the noun

to

which

it

relates.

Ex.
Tlic son liaJ no otlier inheritance

llfi(jUo non ehhe altra eredit tranne la spada del padre,

than the sword of his father.

Dovete convincermi con

menti,
C'ji'altra

altri

argo-

You must convince me with

arguments.

other

sorpresa vi attende, Altro speranze ed altre cure,

Another surprise awaits you. Other hopes and other cares.

is
;

197.

When
it

used substantively, altro

else.,

masculine singular,

and means something

negation,

another thing
else.

accompanied by the

expresses nothing
il

Ex.
speak of death, but another to die. Have you nothing else to toll me ? Let us speak of something else.
It is one tiling to

Altro il parlar di morte, altro morire, Non avete altro da dirmi?

Parliamo

tZ'altro,

198.

The

indefinite

pronouns another^

others, are expressed

by

un

altro, altri.

Ex.
i

Un

altro sarebbe stato scoraggiato dalla risposta, Altri colsero la gloria delle sue scopei'te,

Another would have been discouraged by the answer. Others reaped the glory of his discoveries.

199. Altri... ALTRI, gli uni. ..gli altri,

distributive sense,

may
Ex.

be used

in

and signify
jn

soyne... others.
\

Altri soio di lui jni vivaci, altri pensatori e meno parowi, parolni,
varai,

Some

are more lively than lie, others thinkers auu and less prosy. greater iiiniKerH

Gli uni aravano, gli altri semina-

Some were ploughing

sowing.

some were

 A
0\ INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.
200. Altki
is

91
for

sometimes used in the nominative singular

or ani/, one else,

qualcun

altro,

and means some

amj other man.

In a familiar
altri,

style, altri is

sometimes joined

to noi, voi ; as, noi

voi altri, we, you.

Ex.

altri Scozzesi riflettiamo prima d parlare, altri fanciulli potete andare a ruzzare, Ne voi ne altri mi persuaderete a partire,

Noi
Voi

We
You

Scotch reflect before we sjicak.

children

may go and

play.

Neither you nor any one else wil persuade me to leave.

201. Altrui, others,

is
;

only used as the complement, never as

it

the nominative of a verb

may

either precede or follow the

noun

to

which

it

relates,
to.

and be declined with or without the

prepositions

o/and

Altrui only refers to persons, and, pre-

ceded by the definite

Critico severamente
i

article,

means

the

property of others.

Ex.

difetti altrui

He
The

criticised severely the defects of

or d'altrui, L'altTuigloria or la gloria vitnn non deve renderci invidiosi, ma stimolarci ad acquistarne noi pure, Chi desidera l'altrui si rende moralmente reo di fur to,

others.

glory of others should not make us jealous, but stimulate us to acquire the same. AVlioevercovets others' property, becomes morally guilty of theft.

EXERCISE XLV.

we would have others do to us. facessero (122) (198) (ci che vorremmo che) Correct your own faults, and let others correct theirs. Correggere lasciare difetto
Let us do
to others

as

long procession of

ants

some (were setting

out,)

others

formica (199)
returning, all active and industrious.
ind. 2

partire ind. 2

Other
to do.

people's opinions

are not always to be adopted.

[da seguirsi.)
tune of others.
(201)
(78)
^
1

(201) Charity rejoices at the good godere di

else

for-

We had nothing
with them ?

'He

left

the other

(197)

da

half of his fortune to his other nephews.

Have

they brought

anything

else

The

other citizens envied his suc-

(197)

92
cess.

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND rRONOHNS.

We should respect
{Dohbiamo)

tlie

opinions of others, however incorto

us.

rect they

(may seem)
sembrare sub.
1
first

To

er(201) per quanto covet the property of

roneo
others
is

the

(201)

step towards dishonesty. You children may passo verso disonest. potete (200)

now go and

play.

(9) divertirvi.

202. Veruno, niuno, nessuno, no one, nobody, noperson, no,

none.

When
Ex.

these pronouns precede the verb, they require no

negative, but

when placed

after,

the verb

must be preceded by

nan.

Non

v'

nessuno in casa.

There
It is

Ninna (jloria ad aquila aver vinta una colomba, B. Nessuno profeta nel lropro paese,

is no one at home. no triumph for an eagle to vanquish a dove. No one is a prophet in his own

country.

203. Niente, nulla, nothing.

verb followed by these

words must be preceded by non, but when they come before the
verb, the nee:ative
is

omitted.

Ex.
I

Non ne

so nulla,
disse.
si

know nothing

of

it.

Nulla mi
meglio,
Clii

He
potesse

Purea che nulla

non azzarda

far di
gua-

It

said nothing to me. seemed that nothing could be

better done.
nulla, niente

Those who risk nothing, gain nothing.

204. Niente and nidla are often used with the signification of
something, anything,

when

the verb, which in this case they

always /oZ/ow,

is

not preceded by non.

i

da me ? Se io 2}Osso far niiWa per voi, comanVolete nulla or niente

Ex. Do you want

know.

anything from

me ?

If I can do anything for you, let

I

me

datemi,

205. Nothing

may

also be rendered

panied by non, which precedes the verb.

by che Ex.

or cosa,

accom-

I pigi
Non

non lianno mai che fare,

Idle people have never anything to

do.

w' cosa peggiore che

un falso

There

is

nothing worse than a

false

amico,

friend.

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

206. Nulla and niente sometimes take an
Egli rientrato noi nulla donde
sortito,

93
Ex.

article.

He

lias returned to the insignificance from whicli he rose.

Solo Iddio piC dal niente creare

qualcosa,

There is only God who can creato something out of nothing.

EXERCISE XLVI.

An

artist

who was
*

criticising

a painting
ind. 2
is

wliicli repre-

artisla

criticare

sented Marriage, remarked, " Nothing

quadro (177) more difficult to make

matrimonio
(103)
that in which no one
inire

(203)

than a good marriage, even in a picture."

seeks
to

The
all

[a farsi) best society

is

shine,

and

are pleased.

The Eomans

brillare contento. (188) (202) cercare placed the temple of honour beside the temple tempio accanto a (posero)

of virtue, because,

said

they, no one

ind. 2.

(202)

without passing through the second.

inf.

Nothing
pu

ever arrives at the ' 'mai

is

first

more dangerous
pericoloso
its

per
;

than constant adulation

influence.

no one
(202)
the

(203) can escape

sfuggire

corrupting

corrompente

God
more

created
ind, 3.

earth

dries

asciugare
'^osservare

quickly than lagrima. prontamente

from nothing. (206) tears. Those who

Nothing
^noi

observe anything,

from
di

town? "We
no
virtue

learn nothing. (204) imparare (203)

Do you

(165)

never ^mai

wish

desiderare

anything (204)

may have arms

arme

(Possiamo)

against arrogance, contro (25) arroganza

against calumny, against insult, but none against ridicule, from calunnia insulto ridicolo (202)

which

is

safe.

(177) (202)

sicuro.

Qualche, alcuno, some, any.

(8ee 43.)

94

ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

alcuni,

207. Alcuno,

qualcuno,

substantively in the sense of some one, some persons.

Qualcuno hussa alia porta, Se qualcheduno verr a cercarmi,
ditegli d'attendermi,

qualcheduno, are Ex.

at the door.
calls for

Some one knocks

If

some one
wait.

me,

tell

him

to

Alcuni sopportano pi pazientemente

Some bear more

patiently great mis-

grandi sventure, che insignificanti

cure,

fortunes than trifling cares.

I

Non
they

conosco alcuno in Irlanda,

any., are

know nobody

in Ireland.

208. TVlien some.,

refer,

not followed by the noun to which

they are translated by the relative pronoun ne.

1

Ex.
I

Ecco dei

Ne ho datteri prendetene. presi, grazie, Non ho spille, bisogna che ne compri,

Here are some

I

dates, take some.

have taken some, thank you. have no pins, I must buy some.

209. Ambo, entrambi, ambidue, l'uno e l'altro, hoth. These pronouns are followed by the definite article when they before a verb, it is omitted. Ex. precede a noun
;

Ambo

le

mani per dolor mi

morsi, D.

I bit for

gi-ief

both

my

hands.
to death.

Furono entrambi condannati a morte, Ambidue le mie sorelle sono maritate,

They were both condemned

\

Both of

my

sisters are married.

210. Neither of them, ne l'uno ne

l'altro,

when preceded by

a verb, the verb must, in

tion. Ex. Non vidi n l'uno n Non perdoneranno
all'altro,

Italian,

be accompanied by the negasaw neither of them.

will forgive neither of them,

l'altro,

all'uno

n
I

They

211.

Qualunque,* chiunque, and

;

chicchessia,
the
first

whoever,
refer to

whatever, whatsoever, are indeclinable

may

persons or things, the two last can only relate to persons.

Chiun-

que

is

used sulstantively, and qualunque adjedwely.

Ex.

Chiunque lo ha udito, ha dovuto ammirare la sua eloquenza. Qualunque siano i vostri talenti, voi non ne fate uso.
Egli accetter un impiego qualunque.

Whoever has heard him must have

admired his eloquence.

Whatever your talents may be, you do not employ them. He will accept any employment
whatever.
is

212.

Per quanto,

or simply per,

used to render however,

in

* Qualsisia and qualsivoglia may be used instead of qualunque, and tUe plural become qualsisiano, qvalsloofjliano.


ON INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.
whatever
;

VJ
it

before an adjective, jser quanto

it

is

indeclinable, but

Per can only be used before an adjective; the verb which follows Qiihev per ox per quanto must be in the subjunctive, and is preceded by che when jjer is used. Ex.
agrees with the noun
precedes.
Per
quanto vantaggiose siano le vostre offerte, or, per vantaggiose
che siano,
or, per trover dei difensori.

However
posals

advantageous

your

pro-

may

be.
false,

Ogni sistema perquanto/Zso,

falso

Every system, however

find defenders.

Mill

che

sia,

Per quanti sforzi facessimo, In ogni cuore, per quanto corrotto, or, per corrotto che sia, vi sono alcuni germi di virt,

AVhatever efforts we made. In every heart, however

there are

corrupt,

some srerms

of virtue.

EXERCISE XLVir.

Love and vanity

vam't

are both equally

blind.

The

supersti-

(209) (51) cieco tious believed that any crime whatever was expiated by giving ind. 2 [2\\) [venisse) espiare * doiare largely to monasteries and churches. The law will punish monastero punire

should (211) {dovrebbe) be the perfection of the intellect and of the body. Some persons,

them

both.

The

object of every education whatever

(209)

oggetto

(207)

however prosperous they may

(212)

be,

are

always

dissatisfied.

scontento

Some laws
others.

are

suitable

in

some places and

luogo

opportuno

Some

one wishes to see you. By the laws desiderare {\2A:) Secondo (207)
(211)
convicted convinto
of
wilful

unsuitable in disconveniente
of

Draco,

whoever was

poverty

was

Bracone

volontaria

punished with death.

di

stamp which a hypocrite, however clever he may impronta ipocrita abile (212)
imitate.

imitare

goodness carries on its face a portare in (150) be, cannot [non imo) Whatever experiments we made, we did not succeed. sperimento sub. 2 ina. ^riuscire. (212)

True

96

ON THE PARTICLE

SI.

ON THE PARTICLE
213.
Si,

SI.

when used

as an indefinite pronoun^ corresponds to

the French on, and in English io people, one, they, we, some, &c., employed with an indeterminate signiflcation. Ex.

Non

si

diventa maestro senza essere

Olio does not

stato

prima

scolare,

out

first

Insegnando n'impara,

We

learn

become a master withhaving been a pupil. by teaching.

Nei paesi

caldi si vive quasi sempre all'aria aperta, Si dice che le canzoni 2')opolari rivelino
il

carattere di

un pojwlo,

In hot countries, people live almost always in the open air. People say, or it is said, that popular songs reveal the character of a
people.

214.

The

particle

si is

used in Italian instead of the auxiliary

essere to form a passive verb ;

accompanies

and in this case the verb which must be in the same tense and person as that in which the auxilianj woidd be were it employed. Ex. Un nomo onesto si rispetta, or risAn honest man is respected even by
si

pettato, anche dai poco onesti, Il grano si vende, or venduto a buon mercato. In et avanzata non si cambiano con

Wheat is

the dishonest. sold cheap.

Habits are not easily changed in old

age.

Le

facilita le abitudini, glorie dei nostri antenati

si

ricor-

We

dano con piacere.

remember the glories ancestors with pleasure.

of our

215.
si.

The

co?rtpowji(7

passive tenses are formed as follows with

Ex.
1

Si trovato un raro manoscritto, Si sou trovati rari manoscritti,

rare manuscript has been found. Rare manuscripts have been found.
it

216.

When

si is

used as an indefinite pronoun,

is

the nomi-

native of the verb which

singular ; but
it

when

si is

must always be in the third person employed as impassive reflective pronoun,

Ex.

always accompanies a verb in the third person singular or

Benefits are received with double pleasure when friendsconfer them.

plural, according to the subject of the verb.

ricevono con doppio piacere quando si conferiscono dagli amici, Nella Ciana si comprano e si venbenefizi
si

In China, children are bought and

sold.

dono

i fanciulli.

Si corre sempre alle piazze ed ai

giardini quando comincia moto,

il

terre-

People run always to the squares and gardens when the earthquake
begins.

ON THE PARTICLE

SI.

97

217. Whenever si would cause any ambiguity in the sense of the phrase, the passive verb must be formed with essere or venire;
venire
is

only used in the simple tenses.

i^ersuas
;

Ex.

Vengono or sono

not

si

They

are persuaded.

2Krsuadono, which might mean, they persuade themselves. Gil uomini vengono or sono reputati felici quando sono ricchi; not si reputano, which might mean, men think themselves happy, Sono stati venduti; not si sono venduti, they have sold themselves,

Men

are considered they are rich.

happy when

They have been

sold.

EXERCISE XLVIII.

Gold
is

is

tested

by
con

fire,

men

are tested

by gold.
is

Beer
birra

(25) {21^) provare

(216) con

drunk by the peasants of Germany, wine

contadino

drunk by those

(214)
of Italy.

Perfect happiness
arts

attained in this is never 2(214) ^non ^mai ^raggiungere

life.

The

are

cultivated in peace.

One becomes

conspi-

(214) (213) {diviene) rimarcuous, and even ridiculous, by not following the fashions of the * chevole anche noda
day.

We

admire

talents,

we

praise beauty,

we honour

virtue,

(214) (216) talento but we love goodness. The beautiful bont bello

is

the aim of the arts,

scopo

which
(177)

for

this

reason

are

called

the fine arts.

They

were

bello (214) justly punished in presence of the whole army. (187) armata.

(217) People live

(213)

tranquilly

in

a free country.
^
i

The

title
titolo

of laws

was
i(214)

tranquillamente

formerly written with a kind of red wax, called rubrica, " ^anticamente specie (72) cera from this (is derived) the expression rubric. They have been viene rubrica. (168) (217) invited to spend a week with us.

a passare

98
218.

ON THE PARTICLE

SI,

When

the pronouns

/,

thou, &c., are the subjects of a

passive verb, which in Italian governs the dative of persons, as

dire,

noun must be translated

Vi

comandare, promettere, &c., the personal nominative proin Italian by the dative. Ex.
You were
I

si promise, r vi fu promesso, vi venne promesso, si comanda, or mi comandato, mi vien comandalo, Gli si domanda, or gli domandato, gli vien domandato,

promised.

Mi

am
is

ordered,

lie

asked.

219.

When

the indefinite pronouns one, we, then, are used as

the nominative of a reflected verb, they are exprssed in Italian

by uno,

noi, l'uomo, altri, alcuni, la gente, &c.,

si.

according to the

sense of the phrase, to avoid the repetition of

Ex.

Uno
La

si

avvez~a facilmente alla vita

One

easily
life.

accustoms one's-self to an

oziosa,

idle

Alcuni si persuadono, gente si lusinga, L'uomo si dimentica spesso,

Some persuade themselves. People flatter themselves.

Man

forgets often.
it,

220. Si

may

follow the verb and be joined to

and,
si.

when
Ex.

there is a negation in the phrase,

non always precedes

Death
is

Non

temesi la morte, Credesi che la marina da licggio a Gaeta sia quasi la pi dilettevole parte d'Italia, B.

not feared. The coast from Eeggio to Gaeta is thought about the most delightful part of Italy.

221.

The adverbs
Ex.

vi, ci,

precede si; the relative pronoun ne follows

and the conjunctive pronouns, always si, which then be-

comes
Vi
ni

se.

parla principalmente la lingua

si

The French language

spoken there.

is

principally

Francese,

Non mi
Troppo

dice,

se

ne parlato,

am not told. Too much has

I

Non

se ne

parla pi,

been said about it. People do not speak more of it-

222.

When

the particle si

is

used, the pronoun nominative of

the passive or active verb, and the accusatives, him, her, them,
it,

of the active verb, are not translated in Italian

if

the verb

agrees with the pronouns as

they were expressed.

Ex.

ON THE PARTICLE
Si educano con molta cura, Si ammirano per la loro seriplicit, La tiranna il flagello della societ, e si

SI.

99

We

educate tliem with great care.

vede sempre congiunta

air ipocrisia, alla superstizione, e

all'ignoranza, Si veduto a corte,

They are admired for their simplicity. Tyranny is the scourge of society, and we always see it joined with hypocrisy, superstition, and ignorance.

We

have seen him at court.

EXEPX'ISE XLIX.

The

twelfth century, in which

secolo

is

presented to us the noble

spectacle of

human

(221) (177) (214) intelligence struggling with superstition and

[che lotta)
liberty, and producono They speak of it everywhere in

tyranny.
that

It has

been said that tyrants produce

mobs

(215) produce tvrants. '

tribes
tribii

canaglia

town.

The

(213)
of the desert

(221)

(193)
religion of

deny that the

negare

(48)
for

Mahomet

was made

them

for

how
^

iI/aome//o (214) sub. 2

poich

(they say), can one i [possono)

perform ablutions

when one has no water? how can one give

riches ? or

fare alms
elemosina

when one has no

fast

ricchezza

be to
the year

during the month of

see

what occasion can there pu Ramazan, when one fasts all

* digiunare durante
?

We
(to)

them seldom. (222) raramente.

They

were allowed
[permise)

to

return to their country.

It

has

(218) never been

3

known what
(167)
*
inf.

\2lb)'^nonhnai
happened
avvenisse
to

them.

do what (one likes.) a piace (167)

fight

One (219) The barbarous

lets

one's-self easily be persuaded

lasciare

sport

of the bull
toro [B)

divertimcito
tlie

was introduced into Spain by giostra[2U) (28) it was celebrated with great pomp,
(7)

Arabs, amongst

Aralo

(80)


100 ON THE PARTICLE
SI.

ADDITIONAL EXERCISE.
(Merchants from
2
fi;

all

countries) (are seen there.)

1

One

finds

there the beautiful united to the useful.

In nature, one utile. cercare (221) m vain the model of it. Often one does not follow the path sentiero (221) (11) (220) Sfatare of virtue, because at the beginning it is found thorny and painspinoso (214) fui but one should reflect, that as the first rays of the dovrebbe riflettere (.57) raggio
;

Bun produce a dazzling and unpleasant sensation

abbagliante
abituarsi
dispiacevole
(not) (gets accustomed) to them, so the
?,\ih.\.

until

one

sintantoch (219)

more one advances in avanzarsi (135) cos (111) the path of virtue, the more pleasing and beneficial one finds it.

They say
them
to

that Italian

is

music spoken.

It was not permitted to

[permise)

j222)

land.

A man

Avould do well, says Bacon, to carry a

sbarcare.
pencil in his pocket, to (write down) the thoughts of the lapis appuntare
those which

portare

moment;

come unsought
spontaneo

are generally the best, and should

dovere

be secured, because they seldom return.

Nothing
effort,

worth
[die valga la

having

can

be gained without
labour.

and there
in

is

pena
no

di possederlo) ^ ^(214)
real

enjoyment without

The

sforzo-^.

twilight

the

(202) vera
south is mezzogiorno

travaglio.

crepuscolo
;

much shorter than in

northern countries
shorter.

the days

settentrionale

in winter are longer, but in

summer

The eagle attacks

its

with

its

talons

and

wings, not witli

beak.

{150) [57) artiglio

(17)


lOX

CHAPTER
OX VERBS.
In'

IX.

Italian there are three conjugations,

known by

the termi-

nations ARE, ERE, IRE.

The
which
that in

following table contains a model of those conjugations,

may
all

serve for all the regular verbs.

It will assist the pupil in

learning the Italian verbs, to remark,

tenses of all verbs the

te,

the second person in

tions, in no.

first person plural ends in mo, and the third person, with few excep-

The second person

plural of the preterite of the indicative,

and the imperfect of the subjunctive, are formed by the addition

of an s to the second person plural of the present of the indicative,

amate, you love

;

amaste, you loved

che amaste, that you

;

might love
sentiste.

credete, credeste, che credeste

sentite, sentiste,

che

The

first

person plural of the conditional

is

formed from the

by doubling the m, remmo ; and the second person by adding an s to the future rete, and changing it to reste ; verbs of the first conjugation change the a of the infinitive are into e, in forming the future and conditional, amer,
future termination remo,

amerei,

Szq.

Remark.
sons
:

The
whom

Italians
voi,

have three ways of addressing per-

besides tu

and

they employ, as a mark of respect to-

wards those

they address, the third person singular of the

ella.

verb with the feminine pronoun

If the verb to he alone

an adjective, the latter but

if

comes between the pronoun ella and must be feminine, and agree with ella ;
to
;

any other verb instead of

for a lady.

le

is

employed, the adjective

masculine for a gentle-

agrees with the person addressed

that

is,

man, and feminine

102

REGULAR VERBS.

TABLE OF CONJUGATIONS. REGULAR VERBS.

1st Conjugation,

104

REGULAR VERBS.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Do

not thou

bui/,

REGULAR VERBS.

lOi

That I

migiil

have

That I
io

vi/'r/ht

have

That I might have

united, &c.

bought, &c.

sold,

&c,

Che

io avessi

com- Che

avessi veu-

Che

io avessi

imito

prato

tinto

INFINITIVE MOOD,

To hnj,


106
the indicative, in
tive, as follows
:

REGULAR
tlie

VERr.S.

imjoeralive,

and the present of the subjunc-

PRESENT

IRREGULAR VERES.

107

IHEEGULAR VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION IN ABE.

Andare,
lo go; pres. io

vado or

vo,

Fare, to do

pres. io

fo

or faccio,

tu vai, egli va, noi andiamo, voi andate, eglino vanno ; imp. io andava, tu aidavi, &c. prct. io andai, tu andasti, egli and, &c. past indef. io sono andato, noi siamo andati; pluperf. io era andato, noi eravamo andati; fut. io andr, tu andrai, &c. ; imper. va tu, vada egli, andiamo, andate, vadano; pres. subj. che io vada, che tu vada, ch'egli vada, che noi andiamo, che voi andiate, che coloro vadano ; imp. subj. che io andassi, che tu andassi, &c. cond. io andrei, tu andresti, &o. ger. andando ; part, past, andcdo, andata, andati, andate. Dare, to give pres. io do, tu dai, egli d, noi diamo, voi date, eglino danno ; imp. io dava, noi davamo ; jiret. io diedi or detti, tu desti, egli diede or dette or p. die, noi demmo, voi deste, eglino diedero or dettero or p. dierono ; past indef. io ho dato, noi abbiamo dato; pluperf. io aveva dato; noi avevamo dato; iut. io dar, noi daremo; imper. d tu, dia egli, diamo noi, date voi, diano eglino; pres. subj. che io dia, che noi diamo, ch'eglino
; ; ; ;
;

tu, fai, egli fa, noi facciamo, voi fate, eglino fanno; imp. io faceva, noi facevamo ; pret. io feci, tu

facesti, egli fece, noi facemmo, voi faceste, eglino fecero; past indefinite, io ho fatto, noi abbiamo fatto; fut. io fari), noi faremo; imper. fa tu, faccio egli, facciamo noi, fate voi, facciano eglino ; pres. Bubj. che io faccia, che noi facciamo ; imp. subj. che io facessi, che noi facessimo; cond. io farei, noi faremmo ; gerund, facendo ;

part, past, fatto, fatta, fatti, fatte.

The

derivatives

are

conjugated

in

the same way.

Stare,
to remain pres. io sto, tu stai, egli sta, noi stiamo, voi state, eglino stanno; imp. io stava, noi
;

stavamo;

pret. io stetti,

tu stesti,

egli stette, noi

stemmo, voi steste, eglino stettero; past indefinite, io

stato,

diano or p. dieno; imp. subj. che io dessi, che tu dessi, ch'egli desse, che noi dessimo, che voi deste, ch'eglino dessero; cond. io darei, noi daremmo; ger. dando; part, past, dato, data, dati, date.
N.B.

noi siamo stati; future, noi staremo; imper. sta stiamo noi, state voi, stiano or stieno coloro; pres. subj. che io stia, che noi stiamo ; impcrf. subj. che io stessi, che tu stessi, che egli stesse, che noi stessimo, che voi

sono

io stari),

tu, stia colui,

steste,

che eglino stessero or stes-

sono; cond. io starei, eglino starebbero or starebbono ; ger. stando;

part, past, stato, stata, stati, state,

Ridare is conjugated in tlie same way but circondare and

;

N.B.

Contrastare and other deriva-

tives, are regular.

ricordare, &c., are regular.

108

lURDGULAR

VEIIBS.

IRR.KGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION IN ERE.*

The

following are denominated verbs in ere

sJiort,

on account

of the stress of the accent falling on the antepenultimate syllable,

instead of the penultimate.

In the following table of verbs, the irregular tenses only are

given
;

the other tenses, being regular, arc understood to have

the same inflections as those of the regular verbs given in the

Table of Conjugations,
Accendere, to kindle
accendesti, accese,
;

p.

102.
accesi,

prct.

Aggiungere, or aggiugncre, to add,

;

v.

accendemmo,
-i,

ac-

cendeste, accesero; ger. accenden-

do; part,

past, acceso,

-a, -e.

Accingersi, or accignersi, to prepare one's-self, ref. v. cingere.f Accogliere, or accorre, to welcome, v.

;

cogliere.^

Accorgersi,

to
ti

perceive,

ref.

pret.

mi

accorsi,

accorgesti, &c.

part,

past, accortosi.

giungere. Agere, to freeze, p. has only the preterite ahi, &c. Alludere, to allude, v. deludere. Ammettere, to admit, v. mettere. Ancidere, to kill, p. v. recidere. Angere, to afflict, p. has only 3d person singular of the present, ange. Anteporre, to prefer, v. porre.
; ;

Accorrere, to hasten, v. correre. Accrescere, to augment, v. crescere. Addurre, or adducere, to bring forth, pres. adduco, to allege adduci, adduce, adduciamo, adducete, adducono; imp. adduceva, &c. pret. addussi, adducesti, addusse, adducemmo, adduceste, addussero ; future, addurr, &c. imper. adduci, adduca, adduciamo, adducete, adducano; prcs. subj. che io adduca, adduca, adduca, adduciamo, adduciate, adducano ; cond. imp. subj. adducessi, &c. addurrei, &c. ger. adducendo ;
; ; ; ;

Ajjjendere,

to

hang up

preterite,

appese, appendesti, &c. part, past, appeso. Apporre, to add, v. porre.

;

Apprendere, to learn, v. prendere. Ardere, to burn pret. arsi, ardesti,

;

addotto. Affiggere, to post up, v. prefiggire. Affliggere, to afflict ; pret. afflissi,

])art. past,

&c. part, past, arso. Arrendersi, to surrender, ref. v. rendere. Arridere, to smile, v. ridere. Arrogere, to adjust, to add, hns only the sing, of the third person present, arroge. Ascendere, to ascend, v. scendere. Ascondere, to hide pret. ascosi, ascondesti, &c. part, ascosto, or
;
; ; ;

ascoso.

affliggesti,

&c.

part, past, afflitto.

Ascrivere, to inscribe, v. scrivere. Aspergere, to sprinkle, v. spergere.

* Observe that the verbs ending in rrc, as addurre, trarre, belong to this conjugation.
t

The

reflected verbs are

marked thus:

ref.; the poetical, p.

is

The

v.

means

vedi, see.
its irre-

Accingersi being conjugated like cingere, the student

gularity.

referred to this verb for

IRREGULAR VERBS,
Assistere, to assist
tito.
;

109
to

part, past, assis-

Compromettere,
mettere.

compromise,

v.

Assolvere, to absolve pret. assolvei or assolsi, assolvesti, &c. ; part, past, assoluto or assolto. Assorhere, to absorb part, past, as; ;

Compungere, ovcompugnere, to grieve,

v. pungere. Conchiudere, to conclude,

v.

chiu-

dere.

sorto.

Assumere, to undertake sumi, assumesti, &c.

;

pret. aspast,

part,

assuiito.

Astergere, to clean, p. ; v. tergere. Astrarre, or astraere, to abstract,

trarre.

v.

Concludere, to conclude, v. deludere. Concorrere, to concur, v. correre. Concuocere, to digest, v. cuocere. Condescendere, condiscendere, to condescend, V. scendere. Condurre, or conducere, to conduct, V. addurre.
Configgere, to nail, v. affliggere.

Astringere, or astrignere, to constrain,

V.

stringere.

Attendere, to wait, v. tendere. Attenere, to keep one's word, v. tenere. Attingere, or attignere, to reach, v.
tingere.

Confondere, to confound, \. fondere. Congiungere, or congiugnere, to unite, V. giungere.

Connettere, to unite
connettesti, &c.
;
;

pret. connessi,
pret.

part, connesso.
;

Attorcere, to twist, v. torcere. Attrarre or attraere, to attract, v. trarre. Avvincere, to bind, v. vincere. Avvolgere, to envelop, v. volgere. Cagqere, to fall, an ancient verb, of which only caggia and caggendo are used by the poets. Chiedere, to ask pres. cJiiedo, and in poetry chieggo, or chieggio ; pret.
;

Conoscere,

to

know
;

conobbi,

conoscesti, &c. part, conosciuto. Conquidere, to afflict, to cast down,

V. recidere.

Consistere, to consist, v. assistere. Conspergere, or cospergere, to besprinkle, V. spergere.

Consumere, to consume,
Contendere, to Contorcere, to Contrapporre, Contrarre, or
V. trarre.

v.

assumere.

dispute, v. tendere.
distort, v. torcere. to oppose, v. porre. contraere, to contract,

chiesi,

chiedesti,

&c.

part,

past,

chiesto.

Chiudere, to shut pret. chiusi, chiurpart, past, chiuso. desti, &c. Cingere, or cignere, to gird pret. cinsi, cingesti, &c. part, cinto.
;

Circoncidere, to circumcise,
cidere.

v.

re-

Convincere, to convince, v. vincere. Corre, to gather, v. cogliere. Correggere, to correct, v. reggere. pret. corsi, corresti, Correre, to run
;

Circonscrivere,

to

circumscribe,

v.

scrivere. Cocere, to cook, v. cuocere. Cogliere, or corre, to gather, v. sciogliere.

&c. part, corso. Corrispondere, to correspond, v. rispondere. Corrodere, to corrode, v. rodere.

;

Corrompere, to corrupt,

v.

rompere.

Commettere, to commit,

v. metter.

Cospargere, to strew, v. spargere. Cospergere, to water, v. spergere.

Costringere, or costrignere, to constrain, V. stringere.
Crescere, to
v.
cesti,

Commovere,

to affect, v. movere.

Compiangere, to pity, v. piangere. Comporre, to compose, v. porre. Comprendere, to comprehend,

prendere.

grow
;

pret. crebbi, crespret. croci;

&c.

part, past, cresciuto.

to crucify
;

Crocifiggere,
fissi,

Comirrincre, to compress, v. ojypri-

crocifiggesti,

&c.

part, past,

crocifisso.

TIO
Cuocere, to cook
cosse,
;

IRREGULAR VERBS.
pret. cossi, cuocesti,

Eleggere, to elect, to choose, v.

gere.

leg-

cuocemmo, cuoceste, cossero;

part, past, cotto.

Decidere, to decide, v. recidere. Decrescere, to decrease, v. crescere. Dedurre, to deduce, v. addurre. Deludere, to delude pret. delusi, depart, past, deluso. ludesti, &c. Dej)orre, to depose, v. porre. Deprimere, to depress, v. opprimere. Deridere, to deride, v. ridere. Descrivere, to describe, v. scrivere.
; ;

Elidere, to retrench, v. recidere. Eludere, to elude, v. deludere.

Ergere, to erect; p. pret. &c. part, past, erto.

;

ersi, ergesti,

Erigere, to raise
past, eretto.

pret. eressi ; part.

Escludere, to exclude, v. deludere. Esigere, to exact part, esatto.

;

Desistere, to desist, v. assistere.

Detrarre, to deduct, v. trarre. pret. difesi, Difendere, to defend part, past, difeso. difendesti, &c. Diffondere, to pour out, v. fondere. Dimettere, to forgive, pardon, v. met;

Esistere, to exist, v. assistere. Espellere, to expel pret. espulsi, espellesti, &c. part, espulso. Esporre, to expose, v. porre. Esprimere, to express, v. opprimere. Estendere, to extend, v. tendere.
; ;

tere.

Dijnngere, dipignere, to depict,

v.

Estinguere, to extinguish pret. estinsi, estinguesti, &cpart, estinto. Estrarre, to extract, v. trarre. Fendere, to si)lit t^vq. fendei, fen;
;

pingere. Dirigere, to direct, v. erigere. Disapprendere, to unlearn, or forget,

V. prendere. Discendere, to descend, v. scendere. Disciorre, and disciogliere, to untie, V. sciorre.

desti

part. \ast,

fenduto or fesso.

Figgere, to affix, v. affggere. Fingere, to teign, v. pingere. Fondere, to melt Tpret. fusi, fondesti, &c. Y>ATt.fuso.
; ;

Frammettere, to interpose, v. mettere. Frangere, to break pret. fransi,

;

Discorrere, to discourse, v. correre. Discutere, to discuss pret. discussi,

;

frangesti, &c.

Tpart. franto.

Frapporre, to intermeddle,
Friggere, to
Genuflettere,
flessi,

v.

porre.

discutesti, &c. part, past, discusso. Disgiungere, and disgiugnere, to separate, V. giungere. Dismettere, to dismiss, v. mettere. Dismovere, or dismuovere, to avert, V. movere. Dispergere, to disperse; pret. dis;

fry, v. affliggere.

kneel pret. genugenuflettesli, &c. part, genuto

; ;

flesso.

Giungere, or giugnere, to join, or arrive; pret. giunsi, giungesti, &c.;

part, giunto. Illudere, to deceive, v. deludere.

persi; part, past, disperso. Disporre, to dispose, v. porre. Distendere, to extend, v. stendere. Distinguere, to distinguish, v. estingnere.
Distogliere, or distorre, from, V. togliere.
trarre.

Immergere, to plunge, v. mergere. Impellere, to impel, v. espellere.

Imporre, to order, v. porre Imprimere, to impress, v. opprimere.
IncJdudere, to enclose, v. chiudere. Incidere, to engrave, v. recidere. Includere, to include, v. deludere. Incorrere, to incur, v. correre. Increscere, to be sorry, v. crescere. Indurre, or inducere, to induce, r. addurre. Infingere, to dissemble, \. fingere. Infondere, to infuse, \. fondere.

to

divert
v.

Distrarre, or distraere, to distract,

Distruggere,
gere.

to

destroy,

v.

strug-

Disvellere, divellere, or disverre, to pluck up, V. svellere.

Dividere, to divide, v. recidere.

IKKEGULAK VEKBS.
Infraiif/ere, to break, v.
terfere, V. mettere.

Ill
to

frangere.

Offendere,

oflend
;

pret.

offesi,

Inframettere, or intramettere, to in-

Ingiungere, or ingiugnere, to enjoiu, V. giungere.

lscrivere, to inscribe, v. scrivere.

Insistere, to insist, v. assistere.

Insorgere, to rebel, v. sorgere. Intendere, to understand, v. tendere. Intermettere, to discontinue, v. mettere.

part, offeso. offendesti, &c. Ommettere, to omit, v. mettere. Opporre, to oppose, v. porre. Opprimere, to oppress pret. oppressi, opprimesti, &c. part, ojyprcs.so. pret. pascei, pasPascere, to feed part. ^;asci^o. cesti, &c. Percorrere, to run over, v. correre.
;

Percuotere, to strike
;

pret. percossi,

Interporre, or inlraporre, to interpose, V. porre. Interrompere, to interrupt, v. romjKre. Intingere, or intignere, to steep, v.
///ere.

part, percosso. percotesti, &c. pret. 2^^''^<^^ Perdere, to lose persi; t^uv. perduto ov perso. Permettere, to permit, v. mettere.
;

Persistere, to persist, v. assistere. Piangere, or piagnere, to weep,

v.

Intraprendere, to undertake, v. ^^reuf?ere.

Intridere, to dilute, v. recidere. hitrodurre, to introduce, v. addurre. Intromettere, to introduce, v. mettere.

Intrudere, to intrude pret. intrusi, part, intruso. intrudesti, &c. Invadere, to invade, v. i^ersuadere. Ledere, to wrong pret. lesi ; part.
;

Zeso.

Leggere, to read pret. &c. part, letto.

;

lessi, leggesti,

Manomettere, to
tere.

ill-

use, &c., v. met-

pret. mersi, Ilergere, to plunge part, merso. mergcsti, &c. Mescere, to mix pret. mesciuto.
; ; ;

frangere. Fingere, or pignere, to paint; pret. part, pinto. pinsi, piingesti, &c. Porgere, to present pret. porsi, porpart, porto. gesti, &c. Porre, or pionere, to put, to place, &c. pongo, poni, pone, ponghiamo or poniamo, ponete, pongono ; imp. pret. posi, jwnesti, poneva, &c. pose, ponemjno, poneste, posero ; iat.jyorro, &c.; ivn^er.2wni,j)ongu, pongJiiamo or pianiamo, ponete, pongano ; pres. subj. che io ponga, jmnga, ponga, p)ongiiamo or 2^011iamo, ponghiate or poniate, pongano ; imp. subj. che io ponessi;
; ;

cond. porrei; ger.

posto.

ponendo;
v.

part.

Mettere, to put ; pret. misi, mettesti, &c. part, messo. Mordere, to bite pret. morsi, mor; ;

Posporre, to postpone,

porre.

Precidere, to cut, shorten, v. recidere. Precorrere, to outrun, v. correre.

Prefiggere,
to

desti; part, morso. Movere, or muovere, to move pret. part, mosso. 7nossi, movesti, &c. Mungere, or mugnere, to milk pret. munsi, mungesti, &c. part, munto. Nascere, to be bom pret. nacqui, part. nato. nascesti, &c. Nascondere, to conceal, v. ascon; ; ; ; ; ;

prefix

pret.

prefissi,

pjrefiggesti,

&c.

part. p)refisso.

Premettere, to place before, v. mettere. Prendere, to take pret. presi, prenpart. 2;re50. desti, &c. Preporre, to prefer, v. porre. Prescegliere, to choose before, v.
; ;

scegliere.

dere.

Prescrivere, to prescribe, v. scrivere.

v. assumere. Pretendere, to pretend, v. tendere. Pretermettere, to omit, v. mettere. Produrre, to produce, v. addurre.

Negligere, to neglect ; part, neglessi, negligesti, &c. ; part, negletto. Nuocere, or nocere, to hurt ; pret. nacqui, nocesti, &c. ; part, nociuto.

Presumere, to presume,

112

IRREGULAR VERBS.
Eestringere, ristringere, and riatrignere, to restrain, v. stringere. Eiaccendere, to light again, v. accendere.

Profordere, to dissipate, v. fondere. Promettere, to promise, v. mettere. Promovere, or 2)romuovere, to pro-

mote, V. movereProporre, or froponere, to propose, V. porre. Prorompere, tobreak fortli,v. rompere.

Prosciogliere, or prosciorre,
solve, deliver, v. sciogliere.

Riardere, to scorch, v. ardere. Eichiedere, to ask again, v. chiedere. Eichiudere, to shut again, v. chiudere.
Eicingere, to enclose, v. cingere. Eicogliere, or ricorre, to compile, v.
cogliere.

to

ab-

Proscrivere, to proscribe, v. scrivere. Prostendenti, to prostrate one's-self, V. tendere. Proteggere, to protect ; pret. protessi,
proteggesti, &c.
V. trarre.
;

Elcomporre, to recompose, v. porre. Eicondurre, to reconduct, v. condurre. Eicongiungere, to reunite, v. giungere.

Riconoscere, to recognise, v. conoscere. Ricorrere, to recur, v. correre. Eicorreggcre, to coiTcct anew, v. correggere. Eicrescere, to increase, v. crescere. Ricuocere, to cook again, v. cuocere. Eidere, to laugh pret. risi, ridesti,
;

part, protetto.

Protrarre, or profraere, to protract,

Pungere, or piugnere, to sting, to smart pret. punsi, pungesti, &c.

;

part, punto. Rabbattere, to diminish, v. battere, laccendere, to light again, v. accen-

dere, lacchiudere, to enclose, shut up, v. chiudere, laccogliere, or raccorre, to collect, v.

cogliere,

&e. part. riso. Ridurre, to reduce, v. addurre.

;

liadere,

to

shave, &c.
;

prot.

rasi,
rejoin,

radesti, &c.

part. rasa.

Eaggiungere, raggiugnere, to

V. giungere. Eavvolgere, to envelop, v. volgere.

Ecassumere, or riassumere,
;

to

re-

assume, V. assumere. pret. i-ecisi, Eccidere, to cut part, reciso. cidesti, &c.
;

re-

Eedimere, to redeem
; ;

pret. redensi,

part, redento. redimesti, &c. Eeggere, to rule pret. ressi, reggesti, &c. part, retto. Eendere, to render, restore ; pret. part. reso. rendesti, &c. resi, Some conjugate this verb lik<i vendere, regular.
; ;

Riedere, or redire, to come again, p. ; has only pres. riedl, riede, riedono; imperf. rediva; imperat. and pres. subj. rieda, riedano. Rifondere, to melt again, v. fondere. Rifrangere, to reflect, v. frangere. Rifriggere, to fry again, v. friggere. Rigiungere, to rejoin, v. giungere. Rileggere, to read again, v. leggere. Rilucere, to shine pret. rilussi, rilucesti, &c, no participle. Rimettere, to remit, v. mettere. Rimordere, to bite again, v. mordere. Rimovere, to remove, v. movere. Rinascere, to spring up afresh, v.
;

nascere.

Pi,

'primere, to repress pret. repressi, reprimesti, &c. part, represso. Eeserivcre, or riscrivere, to write
; ;

Rinchiudere, to shut in, contain, v. chiudere. Rincrescere, to be sorry, impers.; pros, mi rincresce, ti rincresce, &c. pros. sub. pret. mi rincrebbe, &c. che mi rincresca, &c. pai-t. past,
; ; ;

rincresciuto.

anew, v. scrivere. Eesistere, to resist, v. assistere. Eespingere, or respignere, to repulse,

V. spingere.

Rinvolgere, to envelop, v. volgere. Ripascere, to feed again, v. pascere. Ripercuotere, to strike again, y.percuotere.

inUEGULAR VEKES.
Biporre, to replace, v. iJorre. lUprenJere, to reprove, to retake,
in'cndere. Jiiprodiirre,
to

113
pres. subj.

gano ;
v.
&.C.
;

che io sciolga,

cond. scioglierei, or sciorrei;

part, sciolto.

reproduce,

v.

ijrov.

durre. Eipromettcre, to promise again,

oiiettcre.

Scommettere, to bet, v. mettere. Scomporre, to derange, v. porre. Sconfiggere, to conquer, defeat, v.

affliggere.

Riscrivere, to write again, v. scrivere. liscuotere, to recover, redeem, v. scuotere. Hisolvere, to resolve, v. assolvere. Risorgere, to rise again, v. sorgere. Bisospingere, to repulse, v. spingere. Eiapingere, or rispignere, to reject,
V.

Scontorcere, to wrest, to wreath, v.

torcere.

Sconvolgere, to overturn, v. volgere. Scorgere, to see, perceive, v. accorgere.

spingere.
;

Scorrere, to run in haste, slide, v. correre. Scrivere, to write ; pret. scrissi, scrivesti, &c. part, scritto. Scuotere, to shake, v. percuotere. Sedurre, to seduce, v. addurre. Smungere, or smugnere, to dry up, v.
;

Rispondere, to answer pret. risposi, part, risposto. rispondesti, &c.

;

Ristringere, or ristrignere, to restrain,

v. stringere.

Ritingere, or ritignere, to dye again,

V. tingere. Ritogliere, or ritorre, to take again,
V. togliere.

mungere. Smuovere, to

stir, v.

movere.

Ritorcere, to twist, or wring again, v.

torcere.

Ritrarre,
trarre.

to

describe

or

draw,

v.

Rivivere, to revive, v. vivere. Rivolgere, to turn over, or change, v.

volgere.

Rodere, to
&.C.
;

gnaw

pret. rosi, rodesti, pret. ruppi,

part. roso.
to

Socchiudere, to half-shut, v. chiudere. Soccorrere, to succour, v. correre. Soggiungere, or soggiugnere, to add, V. giungere. Sommergere, to submerge, v. mergere. Sommettere, to submit, v. mettere. Sopporre, to subject, v. porre. Sopraggiungere, or sopraggiugnere, to come unexpectedly, v. giungere. Soprappore, to place above, v. porre. Soprascrivere, to superscribe, v. scrivere.

Rompere,
ptesti,

break
;

rmpros.

&c.

part, rotto.
;

Scegliere, or scerre, to choose

scelgo,
scegli,

sceglie,

scegliamo,

scegliete, scelgono ; pret. scelsi, scegliesti, &c. ; imper. scegli, scelga,

scegliamo, scegliete, scelgano; pres. sub]', che io scelga, &c. part, scelto. pret. scesi, Scendere, to descend scendesti, &c. part, sceso. Schiudere, to open, to exclude, v. chiudere.
;
;

Sopravvivere, to survive', v. vivere. Sopprimere, to suppress, v. opprimere. Sorgere, to rise pret. soi'si, sorgesti, &c. part, sorto. Sorprendere, to surprise, v. prendere. Sorreggere, to support, v. reggere.
; ;

Sorridere, to smile, v. ridere. Soscrivere, to subscribe, v. scrivere. Sospendere, to suspend pret. sospesi,
;

sospendesti, &c.

part, sospeso.
v.

Sospingere, or sospignere, to push,

Sciogliere,
;

or sciorre, to untie, or loosen pres. sciolgo, sciogli, scioglie, sciogliamo, sciogliete, sciolgono;
pret. sciolsi, sciogliesti, &c.

future, scioglier or sciorro; imper. sciogli, sciolga, sciogliamo, sciogliete, sciol;

spingere. Sottintendere, to be understood, v. tendere. Sottomettere, sommettere, to submit, V. mettere.

Sottoporre, to subdue,

y.

porre.

114

IRREGULAR VERBS.
Tergere, to wipe, to clean p. pret. tersi, tergesti, &c. part, terso. Tingere, or tignere, to dye, v. pingere. Togliere, or torre, to take away, v.
; ;

Sottoscrivere, to subscribe, v. scrivere. Sottrarre, to subtract, v. trarre.

Sovragiungere, to happen unexpectedly, V. giungere. Spargere, to spread, scatter pret. sparsi, spargesti, &c. part, sparso. Spegnere, or spengere, to extinguish pret. spensi, spegnesti, &c. part.
;
; ;

sciogliere.

Torcere,

to

bend,

to
;

twist

pret.

torsi, torcesti, &c. part, torto. Tradurre, to translate, v. addurre.

spento.
Spendere, to spend pret. spesi, spendesti, &c. part, speso. Spergere, to disperse pret. spersi,
; ; ;

spergesti, &c. part, sperso. Spingere, or spignere, to push pret. spinsi, sjnngesti, &c. part, spinto. Sporgere, to project, jut out, \. por; ;

Trafiggere, to pierce, v. affliggere. Tramettere, to put between, v. mettere. Trarre, or traere, to draw pres. traggo, traggi or trai, trae, tragghiamo or traiamo, traete, traggono imp. traeva, &c. ; pret.
; ;

trassi,

traesti,
;

trasse,

traemmo,

gere.

Stendere, to extend, v. tendere.

Storcere, to twist, v. torcere. Straccocere, to cook too much,
cocere.
v.

Stravolgere, to turn, to wrest,

v. vol-

fut. trarr, &c. ; tragga, traiamo, traete, traggano; pres. subj. che io tragga, tragga, tragga, traiamo, tragghiate, traggano; imp. subj. che io traessi, &c. cond. trarrei,

traeste, trassero

imper.

traggi,

gere. Stringere, or strignere, to squeeze, to press pret. strinsi, stringesti, &c. ;

;

&c.

gerund, traendo; part, tratto.

Trascegliere, and trascerre, to choose,

V. scegliere.

part, stretto.

Trascendere,
;

to to

surmount,

v.

scen-

Struggere, to melt, to dissolve pret. strussi, struggesti, &c. part, strutto. Subdividere, to subdivide, v. re;

dere.

cidere.

Svellere, or sverre, to pluck

;

up

pret.

svelsi, svellesti, &c. part, svelto. Svolgere, to unfold, v. volgere. Supporre, to suppose, v. porre. Sussistere, to subsist, v. assistere. Tacere, to be silent, to hold one's tongue pres. taccio, taci, tace, tacciamo, tacete, tacciono ; pret. imper. taci, tacqui, tacesti, &c. taccia, tacciamo, tacete, tacciano ; pres. subj. che io taccia, taccia, taccia, tacciamo, tacciate, tacciano;
; ;

transgress, to run over, V. correre. Trascrivere, to transcribe, v. scrivere. Trasfondere, to transfuse, v. fondere. Trasmettere, to transmit, v. mettere. Trasporre, to transpose, v. porre. Travolgere, to invert, v. volgere. Uccidere, to kill, v. recidere. Ungere, or ugnere, to anoint, v. pungere. Vilipendere, to despise, v. sospendere. Vincere, to vanquish pret. vinsi,

Trascorrere,

vincesti,

&c.

part, vinto.
;

Vivere,

to
fut.

live

pret. vissi,
;

vivesti,
;

&c.

vivr

cond. vivrei, &c.

part, taciuto.

part, vivuto or vissuto.

;

Tendere, to tend pret. &c. part. teso.

;

tesi, tendesti,

Volgere, to turn

pret. volsi, volgesti,

&c.

part, volto.

The
dovre,

following verbs are termed iu ere long, because the force

falls

of the accent
S:c.,

on the penultimate syllable, as in antivedre,

of the

instead

antepenultimate,

as

iu prdere,

IRREGULAR VERD8.
crscere^ lggere, fndere, fingere, &c.
;

115
but
tlie

pupil will obit is

serve, that ciltbough tbe accent falls on the e of re\

not a

broad accent, to be pronounced like

to

aire.ij,

but an acute accent,

have the kind of intermediate sound of error in English, as Without this remark, the pupil might suppose that tbe e, from having an accent, should be pronounced broad.
errnj.

IREEGULAE VEEBS IN ERE LONG.

Antivedere, to foresee, v. vedere.
Assidersi, to
assiso.*
sit

assisi, ti assidesti,

down, ref. pret. mi jiart. past, &c.

; ;

Astenere, to abstain, v. tenere. Avvedersi, to perceive, ref., v. vedt-re. Bere, to drink, p. pres. beo, bei, bee, beiamo, beete, heono; imp. beeva, &c. pret. bevvi, beesti, bevve, beemmo, beestc, bevvero; fut. bero, &c. iraper. bei, bea, beiamo, beete, beano ; pres. subj. che io bea, bea, bea, beiamo, beiate, beano; imp. subj. che io beessi, &c. cond. berei, part., &c. ger. beendo ; past,
;
; ;
;

Dissuadere, to dissuade, v. persuadere. Dolere and dolersi, to complain, ref, pres. mi dolgo or doglio,^ ti duoli, si duole, ci dogliamo, vi dolete, si dolgono; pret. mi dolsi, ti dolesti, imper. &c. fut. mi dorr, &c.
;
;
;

duoliti,
tevi,

dolgasi,
;

dolgansi

dogliamoci, dolepres. subj. che mi

bevuto. Bevere is regular, and generally used in prose. Cadere, to fall pret. caddi, cadesti, &c. ; fut. cadr, &c. cond. cadrei, &c. part, past, caduto. Calere, to care, to be concerned for, p.; has only: pres. ?iit cafe; imp. mi caleva; pret. mi calse; pres. subj. che mi caglia. Compiacere, to comply with, to please, ref., V. piacere. Condolersi, to condole witli, ref., v.
;

dolga, ti dolga, si dolga, ci dogliamo, vi dogliate, si dolgano ; cond. mi dorrei, &c. imp. subj. che mi dolessi, &c. ger. dolendosi; part, past, dolutosi; comp. mi sono doluto, ci siamo doluti, &c. Dovere, to owe devo, devi, deve, devono, delibo or deggio, debbi,
; ; ;

debhe, dobbiamo, dovete, (debbono, deggiono or deano ; pret. dovetti,

&c. fut. dovr, &c. no imperative pres. subj. che io debba, debba, debba or deggia,
dovesti,
; ; ;

deggia, deggia, dobbiamo, dobbiate, debbano or dcggiano; cond. dovrei;

part, past, dovuto.

Equivalere,
valere.

to

be

equivalent,

v.

dolere.

Contenere, to contain, v. tenere. v. cadere. Detenere, to arrest, v. tenere. Discadere, to decline, v. cadere. Dispiacere, to displease, v. piacere.

Giacere, to lie down, v. tacere. Tntertenere, or intrattenere, to entertain, V. tenere.

Decadere, to decay,

Lecere and
licensed.

licere, to

be permitted or
singular of the

These verbs have only

the third j)ersou

Except

in the preterito

aud

parliciple, assidei il

is

uut

useil,

but iakre.

116

IRBEGULAB VERDS.
imper. sappi, sappia, sappiamo, sappiate, sappiano: pres. subj. che io sappia, &.C. cov\. sapirei ; part, past, sapido. Scadere, to decay, to fall off, v. cadere. Sedere, to sit down; pres. seggo, siedi,
;

present tense of tlio indicative, and lice, and are merely employed in poetry. Mantenere, to maintain, v. tenere.
lece

Ottenere, to obtain,
;

v. tenere.

Parere, to appear pres. pajo, pari, pare, pajamo, parete, pajono; pret. fut. parr, parvi, paresti, &c. &c. pres. snbj. che io paja, &c. cond. parrei ; part, paruto and parso. Persuadere, to persuade pret. perpart, persuasi, persuadesti, &c. suaso. Piacere, to please, v. tacere. Possedere, to possess, v. sedere. Potere, to be able pres. posso, puoi, pu or puote, possiamo, potete, possono ; fut. potr, &c. no imper. pres. subj. che io j)0ssa, possa, p)ossa, possiamo, possiate, possano; cond. potrei; part, past, potuto. Presedere, to preside, v, sedere. Prevalere, to prevail, v. valere. Prevedere, to foresee, v. vedere. Provvedere, to provide, v. vedere. Pattenere, to arrest, v. tenere. Pavvedersi, to correct one'sself, ref.,
;

sediamo, sedete, seggono ; imper. siedi, segga, sediamo, sedete, seggano; pres. subj. che io segga, segga, segga, sediamo, sediate, segsiede,

gano ; part, past, seduto. Soggiacere, to be subject, v. giacere.

Solere, to be accustomed pres. soglio, suoli, suole, sogliamo, solete, sogliono ; imp. soleva ; pres. subj. che io
;

soglia, sogli, soglia, sogliamo, sogliate,

sogliano; part, past, solito. In the tenses not noticed here, the verb essere is used with the participle
;

as, io

fui

solito,

was

ac-

customed, &c. Soprassedere, to supersede,

v. sedere.

Sostenere, to sustain, v. tenere. Spiacere, to displease, v. piacere.

Sprovvedere,

to leave destitute, v. vedere. Tenere, to liold pres. tengo, tieni, tiene, teniamo, tenete, tengono; pret.
;

v. vedere.

tenni, tenesti, &c.

Riavere, to have again, v. avere. Ricadere, to fall a^ain, v. cadere. Rimanere, to remain pres. rimango, rimani, rimane, rimaniamo, rima;

imper.

tieni, tenga,

fut. terr, &c. teniamo, tenete,

tengano; pres. subj. che io tenga, tenga, tenga, teniamo, leniate, tengano; cond. terrei, &c. part, past,
;

nete,

rimangono ;
;

pret. rimasi, ri-

manesti, &c. fut. rimarr; imper. rimani, rimanga, rimaniamo, rimanete, rimangano; pres. subj. che io rimanga, rimaniamo, rimaniate, rimangano ; cond. rimarrei; part, past, rimasto or rimaso. Risapere, to know by hearsay, v. sapere. Risedere, to reside, v. sedere. Ritenere, to retain, v. tenereRivedere, to see again, v. vedere. Rivolere, to will again, v. volere. Sapere, to know; pres. so, sai, sa,

tenuto. Trattenere, to entertain, v. tenere. Travedere, to see double, v. vedere. Valere, to be worth ; pres. vaglio or valgo, vali, vale, vagliamo, valete,

vagliono; pret. valsi, valesti, &c. fut. varr, &c. imper. vali, vaglia, vagliamo, valete, vagliano ; pres. subj. che io valga or vaglia, &c. cond. varrei ; part, past, valuto. Vedere, to see pres. vedo, veggo, or
;

veggio, vedi, vede,

vediamo or veg;

sappiamo,

sapete,
;

sanno
fut.

pret,
;

seppi, sapesti, &c.

sapr, &c.

giamo, vedete, vedono or veggono; pret. vidi, vedesti, &c. fut. vedr, &c. imper. vedi, veda or vegga, vediamo or veggiamo, vedete, vedano
;

IRREGULAR VERBS.
or veggano; pres. siibj. che io veda or Jcgga ; comi, vedrei, &c. part, past, veduto or visto. Volere, to be willing; pres. voglio or
;

117
;

vogliono; prof, volli, volesti, &c. no imperative fut. vorr, &c. cond. pres. siibj. che io voglia, &c. vorrei; ger. volendo; part. past.
;

VI,

vuoi,

vuole,

vogliamo, volete.

voluto.

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION

IN IBE.
Apparire, to appear
;

pret. apparii

or apparvi; part, past, apparito or apparso. It is the same with

comparire. Aprire, to open, like servire ; but in the pret. aprii or apersi, apristi, &c. part, past, aperto.
;

Discucire, to un sew, v. cucire. Disdire, to deny, v. dire. Divenire, to become, v. venire. Empire, to fill pres. empio, empi, empie, empiamo, empite, emjnono ; imper. empi, empia, empiamo, empiite, empiano; pres. subj. che io
;

Assalire, to assail, v. salire. Assorbire, to absorb part, past, as;

empia, &c.
Escire, to go out, v. uscire. Gire, to go, p., has only the following imp. giva or tenses gite, you go gia, givamo, givano or giano ; jiret. giste, girono ; gisti, g orgia, gimmo, imper. gite, go che gissi, &c., that gito, gone. I might go Instruire, to instruct pret. instrvssi, instruisii, &c., or regular, instruii &c. part, past, instruito and in: ; ; ; ; ;

sorbito or assorto. Avvenire, to arrive, v. venire. Benedire, to bless, v. dire.

Circonvenire, to circumvent, v. ue?izVe. Comparire, to appear before, v. apXHirire.

Construire or costruire, to construct,

V. instruire.

Contraddire, to contradict, v. dire. Contravvenire, to contravene, v. venire.

Convenire, to agree, v. venire. Coprire, to cover, v. aprire.

sew pres. cucio, cuci, &c. imper. citci, cucia, cuciamo, cucite, cuciano; pres. subj. che io cucia, &c. Dire, to tell, to say pres. dico, dici or d, dice, diciamo, dite, dicono ; imp. diceva, &.C.; pret. dissi, dicesti, disse, dicemmo, diceste, dissero; imper. d, dica, diciamo, dite, dicano; pres. subj. che io dica, &c.
Cucire, to
.;

strutto. Interdire, to prohibit, v. dii-e. Intervenire, to intervene, v. venire. Ire, to go, p., has only ite, go iva, ho went ivano, they went iremo, we shall go irete, you will go ;
; ;
;

iranno, they will go

ito,

gone.*

3Ialedire, to curse, v. dire. Morire, to die pres. muojo or moro muori, muore or more, li poetry muojamo or moriamo, morite, mvojono; fut. morir or morr, &c. imper. muori or mori, muoja or mora, muojamo or moriamo, ino;
;

ger. dicendo; part, past, detto. Discoprire, to discover, v. aprire.

rile,

muojano

or

morano

jircs.

Bubj. che io nuoja,

Disconvenire, to disagree,

v. venire.

or

mvoja, muoja mora, muojamo or moriamo, mo-

* Ire and
gire

(]ire

are the

of a better aound.

same verb the letter g being added in some instances for the sake The prosaic verb for to go is andare. Ancient writers have made use ol
;

and

ire in their prose writings also.

Ili

IRREGULAR VERBS.
muojano
or

riate,

muorano; cond.
;

morirei or morrei, &c.

part, morto.

Offrire, to offer, v. aprire. Olire, to smell, p., has only

oliva, olivi, oliva, olivano.

imp.

Pervenire, to attain, v. venire. Predire, to predict, v. dire. Prevenire, to prevent, v. venire. Provenire, to proceed from, v. venire.

Sdrucire, to rip up, v. cucire. Seguire, to iollow pres. sieguo, siegui, siegue, seguiamo, seguite, siegiiono ; imper. siegui, siegua, seguiamo, seguite, sieguxino ; pres. subj. che io siegua, siegua, siegua, seguiamo, seguite, sieguano. This verb is also conjugated regularly.
;

Seirpellire,

to

bury

part,

past,

seppellito or sepolto.

Bedire or riedere, to return.

verh,

introduced in only riedi, thou returnest; riede,

This poetry, has

Soffrire, to suffer, like servire, but in

the pret. soffrii or soffersi; part.

past, sofferto.

he returns.
Riapparire, to reappear, v. apparire. Riaprire, to open again, v. aprire. Ribenedire, to bless again, v. dire. Ricoprire, to cover again, v. co2)rire.

Sopravvenire, to happen, to come unexpectedly, v. venire. Sovvenire, to succour, v. venire.

Sovvenirsi,
t^enire.

to

remember,

ref.,

v.

Ridire, to say again, v. dire. Riescire, to succeed, v. riuscire. Rinvenire, to find again, v. venire. Risalire, to ascend again, v. salire. Risovvenire, to recollect, v. venire. Rivenire, to return, v. venire. Riuscire, to succeed, v. uscire. pres. salgo, sali, Salire, to ascend sale, saliamo or sagliamo, salite salgono ; imper. sali, salga, saliamo or sagliamo, salite, salgano ; pres subj. che io salga, salga, salga, saliamo or .sof/liamo, saliate or This verb, as sagliate, salgano. well as its compounds risalire, assalire, soprassalire, may be con jugated also like unire. Scomparire, to disappear, v. coin parire. Sconvenire, to be unbecoming, v
;

Svenire, to faint away, v. venire. Udire, to boar pres. odo, odi, ode, udiamo, udite, odono; imper. odi, oda, udiamo, udite, odano; pres. subj. che io oda, oda, oda, udiamo, udiate, odano. Venire, to come pi'cs. vengo, vieni,
; ;

viene,

veniamo,
vieni,

venite,

vengono;
fut.

pret. venni, venisti,

&c.

verro;

imper.
venite,

venga,
;

veniamo,

vengano
venga,

pres. subj. che io

venga,

veniate, vengano; part, past, venuto.

venga, veniamo, cond. verrei;

Uscire

escono;

pres. to go out uscite, esce, usciamo, imp. usciva, &c. pret. uscisti, usc, &c. imper. uscii, esci, esca, usciamo, uscite, escano;

or escire,
esci,

esco,

pres. subj. che io esca, esca, esca,

usciate, escano; imp. usciamo, cond. subj. che io uscissi, &c. uscirei, &c. gcr. uscendo ; part.
; ;

venire.

Scoprire, to discover, v. coprire. Scucire, to unscw, v. cucire.

past, uscito.


TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERPS.
119

TRANSITIVE
Verbs
223.
to
intransitive.

AND INTRANSITIVE

VERBS.
transitive

are divided into two classes

namely,
its

and

When

the verb expresses an action passing from an actor

transitive,

an object,
lia

it is

the auxiliary avere, to have.

II giudice
il reo d^ omicidio Il cacciatore ha ucc

and forms Ex.

\

compound

tenses with

condannato alla viarie

The judge has condemned

derer to death.

the mur-

un

cervo,

The huntsman has

killed a stajr.

224.

The passive form, which

is

expresses an action suffered

by

the subject,

formed, as in English, by conjugating the auxi-

liary essere with the past participle of a transitive verb.

stati accusati di vilt, vostra costanza alfine premiata. Il monarca die temuto rara-

Ex.
of cow-

Sono

They have been accused

ai-dice.

La

Your constancy is at last rewaj-ded. The monarch who is feared is sel-

mente amato,

dom

beloved.

225.
it is

When the verb

Ex.
il

expresses an action confined to the actor,

its

intransitive,

and forms

compound
He

tenses with the auxi-

liarv essere.

venuto a j^assare

mese della

has come to spend the vintage

in the country. the leaves have fallen.

vendemmia alla campagna, Quando le foglie sono cadute,

Sono
Sono
partiti

month

When

senza venire a dirci

They have gone away without

ing leave of us.

tak-

addio.
arrivati col battello

a vapore,

They have come by

the steamer.

226. The following verbs, although intransitive, form their compound tenses, like transitive verbs, with avere, as in Italian there is an object understood, without, however, any passage of
the action from the subject taking place
:

Camminare
Passeggiai Cenare, Desinare, Pranzare.

1}

to walk.

Regnare,
Ridere, Riposare, Sbadigliare, Sorridere,
Stranutire,
Tossire,

to reign.

to laugh,
to rest, to

to sup.
[-to dine.

yawn,

to smile, to sneeze, to
to

Dormire,
Gridare, Peccare, Piangere,

to sleep,

to cry.
to sin.

Vegliare,

cough, watch,

to

weep.

Viaggiare,

to travel.


120
227.

TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS.

The

following verbs

may
;

form their compound tenses

with essere when a state of action is expressed
:

with the auxiliary essere or orere

being
is

denoted, with avere

when an

Avendo

corso dietro aU'amico tuo, B.

after

Sentendo Arriguccio esser corso

tro loberto,
T>.

die-

Having run

thy friend.

Hearing

tluat

Arriguccio had run

after Eobert.

La
The

febbre ha cessato di esser perico-

losa.

fever has ceased to be dangerous.

nella stessa casa,

cessata sid far del giorno, Tlie fever lias ceased towards daybreak.

La febbre

Abbiamo dimorato

Wo have lived in

the same house.

NclVisola di Circe essendo alcun tempo dimorato, Having lived some time in the island
of Circe.

Questo accidente ha cresciuto il male, This accident has increased the malady.

II male molto cresciuto, The disease has much increased.

Io ho fuggito i miei nemici, 1 have fled my enemies.

Io son fuggito dalla jrigione, I have fled from prison.

Abbiamo passato

il

teatro,

Siamo

passati dalla posta,

We
He

liJgli

bave passed the theatre. ha salito or montato le scale, has gone up stairs.
sceso
il

We
He

have cnlled at the post-office. Egli salito or montato sulla collina,

lias

ascended the

hill

monte, have descended the mountain. Abbiamo vissuto giorni felici,

Abbiamo

We

We
We

have lived happy days.

di

Abbiamo seduto all'ombra

tano,

un pla-

Sono sceso da cavallo, I have dismounted from horseback. Son vissuti insieme felicemente, They have lived together happily. Eravate seduti sulVerlia,

bave sat under the shade of a

You were

seated on the grass.

plane-tree.

EXERCISE

L.
it

Aristophanes having died in battle, Aristofane (225) Athenian poets should not go to war.
Ateniese {72) {dovessero) the highest mountains of Scotland.
three years, and have received
cans.

was ordered that

have ascended
(227)
lived in

Wc

We have
(that) they

America

(227)

much kindness from

gentilezza p.

the Anieri-

They have

grown
crescere

so

much

were not recogind. 3

(74)


TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS.
nised.

121

Marat
to Paris

was

killed

by Charlotte Corday, who had

irr.

uccidere

Carlotta

come
safe

from Caen

for the purpose.

We have
(225)
his

(225)
all

arrived
"

and sound.
'^sano.

Adrian

(a questo fine.)

-salvo

had sculptured on inf. Adirano fare

tomb,

He

has
(225)
irr.

died on account of the a cagione

number

of his physicians."

medico.

From

Greece poetry has passed into Italy. Eepublics have " Repubblica in (28) (225) (27) Grecia

the founalmost always fallen from liberty into slavery. Da quasi schiavila. (225) dation of Constantinople, the glory of the Eoman empire has Costantinopoli

Since

day by day
watched.

decreased.

I
p.

have

(di giorno in giorno) declinare.

We

slept while you (226) mentre

have

venerate the dead, because their virtues alone

solo

(226) (222) survive (to) them sopravvivere

their virtues

the vices which were once blended with ind. 2 (96) misto a
loro.

have died with themselves.

(225)

REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.

228. Reflected verbs are conjugated in
the conjunctive pronouns mi,
in the plural.
ti,

all their

tenses with
ci, vi,

si in

the singular, and

si

The compound
Ex.

tenses of these verbs are formed

in Italian

with essere.

INFINITIVE.
Divertirsi^

Divertendosi,

Essersi divertito, Essendosi divertito,

amuse one's-self. amusing one's-self. to have amused one's-self. having amused one's-self.
to
I

122

REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERBS.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Mi

diverto,

amuse myself,

Ti diverti, Si diverte, Ci divertiamo, Vi divertite.

Si divertono.

thou amusest thyself, he amuses himself,

we amuse

ourselves,

you amuse yourselves,

they amuse themselves.

PAST INDEFINITE.
j\Ii

sono divertito, &c.,

I have

amused myself.

IMPERATIVE.

Non

ti

divertire,

do not thou amuse

thyself,

Divertiti,

Si diverta,
Divertiamoci,
Divertitevi,

Si divertano, &c.,
229.
it is

amuse thyself. let him amuse himself. let us amuse ourselves. amuse yourselves. let them amuse themselves.
is

When

the verb in the reflective form

ci, vi, si,

used reciprocally,

conjugated with the pronouns

essere.

and forms the com-

pound tenses with Noi ci vediamo,

Voi vi vedete, Eglino si vedono, &c.,

Ex.
I

Wo

see one another.

You see one another. They see one another.

scamhievohnente,

230.

The English

reciprocal pronouns, one another, each other,

l'altro, or

may
Noi

be expressed in Italian by Vun

;

mutually

reciprocamente, reciprocally.
|

Ex.

ci siamo aiutati l'un l'altro, Voi vi siete amati scambievolmente, Eglino si sono offesi reciprocamente,

We

have helped one another.

You have loved one another. They have offended one another.
LI.

EXERCISE

The demigods of the

(semidei)

ancients were

men who had

(228)

distinguished
distinto

themselves by extraordinary 2)cr straordinario

courage and virtue.

The

Athii-


REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL VERES.
nians

123

wit prided themselves on their spirito gloriare di

and learning.
sapere
to

He
his

reproached hiroself with having neglected inf. trascurare di rimproverare

promise.
one's

perform

adempiere

One has * right enjoy duty. She sang Spanish songs,

a

to

one's-self after

having done
inf.

(156) dovere

on the guitar. chitarra con

ferire

They

wounded one another.

Men
much

a (228) battersi in duello

Spagnuolo have fought

accompanying herself accompagnare duel, and they have

(229)

Those who
(165)

(230)
possess
irr.

should love and help each other. {dovrebbero) (230)

so

are not

rich as those

who

content

(Ill)

themselves with
di

little.

Dress yourself as quickly as

[il pi.

possible.

presto possibile)

We

should

accustom

ourselves

to

everything.

When
say.

we

{Dovremmo) avvezzare blame ourselves, people

biasimare
gente
s.

a believe more than we

less

say, but when

we

praise ourselves, people believe

(107) than

we

They

(110)

have

fatigued themselves too much.

(228) stancare

(74)

231.

Many

intransitive verbs in Italian are

:

reflected,

which

are not so in English, as the following

Addormentarsi,

to fall asleep

to hasten.
'

iSpici

Ajprossinarsi, ) Accostarsi, Y ^o approach. Avvicinarsi, Arrendersi, to sun-ender. Astenersi, to abstain. Attristarsi, to get sad.

Alza

y''^''Levarsi,
Ammoqliarsi,
)
.

Maritarsi, '} Annoiarsi, to get tired.

rsi,

to get

marned.

-,

Avanzarsi, to advance. Avviarsi, to go forward. Bagnarsi, to bathe, to get wet.

Compiacersi, to take pleasure. Contentarsi, to be satisfied.
Crucciarsi,
"

to lean.

Adirarsi, Arrabbiarsi,

> to get
I

angry.


124

REFLECTED AKD RECIPROCAL VERBS.

Opporsi, to
Pentirsi, to repent.

Dilettarsi, to delight. Dimenticarsi, . p.. ^ ^^'^et. Scordarsi, \ | Dolersi, to grieve. Fidarsi, to trust.
.

"*". {;:rpi;'.r
Rallegrarsi, to rejoice. Ricordarsi, to remember. Riposarsi, to rest. Rompersi, to break. Sentirsi bene, male to feel well, unwell.
Svegliarsi, to awake.

Imbarcarsi, to embark. Impadronirsi, to get possession IiifaMidirsi, to get weary. Ingegnarsi, to endeavour.

of.

Innamorarsi, to fall in love. Lamentarsi, to complain. Maravigliarsi, to wonder.

'jrst, to

take offence.

Vantarsi, to boast. Vergognarsi, to be ashamed.

EXERCISE

LII.

Epic poets delight

e/;/co

in

depicting

battles.

Since
Poich

you

(34) iescr/yere inf. have sincerely repented, I forgive you.

(231)

We

should often be

(228)

(231)

of our finest actions, if the world saw the motives which bello sub. 2 (231) produced them. Narcissus fell in love with his own beauty.

ashamed

Narciso (231)
I

awoke
(231)

in the midst of the night.

When we

di

(156)
are
old,

(57) vecchio
pleasure (of) the days of our youth.
(jioventit

we remember with
(231)
forget to

Do not
tell

come to-morrow
{di
it irr.

early.

Eepenting of

his project,

(231) he did not carry

buon ora)
effect.

into
in

(231) servant ran to

irr.

(to)

porre
Pietro
to ray wife,

esecuzione

Peter Cornelius that the house was

on

fire

Speak about
from his

it

{in fiamme)

(138)
desk,
scritloio

answered the poet, without rising

irr.

(231)
in

inf.

or

awakening from the meditation

inf.

which he was absorbed.

irr.

Although

laden
ricolm.0

with favours he always complains, and seems

di

(231)

to take pleasure in boasting of his

own

(231)

(231)

ingratitude towards forverso


IMPERSONAL VERBS.
tunc.

125

A Roman who
wbo made ? does
irr.
it

friends

bad separated from bis wife, said to bis (228) separarsi is it not were astonished at it You see my shoe scarpa sorjjreso (138)
:
;

well

not

fit

well ?

But do you perceive where

(231)
called

stare

it

hurts

me

Frederick

the First,

Eed

beard,

Federico idi) far male and Alexander the Great died after

nominare (72) barba having bathed in a small

(228)
inf.

Alessandro
river of

(231)

fiume

Armenia. Armenia.

IMPEESONAL VERBS.
232. Impersonal verbs are, properly speaking, only conjugated
in the third

person singular

but in Italian, when followed by a

noun

in the plural^ they are

used in the third person plural.

subject.
:

In

this case they lose their characteristic of impersonal, as the

noun

them becomes their some of the most in use in Italian

that follows
Piove, it rains. Pioviggina, it drizzles.

The

following are

Accade, Avviene,

^ it

happens.

Basta, it is sufficient, enough. Albeggia, it dawns. Annotta, it grows dark. Balena, {

-.^^^^^^^^.^

Interviene, Pare, it appears. Si addice, it becomes. Fa di mestiere, "|

Conviene,

^it
it is

is

Nevica,

it

snows.

d'uopo.
Bisogna,
Disdice,
needful.
it is
it

necessary.

Grandina, it hails. Tuona, it thunders.

Gela, it freezes. Digela, it thaws.

unbecoming.

Sembra,

seems.

233.

The compound

tenses of impersonal verbs are furmed

it is
1

with essere, and the pronoun

generally not translated.

Ex.

E piovuto tutta la notte, It has rained all night. It has happened it has snowed. accaduto ; nevicato, 234. The English expressions one must, we must, are rendered
\

in Italian

following verb in the infinitive.

by the impersonal verbs conviene, bisogna, with the Ex.


12 fi
Jjisogaa.

IMPERSONAL VRRHS.
One must
forgive offeucea. played,

perdonare le offese, Adesso dieci siamo divertiti, convien lavorare,

Now

that

we have

wc must

work.

235. But

when

the subject, instead of one, we,

is

any other

word, the verb which follows conviene or bisogna must be in the

subjunctive, preceded

by

che,
opi-

Ex.
I

Bisogna ch'io
nione,

vi dica la

mia
i

must

teli

you

my

opinion.

Conviene che
sigli del

il

malato segua

con-

medico,

Quando

il contadino ha arato il campo, bisogna che lo semini se

vuol raccogliere.

patient must follow the doctor's advice. When the husbandman has ploughed his field, he must sow his grain if he wishes to reap.

236.

Some verbs
I

are conjugated impersonali^/ with the con-

junctive pronouns in the dative case.

Ex.
we
are sorry,
sorry.

Mi
Le

dispiace che,

am

sorry that.

Ci dispiace,

Ti dispiace,
Gli dispiace,
dispiace,

thou art sorry.

Vi dispiace,
Dispiace loro,

you are

he
she

is sorry. is sorry.

they are sorry.

Mi piacciono lepersone istruite, he piace molto la lettura dei classici

Italiani,

I like well-informed persons.

She

likes

very

much

to read

the

Italian classics.

Non

gli riuscito di

persuadermi,

He

Ci paruto troppo caro, Ahhisofjnano loro dei guanti. Mi abbisogna un paio di stivali.

has not succeeded in persuading me. We thought it too dear.

They want
I

gloves.
of boots.

want a pair

EXERCISE
It is not

LIII.

enough
(232)

to

speak correctly, one must also speak pru(234) anche

like this

dently.

How do you

town

It rains, thunders,

and

(232) (236) all at once. This dress becomes you very well. lightens, {al tempo stesso.) vestito (232) Do you think (that) it freezes now? It is necessary to study

{22,&) parere

sub. 1

(232)
classics.

mythology
mitologia

in

order

to

understand the

classico.
;

sufficient to love virtue

(232)

one must also practise f234^

it.

not You must

It
is

(235)


IMPERSONAL VERBS.
127
progress,

buy note-paper, pens, and

(15)
suffices

ink.

Despots abhor

and

it

for a

man

to

be the friend of truth and science, to

(232)

che

sub. 1

per

(draw down) the persecution of those enemies of humanity.

attirarsi

What

has

happened

to

you

Michelet's

style
stile

is

perhaps more

(182) (233) florid than is becoming

fiorito

(to) the severe character of historical

1

(107) (232) sub.

composition.

storico
for

It

happens often that we only wish

(232)
difficult to

a thing

be obtained. In the life of a man a (214) there are two cardinal points which insure his happiness or cardinale^ (177) assicurare his unhappiness his birth and his marriage it is not enough * * matrimonio (232)
because
it

appears

'

for birth to

che

be happy, marriage must be so too. sub, 1 la pure. (235)

di
inf.

They have not

yoke.

succeeded in freeing their country from a

(236)

foreign

'^straniero ^giogo.

OBSEEVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

237.

speaking^

The compound form, so much used in English, / am I was speaking^ is not admissible in Italian, and must
speak
io
I

be expressed with the simple tenses of the verb in the present

participle, io parlo, I
;

parlava, I spoke.

Ex.

Ella scrive al suo avvocato, To ricamava un fazzoletto,

She is writing to her lawyer. I was embroidering a handkerchief.

238.

When

the English

compound form expresses progression

still

or continuation,

and represents an action as

iiicomplete, the

auxiliary to be
venire^

may

be expressed in Italian by the verbs andare,

and

stare.

Andare and venire

are used with verbs that

128

OBSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

express motion and progression, but stare can only be used to

describe a progressive action denoting repose, rest.

Ex.
all

Andava errando
la foresta,

tutta la notte

per

He was
forest.

wandering

night in the

Ella stava disegnando,

Il fior che intatto io bando, Ariosto.

She was drawing.

ser-

mi venia

The

untouched

flower that I was preserving for myself.

239.

Venire* and andare

may be

used instead of essere in the

simple tenses of passive verbs, but in tbe

compound

tenses essere

must be used.

Ex.

Egli vien lodato. Egli stato lodato, not Egli venuto lodato, Il vero merito va congiunto colla
modestia,

He He

is

praised.

has been praised.

is

True worth
desty.

accompanied by mo-

240. Idioms formed with Essere

Essere in grado

di,

To bave
to

Essere Essere Essere Essere Essere

Essere Essere Essere Essere

a mal termine,
all'ordine.

un poco di u buono. uuono '\ in procinto lo di, per,

'

To To To

it in one's power, or be able. be in a critical position. be in readiness. be good for nothing.

To be on

the point

of.

Esse^e sul
in

punto di, ) buon concetto,

\
j"

To have
racter.

a good or bad cha-

in cattivo concetto,

a grado,
d'accordo.

To To

like, to feel inclined.

agree.
are not able to oppose a long

Non
Se vi

sono in grado di oiporre lunga

e

They
If

e seria resistenza.

a grado,

i^rendetelo,

and serious resistance. you like it, take it

EXERCISE LIV.
It is not

always in our power to extinguish our passions, but estinguere (240)

is

* In Italian, the verb venire

going where another person
lid Continente,
is,

used to translate

to go,

in

speaking

of

or of

Verr da voi questa sera, I will go

to see

accompanying those to whom we speak. you this evening Verremo con voi
;

We

will

go with you to the Continent.


OBSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.
129

The enemy M-as govern and regulate them. (238) (128) examining our fortress. He was on the point of publishing a pubblicare (240) doubling our capital. work. The interest that we receive is opera (238) raddoppiare
we can
irr.

(at least)

almeno

History proves
oblivion.

that philosophers have always been preceded

by poets and painters.

Mediocrity

filosofo

(239)
is

precedere

always punished with

were gathering flowers in the meadows, prato dimenticanza. (176) (237) cogliere others were making wreaths and nosegays for the approaching ghirlanda mazzetto vicino (237)
ball
;

Some

mediocrit (238)

all

were looking busy and happy. ' (237) sembrare attivo

end of the avenue.
viale

I will

go
(239*)

with

von

to the

was listening with great plea-

(238) sure to an amusing discussion while you were dancing. * dilettevole mentre
not in

It is

my

power

to

do you this favour.

All

nations and re-

(187) ligions agree in giving (to) music and poetry a place in Paraposto (240) art. inf.
dise.

(240)

Ossian has always been reputed the

Homer
Omero

of the

High-

lands.

241.

When

the preposition to precedes an infinitive, which

to

depends on the verbs

da.

have or

to be, it is

expressed by a or

Ex.
a.

Ho Ho

Non

fare qualche visita, parlarvi di affari, uomo da seguire esempio, .VoH c' tempo da perdere, , -A presumersi,
(la

I
il

bave have
is

to to

pay some visits. speak to you on business.

cattivo

not a man to follow bad esample. Tbcre is no time to lose. It is to be supposed.

He

130
242.

ODSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

When

the infinitive depending on essere

is

preceded by
expressed by

an
a.

adjective^ alone, or

accompanied by a noun,

to is

Ex.
It is

facile a credersi,
Questi fiori son belli a vedere, Quest'uva non buona a mangiare,

easy to be believed.
to look at.
to eat.

These flowers are beautiful These grapes are not good

to be

243.

When

the auxiliaries to have and

convey an idea of

obligation, they are often expressed

by dovere.

Ex.

Devo vedere il medico oggi, Dobbiamo scrivere delle lettere avanti

pranzo,

I
I

bave to see the doctor to-day. We have to write letters before

dinner.
I

Doveva andare in citt, Dovete pagare i vostri debiti,

was

to

go

to town.

You

are to pay your debts.

244. Idioms formed with Avere

:-

Avere a mente, a memoria, Avere a mano, or in pronto,

To remember. To have a thing

readiness.

at hand, or in

Aver

caro,

Averla con uno, Aver caldo, freddo.

Aver

cervello, giudizio,

To be happy. To be angry with a person. To be warm, cold. To act prudently, to be sensible.

Aver fretta, Aver fame, sete, sonno, Aver fama, voce di, Aver luogo. Aver l'intenzione, Aver male. Aver paura.
Avere piacere. Aversela per, or a male, Abbiatemi per iscusato,

Aver ragione. Aver torto. Aver voglia. Aver buona cera, Aver cattiva cera,

be afraid. be glad. take offence at. Pray excuse me. To be right. To be wrong.

To To To To To To To To To

be in a hurry. be hungry, thirsty, sleepy.

have the reputation of. take place. have a mind, to intend.

feel pain.

To To To

wish. look healthy. look unhealthy.

ORSERVATIONS ON ESSERE AND AVERE.

EXERCISE LV.

131

There are many diseases

is

difficult

to

cure, because their origin

not

known

malattia (of them).

to

(242) It is not to

be
(214)
are
1

denied that

(214)
tlie

co7ioscere

(138)

(241)
soil

inhabitants of a rich and fertile

(not) often in-

paese sub.
dolent.

You have nothing

fear from these

men.

Modera-

(203) (241)

(164)

tion is be to estremo (241) (214) It is to be deplored that genius has not always been blamed.

desired in all things, and extremes are to be

sub. 1

devoted to the service of truth. consacrare

Those who think

they are

(173) (244) always right are sure to be often in the wrong. I advise you consigliare (244) Do not be afraid (as a) friend to be more prudent in future.

(244) to censure at all times the profane

da

(244)
scoffer,

even although he

beffardo anche

should take offence at your reproof. rimprovero dovere sub. 2 (244) di

quando have a mind

if

to

(244)

go

to

in

Switzerland this year, and I would be very happy Svizzera (244)

you

accompanied
sub. 2

me

thither.

Our
;

Italian friends are always cold,

even when we are very warm.

are thirsty, some are sleepy

Some of
(176)
to

us

are hungry, some

(244)

we

are all in

want

of refreshment
ristoro

and

rest.

What cause
motivo

had you

be angry with
(244)

me ? Excuse
letters

me

if

I leave you,

but I have to post those impostare (243)

before

noon,

and I
have to
(243)

am
(244)

in a great hurry.

Satirists

and

mezzo giorno
historians

scrittore di satire

tell

the truth.

dire

132

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

The Infinitive Mood
expresses an action in an indefinito
to time

manner, without any reference

used substantively in Italian.
Parlare, cantare, II biscazzare fonte di grandi sventu7'e,

or person,

and

is

often

Ex.
To
|
'

Gambling
tune.

speak, to sing. is a source of great misfor-

The Indicative Mood simply

Ex.
JS^oi

expresses or affirms an action.

lavoriamo,

we work.

N'oi studiamo,

we

study.

The
245.

distinction

made

in using the imperfect

and the preterite

tenses requires particular attention.

1st,

remained

still

The Imperfect is used to express an action which Ex. unfinished when another took place.
1

Io vi scriveva quando voi entraste, E(fifa coronato quando era ancora

fanciullo,

He was crowned when

I

was writing to you when you entered. he was yet a

cliild.

2d,

To

denote that the action of which

we speak was

habitual

ox frequently repeated.
Metastasio soleva
dire,

Ex.
costa

"mi

meno di credere che di dubitare," Comparava Cicerone gli amici finti

alle le

rondini

Metastasio used to say, " It costs me less to believe than to doubt." Cicero used to compare false friends to swallows.
;

3d,

To

describe the qualities of persons or things

the state or

place in which they were in a time past, without defining the

period of
its

duration.

Ex.
Francis the First, King of France, loved glory, and had a chivalrous
spirit.

Francesco primo, lie di Francia, amava la r/loria, ed era di uno spirito cavalleresco.

La Regina
crudele,

ma

Elisabetta era vana e possedeva pure delle

Queen Elizabeth was vain and

lities.

cruel,

but she also possessed great qua-

grandi qualit,

246.

The Preterite

is

used in speaking of a past action, com-

pleted at a period quite past, and of which no part remains unexpired, so that this tense cannot be used in speaking of to-darj^
this

week,

this

year.

Ex.


ON MOODS AND TENSES.
Perdettero nella loro giovent
tori,

133
their

i geni-

Thcy

lost

parents

in

tlieir

youth.
e uccise

Romolo fond Roma,

fratello,

suo

Romulus founded Eome, and

his brother.

killed

Licurgo

fece

uno

stato che

amo pia

di ottocento anni,

Lycurgus established a state which lasted more than 800 years.

is

247.

The Past
Ex.
dimorato

or

Preterite Indefinite

used in speaking

of & past action, without determining the time in

which

it

hap-

pened.

Abbiamo

un

anno

in

We

have resided a year in Bohemia.

a rare collection of

Mi

Boemia, ha mostrato una rara

di farfalle,

collezione

He showed me
butterflies.

It

is

also used

when

the action has taken place in a period of

time not

coriipletely elapsed.

Ex.
I

Io ho avuto un abboccamento questa mattina col console.

had an interview

this

morning

v.-ith

Abbiamo pranzato
solito.

oggi

prima

del

We

the consul. dined to-day earlier than usual.

EXERCISE LVI.

When we

lived near the sea,

we bathed every

day.

Ferdi-

(245)

nand and Isabella reigned

lumbus discovered

in

(231) Spain at the time that Co-

(245) (28) Ispagna America. The Jews

left

Egypt under

scoprire (246)
the guidance of Moses. condotta Mos
whilst I

Egitto Ebreo (27) I visited the tomb of Virgil last year

was

at Naples.

The

Greeks, in perception of the

mentre
beautiful, not

sensibilit (51) only equalled but excelled all the nations of solo eguagliare sorpassare

antiquity.

Newton was born

nascere

the same day that Galileo died,

irr.

antichit

as

if

come two great minds.

nature did not wish to have any interval between these sub. 2 framezzo

To censure
(34)

is

easy, the difficulty lies in doing

stare

inf.

134

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

is

that hope better. I read to-day Plato's remark, Platone osservazione (247)

our dream sogno

when we

are awake.
sveglio

Louis

xv. was entering his carriage in in carrozza (245)

the court of the

corte

palace of Versailles

when Damiens
(246)
like a law-suit,

at-

tempted
tentare

to

assassinate

him.

War

is

which

processo

win. The court of Louis ruins even those who rovinare pure (173) (175) guadagnare the Fourteenth was most brilliant, and in accordance with the

(91)
taste of that

(115) brillante

armonia
in all

monarch, who loved glory and magnificence

gusto
things,

and surrounded himself with the greatest men of the

circondare
di

(H^)

age.

tempo

The Future
Noi andremo alla

represents an action as yet to come.

I will call on

Ex,

Io passer da voi domani,

caccia delle heccacce verso la fine del mese,

you to-morrow. We ai-e going to shoot woodcock at the end of the month.

248. In English, ihe present of the indicative,

when preceded

by such words
used to express
be employed.

as
ti

when, quando
future action
;

if,

se ; as soon as, tosto che, is

but in Italian the future must

Ex.
il

Quando

verrete, sarete
al

hen venuto,

When

you come, you

shall be wel-

come.

Se tu crederai

mio

consiglio, tu

non

uscirai oggi,

Tosto che la posta arriver, andremo a domandare se vi son lettere per

noi.

If you take my advice, you will not go out to-day. As soon as the post arrives, we will go and ask if there are letters for

The Conditional
Ex.
Vi

expresses an action subject to a condition.

scriverei pia spesso se

non fossi

would write

to

you oftcncr

if I

were

tanto occupato,

not so busy.

ON MOODS
249. The

A.ND TENSES.

135

future and the conditional are also employed in

Italian to express douht^ uncertainty^ surprise.

Ex.

E sar vero ?
A\rk forse
Sarebbe
il

Can

sue ragioni, medico tornato ?

le

it be true ? has perbaps bis reasons. Has tbe doctor returned ?

He

250.

The Imperative Mood commands,

first
is

exhorts, entreats,

and
it is

permits; the imperative has no

the second person singular

person singular, and

when

accompanied by a negative,
infinitive.

rendered in Italian by the present of the

Ex.
the alphabet.

Non

ini seccare,

Do

not tboii trouble me.

little sister

Insegna alla tua sorellina Valfaheto,

Teach thy
LVII.

EXERCISE
I will

send you some partridge and some woodcock if I pernice p. (55) beccaccia]). kill any. When I have finished this drawing, I will go to disegno (248) (138) (248) the (post-ofiice). Do not (thou) awake me before seven o'clock. posta (250) (95)

As

soon as they arrive

let

me

know

(it).

If you

come

(248) fare (127) sapere (248) to-morrow to breakfast with us, I will show you a picture that noi quadro

my

cousin has sent

me

from Italy.
di
"

Perhaps he
Forse
irr.

fears to dis-

please (to) his brother.

He has

(249)

perhaps resolved to leave this

country on account of his health. a cagione

If

had
sub. 2

time, I

would go
to

with you.

I will let

you know as soon as we have decided

sapere

fare

(248)
to do,

irr.

do

it.

All that you

undertake
intraprendere

do

it

well.

The Subjunctive

is

the

mood

of uncertainty,

and

is

always
it

preceded by another verb, expressed or understood, to which is subordinate.

136
251.

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

The
Ex.

subjunctive

is

used after any verb exj)ressiiig doubt,

fear, wonder, wish, hope, surprise, admiration,

sent.

command,

or con-

Sembra che non

siate contento,
il

Comand

che attaccassero

nemico,

Egli si maraviglia che gli uomini possano seguire il vizio, che sempre porta seco danno e sventura, Spero che ora siano convinti ?

appears you are not satisfied. ordered that they should attack the enemy. He wonders that men can follow vice, which always brings misforIt

He

tune and suffering.

I hope they are convinced now ? Because the wicked man sometimes prospers, do not imagine that he
is

Bench

lo

scellerato qualche volta

prosperi,

non 'immaginate pero

che sia felice.

happy.

Permetto che voi andiate, Desiderate che io vada ?

I allow

you

to go.

Do you

desire

me

to

go

252. After an action in the superlative relative

solo,

also after
;

il

the only
;

il

primo, the

first

l'ultimo,

the last

chiunque,

whoever

qualunque, whatever.

Ex.
Edinburgh is the most beautiful town I bave ever seen. The example of an exemplary life is
the best lesson we can give to our fellow-men. is the only thing which does not change with time.
grief,

Edimiurgo la pi bella citta ch'io abbia mai veduta, L'esempio di una vita esemplare,
posaa dare ai nostri simili, verit la sola cosa che non si alteri col tempo, Parlate, chiunque voi siate, Qualunque sia il vostro dolore, il
la miglior lezione che si

La

Truth

Speak, whoever you are.

Whatever may be your

will cure
se,
if,
it.

time

tempo

lo

guarir,

253. After the conjunction

the subjunctive

whether, the imperfect of

must be used, when the sentence implies doubt, condition. Ex. Oh, if I had my pen in my mouth Oh, se io avessi la mia penna in
bocca ! esclamo

un poeta

il

quale

exclaimed a poet

who stammered.

tartagliava. Se Vira non vi accecasse, Egli parlo come se dubitasse della vostra sincerit.

If passion did not blind you.

He

spoke as

if

he doubted your

sin-

cerity.

254.

The

subjunctive

is

required after quando, ove, dove,

when
use

these words are used instead of se.

Ex.
If you do not object, I will of your name. If you wish it.

Quando non
r)

Ove

27

vi dispiaccia, io del vostro nome. vogliate,

mi var-

make

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

255.

137
a noun having a

When

the relative pronoun

it,

refers to

negative before

the verb following must be in the subjunctive.

Ex.
Non
conosco alcuno che sia pi orgoglioso di lui, c' donna che sia piU cortese di lei,
I

know nobody who

than he.
is

is

more proud
kind

Non

There

not a

woman more

than she.

256.

The

subjunctive

is

used after various corijunctions and

;

adverbs, which imply condition or uncertainty

tunque., bench.,

such as quan;

although
;

purch., provided that

finche., until

accioche, in order that

others.

quand'anche, even although, and several

Quantunque and bench also govern the indicative when the idea expressed is positive, and in no way doubtful. Ex.
ella sia la

Bench

pi potente regina

della terra,

Quantunque

io

abbia sperimentata

Although she is the most powerful queen in the world. Although I have many times experienced his generosity.

molte volte la sua generosit, Purcl non vi scordiate, Finch non abbiate jrrove pi certe, Quand'anche no7i riusciste, Bench non furto il mio. Tasso.

Provided you do not forget. Until you have surer proofs.

Even

if you did not succeed. iVlthough the theft is nut mine.

EXERCISE

LVIII.

The

first

who
a

discovered the circulation of the blood was

(252)
Cesalpino,

Tuscan, although Harvey, an Englishman, was

(256)
the discovery (of
state she
it).

(38) Toscano
the
first

who proclaimed

If Italy

were

(252) united and

proclamare free, what a powerful

(183)

(138)

(253)
be.

would

It appears

(251)
if

that all nations like to boast of a glorious origin, and even

amare

(231)

ac7;e(254)
boldly invoke arditamente

history does not confirm their pretensions, they

fable.

favola.

should live with our friends as if come{25') " they were to become our enemies ;" but Aristotle says, we dovere * divenire Aristotele

Biante said, "

we

{dovremmo)

138

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

if

should treat our enemies as

they were to become our friends."

in

Aspire
Aspirare
fate

to perfection,

whatever may be the position

which
o,

has placed you.

irr.

fato

(252) The only power which can support potere (252)

monarch
influence

is

the love of his subjects.

The

last person

who

could

my

decision.

(252) Constantinople, seen from the sea, pre-

suddito

sents the most enchanting

view

that I have ever seen.

incantevole [colpo d'occhio)

Forgive in order that you may

all

(256) good, they would

all

(252) mai If men were be forgiven. potere irr. (253) be happy. I have found nobody who

(202)

can teach
(255)
irr.

me

Chinese.
Chinese.

257. According to the idea conveyed by the

verb, the subordinate verb

first

or governing

may

be used either in the indicative

is

or the subjunctive.

When

certainty

expressed, the indicative

is

may be employed
when

on the contrary, the subjunctive

is

required

uncertainty or doult

denoted.

Ex.

Credo che V anima immortale, Credo che sia ancora a Parigi,

I believe that the soul is immortal. T think he is still in Paris.

I I

So che

Non

giunto in citt, so se sia in /scozia,

know he

is

come
if

to town.
is

do not know

ho

in Scotland.

258.

The future and

the conditional,

when preceded by an
replaced, the
first

expression denoting uncertainty,

may be

by

the present, and the second

by the imperfect

of the subjunctive.

Ex.
Temo
che non venga or verr jtrima
ri-

Noi sjyeravumo che

tornereste,

della fine del mese. ritornaste or

I fear he will not of the month.

come

till

the end

We
is

hoped that you would return.

often

259. In Italian, the subjunctive

the infinitive.

employed

in place of

Ex.

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

Dite al cameriere che mi svegli or di svegliarmi di buon ora, lo preghiate, or di pregarlo,

139
awake me
him.
earlj.

Tell the servant to

E inutile che
260.

It is useless to entreat

The English

expressions, were
first

I to, had

/,

&c., are ren-

dered in Italian, the

by

se,

with the following verb in the

imperfect of the subjunctive, the second by se avessi, &c.

Se noi vi pregassimo, Se eglino studiassero, Se egli avesse avuto ])rudenza, la Se voi ne aveste parlato,

Ex.

Were we to entreat you. Were they to study. Had he had prudence.

Had you

spoken of

it.

261.

The

tense in which the subjunctive should be used,

it

is

determined by the preceding verb on which

junctive
Voglio che

depends.

After

the present and future of the indicative, the jyresent of the subis

generally used.
lo diate, lo meritiate.

Ex.
wish you to give it to me. I will praise you, provided
I

me

Vi loder purch

you de-

serve

it.

After the imperfect, preterite, or conditional,

we use

the im;

perfect of the subjunctive to express a present or future action

but we use the pluperfect to denote the past.

Voleva cKio gli dicessi, Sperava che voi riusciste, Avrei voluto che voi foste venuto la
settimana, scorsa,

Ex.
tell

He

wished I would

him.

I hoped you would have succeeded. I would have liked you had come
last

week.

EXERCISE LIX.
It is

(214)

supposed that the city of Venice owes irr. Venezia irr.

its

origin to the

incursions of the barbarians, which forced the inhabitants of Padua,

barbaro and of the neighbouring towns,

circonvicino

Padova
to take refuge

amongst some {a refugiarsi) fra rocks and islands of the Adriatic, where they might live in
Adriatico

scoglio
safety.

potere
is

believe

that virtue

preferable

to

wealth,
ricchezza

sicurezza

although
(256)

men do

not act as if agire (253)

(257) they thought

so.

He ordered
(261)

cos

140

OM MOODS AND TENSES.

US not to leave the house.

I would not

hesitate to write
esitare

if

(259)

knew
sapere

their address.

You would
less

(253)

forget the offence if you really

indirizzo

forgave him.

The Indians who

Indiano

he

exists.

Were

you

worship no God believe that adorare (202) (257) rash, you would commit fewer
you, I would not have intrusted
confidare

blunders.

Had
(260)

(260)

precipitoso
I not

known

(57) sbaglio
to

you

this secret.

The Present Participle ends

tion,

in

and

in

endo

for the other two,

I

undo for the first conjugaand is invariable. Ex.

I

Cantando, singing. Cominciando, beginning.

Credendo, believing. Cadendo, felling.

Udendo, hearing. Sentendo, feeling.

262.

When

the English present participle

translated in Italian

preposition^

it is

compound
after
;

of the infinitive if
for.

is preceded by a by the infinitive^ and by the preceded by the prepositions dopo^

per*

Ex.
To judge without knowing
sumption. After walking two bours,
is

II giudicare senza conoscere presunzione, Dopo aver passeggiato per due ore,
ci

pre-

we

rested.

riposammo.
avere agito

Furono promossi per

cosi valorosamente.

They were promoted

bravely.
o?i,

for acting so

263. After the prepositions m,

or hy, the present participle

may

either be translated literally, the preposition being omitted,

or be expressed by the infinitive^ preceded

in, C071, a, al.

by the prepositions more commonly accompanied by the article nel, col,

Ex.

* The participle whicb follows ^er

infinitive,

is

translated

only

when a past
:

action

is

expressed, and the

may

be used in English

Era
so.

lodato

per averlo

fatto,

by the compound of the compound participle he was praised for

iloJug, or for

having done

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

Quavio tempo
si

141
time one loses in paying

perde facendo or

How much
visits
!

nel far visite, All'udire il canto delV usignolo, Vi e pi piacere nel donare che nel
ricevere,

On

Omero parlando or nel parlar mare, lo chiama un fiume,

264.
is

del

hearing the nightingale's song. is more pleasure in giving than in receiving. In speaking of the sea, Homer calls it a river.

There

The present participle, when used

infinitive

as a

noun

in English,

expressed in Italian by the

nel dcimoquinto secolo, sorgere ed il tramontar del sole, suo cantare or canto dolce,

with the

definite article,

by a noun. Ex. La stampa yi< inventata

or
Il Il

Printing was invented in the fifteenth century. The rising and setting of the sun. Her singing is sweet.

265.

When,

in English, a present participle is

it

governed

in the

accusative
finitive.

by another verb, Ex.

is

translated in Italian

by the

in-

Sento cantare nelValtra stanza, Li vedo venire, Vedemmo i cacciatori galoppare nei camjn,

I hear singing in the other room. I see them coming. saw the huntsmen galloping in the fields.

We

266.

When
that,

the English present particijAe can also be ex-

pressed by the indicative or subjunctive

mood with

or without the
is

pronoun
able.

who, which, in Italian this second manner

prefer-

Ex.
The dog
mine.
harking, or which barics,
is

II cane che abhaia mio,

La

signora che siede presso alla finestra e ricama, la fidanzata

di mio cugino,

The lady sitting, or wJio sits, at the window embroidering, or who

embroiders,
trothed.
is

my

cousin's

ho-

267.
sive

The present participle, preceded

is

in

English by
infinitive
is

a.

posses-

pronoun,

rendered in Italian by the

preceded by

the article, and the English possessive pronoun

s.

changed into

personal pronoun in the nominative, which

is

placed after the

infinitive.
II

Ex.
egli

non aver

parlato dispiacque

His not having spoken displeased

the meeting.

alV assemblea,

Lo

scriverci ella cos spesso ci

fa

Her writing
pleasure.

so often gives us

much
to the

molto piacere, L'andar voi ogni sera al teatro ci fa

dispiacere,

Tour going every evening

theatre displeases us.


142
268.
the

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

When
to

\q
is

participle present

is

used as an adjective, the

it is

termination do

noun

changed into te, and which it relates. Ex.

generally placed after

11 viso ridente,

I Negri hanno occJd brillanti, Ho le mani tremanti,

Una
stella

The laughing face. Negroes have sparkling eyes. My hands are trembling.

cadente,

A falling
The

star.

La

luna sorgente,

rising

moon.

EXERCISE LX.

The

sailors, foreseeing the

squall,

returned to the harbour.

in * porto " Are there no children in Athens?" said a Spartan, on seeing fanciullo (263) The Druids chose the misletoe an Athenian caressing a dog.

prevedere

burrasca

Ateniese

(265)

of the oak, (on account of) misletoe

Druido growing

irr.

vischio

so rarely

on that

appunto perch
tree.

In

teaching, one learns.

Apelles

(263) grapes so naturally, that birds, on seeing (263)

(266) painted a cluster of grappolo Apelle

it,

flew round it, volare attorno (135)

tlie

pecking at the painted

beccare
solere

fruit.

Formerly

Doge

of Venice

granello p.

used to perform the ceremony of espousing the Adriatic, by con (262) ^ throwing a ring into it. Your coming so often displeases him.

(263)

(135)

(267)

Aristotle teaches, that the

more an animated being

is

perfect, the

more he

is

essere (111) Before capable of feeling pleasure and pain.

men

(262)

Avanti che

possessed the art of writing, all deeds worthy of being preserved sub. 2 (604) (264)

were transmitted tramandare

to posterity in verse.

was dismissed
licenziare

for

disobeying (to) his orders. (262*) padrone

A weeping willow. He (268) master's My having

salcio.

(267)

ON MOODS AND TENSES.

rewarded bim,
is

143

a proof of

my

being satisfied witb bis conduct. (267) contento di

269.

auxiliary, agrees in gender

it relates.

Tbe Past Participle, used adjectively witbout any and number witb tbe word to wbicb
Ex.
Tbe winter spent in Greece. The withered flowers. The battles gained by the Turks
the past war.
lidio,

L'iiiverno passato in Grecia,

fiori appassiti, Le battaglie vinte dai

Turchi nella

in

passata guerra,

Vedemmo due signore vestite a

270.
in

We saw two ladies dressed in mourn-

The past participle^ preceded by tbe verb essere, agrees gender and number witb tbe nominative of tbe auxiliary. Ex.
ma
gli

Ugli era rispettato, erano disprezzati,

altri
ferita,

He was

respected, but the others

slightly

were despised.

Una
e

signora

fu

leggermente

One lady was

wounded, and

due

altre furono uccise,

two others were

killed.

271.

Wben

i\xQ

past participle follows tbe verb avere,

it

may
;

agree witb tbe object of tbe pbrase, or remain invariable

usually agrees

it

wben

it

wben placed
Le
Io ho impostato date,

before.

comes after tbe Ex.

I

object,

and

is

invariable

lettere che avete impostate,

le lettere

che

mi avete
I

The letters you have posted. 1 have posted the letters you have
given me.
is

272.

Wben
it

nouns

lo, la,

pbrase,

preceded by any of tbe proemployed as tbe objective of tbe must agree witb tbem, to avoid ambiguity. Ex.
tbe past participle
le,
li,

mi,

ti,

ci, vi,

Llio trovato a casa, Ella disse : Mi avete conosciuta fin

doli infanzia. Li ho veduti, or
le

found him at home. You have known She said

:

mo

from

childhood.

ho vedute pasle

saw them walking together.

fine

seggiare insieme,

Che

belle trote;

dove

avete pescate?

What

trout;
?

where have you

caught them

273.

Tbe

past participle
its

of

intransitive verbs,

conjugated

witb avere, never varies

termination, as tbis class of verbs

have no

object.

Ex.

114

ON MOODS AM)
I

TI'-NSES.

Egli or ella lia passeggiato, ErjUno or elleno hanno dormito, gli or ella ha tossito,

He
He

or she has walked.

slept.

They have
|

or she has coughed.

274.
essere,

The

present participle

of the

auxiliaries

avere

and

may sometimes

be omitted in Italian before the past par-

ticiple, in locutions

introduced as incidental propositions.

Ex.

Gli alleati, sconfitti i lrissi all'Alma, andarono ad assediare Sebastopoli,

The

allies

having defeated the Eus-

sians at the

Alma, went

to besiege

Sebastopol.

E cos detto,
lo bacio,

appressatolo alla bocca,

B.

Scritta la lettera, se ne parti.

Ilaving said so, and having raised it to her lips, she kissed it. The letter being written, he went away.
che,

275.

The past participle

is

used before the word

after, or as

having,

meaning of when, Ex. ing a compound tense.

in such case, the
Inteso che n'ebbe
il

soon

as, preced-

motivo, egli ci

Doma che fa la potenza de' nobili, e finita che fa la guerra clV Arcivescovo, Uav. S. Pervenuto che/w il re ai confini della %, Day. S.

As

he had heard the motive, ho forgave us. soon as the power of the nobles was overcome, and the war with the archbishop was finished. After the king had arrived at the confines of Spain.

When

EXERCISE LXI.

Having exposed himself

in

to the

enemy's

fire,

he was wounded
is

(274) both arms.

The

Greeks were persuaded that the soul

irr.

(209) immortal.

Cicero was assassinated by Popilius Lena, whose

Popilio

life

(180) (262)

he had
killed

formerly
altra volta
his
irr.

saved

when

the latter was accused of having

own

father.

Demetrius, on being informed that

Demetrio
his
statues,

(163)

uccidere

the Athenians

had overturned
atterrare

(274) remarked, " They osservare

have not overturned the virtues which have erected

erigere
irr.

them

to

ON MOODS AND TENSES,

me,"

145

on hearing that the Athenians had conirr. (263) (127) demned him to death, " Nature has condemned them also to
said,

Socrates

death,"

How
slept

(272)

(122)
clothes have
vestito

much

attention

and

civility

fine

(74)
(not) often

gained us procurare
since

We have

often laughed at that story.

She has

(273)

irr,

the doctor has seen her. dottore dache (272)

left

having seen the town,

(274)

partire
polite
civile

with the night train. sera treno

Our The

friends,

postilion

having made us a
(274)

bow,

declined accompanying us, as

it

inchino ricusare

(265)

was a

holiday,

giorno di festa.

WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY.

276.

When
;

will,

woidd,

shall, shoidd, can, could,

may, might,

are used in English as auxiliaries, they are not translated in

Italian

but when they are used as separate verbs, they are ex-

pressed

by
I

Volere, Dovere, Potere,

Voi dovreste pagare i vostri debiti, Egli mi deve ancora una bagattella, Non possiamo sempre procurarci il jnacere, e non possiamo sempre
evitare
il

To will, to be willing. To be obliged, must,* ought, to owe. To be able, to have the jiower, can.
You

He

We

should pay your debts. me still a trifle. cannot always obtain pL and we cannot always avoid

owes

dolore,
lo

Posso sperare che voi

derete ?

raccoman-

May

I hope you will

recommend

him?
lire,

Vi dobbiamo cento

"We owe you a hundred pounds.

277, Dovere
or prohahility.

is

frequently used in a sense signifying likelihood

Ex.
in the sense of to
libri

* Must, when used

bisogno di; as,
to study

Abbiamo bisogno di

have need of, is rendered by aver per studiare, we must have books

146
Egli deve venire oggi,

WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY.

Fu
La

giudicato dal

Re

dover essere
S.

He is expected to come to-tlay. He was judged by the king lilcely

he an excellent minister.

to

eccellente ministro,

Dav.

Regina Caterina, che chiara^

Queen Catherine, who

so

clearly

knew
one

mente conosceva tanta animosit AoxBTt un giorno produrre qualche gran male, Dav. S.

much animosity
to produce

to he likely

day

some great

evil.

278. Whenever, in English, the verb will^ followed by the

auxiliary have,
to choose,
is

used with the signification of

to like, to wish,

and may be replaced by these verbs, the simple verb

;

volere

is

used in Italian

but when the sense of the phrase does

not admit of this construction in English, the auxiliary have

must be translated
Volete una pera ?
Volete un higlietto per

in Italian.

Ex.
Will you have, or d Wee, pear ? Will you have, or do you wish, a
ticket for the concert ? I will not have, or I do not wish for, any fruit to-day.

il

concerto ?

Non

wogVio frutta oggi,

Volete avere la hotit di gnarla a casa ?

Will you have the kindness to see her home ?

toill

In the last example,

to wish, to like,

have cannot be replaced by the verbs

is

and the auxiliary have

will have,

translated.

would have, is often followed by another verb in the infinitive, preceded by a noun in the objective, but in Italian it is rendered by volere, and the verb which follows volere must be in the subjunctive, preceded by che, and the noun in the objective becomes the nominative of the second verb. Ex. Will you have me go alone ? Volete ch'io vada solo ? "\\'Tiat will you have me say ? Che volete ch'io dica ? Vorrebbe che lavorassero tutto il He would have them work all day.
279.
.

The English form

giorno,

280. Volere, dovere, potere, as well as fare, to

cause, to let
;

make

or
;

lasciare, to
;

let or

allow

intendere, to hear
;

sapere, to
habit
;

know

sentire, to feel or hear

;

solere, to be in the

udire, to hear

when

followed by an infinitive, do not

require any preposition after them.

Vollero visitare
le

Ex.
to visit the chief towns

principali citt

They wished
of Europe.

d^Europa,


WILL, SHALL, CAN, MAY.
Dohl'amo moderare
dera,
Potete venire
i

147

nostri desi-

We

must

restrain our wislies.

is

quando vifar comodo,

You may come when it

to 3'ou.

convenient

EXERCISE

LXII.

We
ref.

as should encourage the Beautiful, poich Bello (276)

itself.

the

Useful enUtile

courages
divide

Sentiments
(25)

join

man

to

man, opinions

{da se

stesso)

unire

them

the friendships of youth are founded on sentiment,

the dissensions of age

spring
risultare

from opinions

if

we

could

(253)

when we are young, on this we might, in {mentre siamo ancor giovani) potere a (168) forming our own opinions, acquire a liberal view of those of ^ ^ acquistare (263) others, and we would endeavour to unite by sentiment, cercare per mezzo di
reflect

(167) we cannot do alone,

eva

what opinion has divided and embittered. amareggiare

Many things
to

(that)

may

be

easily achieved with the assisteffettuare

noi

ance of others.

(to) his superiors.

A (201)

(276) (214)

soldier

must accustom himself

(276)
to

obey blindly

(276*)

must have money danaro

pay what I owe.

irr.

Will you have a pen or a pencil ? I will have neither. Would lapis (278) (210) (279) you have me blame him unjustly ? Will you have the biasimare (251) (278)

kindness to read these verses

to

aloud ?

The Queen
(173)

is

expected
(277)

{ad alta voce)

arrive in Scotland this week.

Those who cannot

portare

(280)
the

bonds of vice at a blow, will probably

tratto

break (175) rompere bear them for

(57) laccio
ever.

Id8

IDIOMS AND KEMAllKS ON VERBS.

IDIOMS

AND REMAEKS ON
FIRST CONJUGATION.

VERBS.

281. Verbs ending in care and gare take the letter h before
the vowels e or
z.

Ex.
pecchi,

Peccare,

pecco,
I sin,

To

sin,

thou sinnest,

pecca, he sins,

pecchiamo, &c.

we we
:

sin.

Pagare,

pago,
I pay,

To

pay,

paghi, paga, thou payest, he pays,

paghiamo, &c.
pay.

282. Idioms formed with the verb Andare

Andare a piede, Andare in legno, in carrozza. Andare a cavallo. Andare a vele gonfie. Andar dietro a, Andare a male, Andare a marito. Andare a vuoto, Andare in estasi. Andare in collera, Andare in mal ora, Andare alla lunga, Andare
alle corte.

To walk, to go on foot. To drive. To ride. To prosper. To follow. To decay, to decline in health. To get a husband. To fail. To fall into ecstasies. To get into a passion. To go to ruin. To last a long time, to go on
slowly.

To end

quickly, to

come

to a

decision.

Andare altiero. Andare a genio. Andare a fondo. Andar per la mente.

Andar Andar

di male in peggio.
di bene in meglio,

To be proud, haughty. To like. To sink. To cross one's mind. To get worse and worse. To get better and better.
In the long-run, in the end.

lungo andare,

exercise
(Old people) like
(57)
vecchio

lxiii.

what
(167)

is

useful,

(young people) follow giovane (282)

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

all

149

that

glitters,

and think

little

of the end.

These flowers
state of

(169)

risplendere

a
of light
luce

are decaying for

(282) (282)
improves, and
occupies.

want mancanza

and

air.

The

fine.

Naples

gets worse and worse every day,

while Sardinia steadily mentre che Sardegna

may

well be proud of the position (that) she

are

now

In the long-run,
meritar fede

liars

hugiardo
as they (are not believed)

even when anche

to be pitied, (241) (214) compiangere they tell the truth. The

Indians got into ecstasies

when

the sailors offered

them some
they often

beads and spangles. perla

Law-suits
processo

last so long, (that)

ruin (the gainer as well as the loser.)

chi vince e chi

From the

shore

we saw

the vessel sink.

People who
(173)

perde
get easily into a passion should
reason,

never
the

argue, as passion blinds disputare accecare

first

and so deprives us of
togliere

weapon

requisite

for

an argument.
affairs are

I do not like

principale (61)
to ask favours

necessario

from strangers.

Our

going on prospcris

ously.

All

a
their

plans

have

failed,

and

their position

get-

prorjetto

ting worse and worse.

Every crime
crosses

begins with a

criminal
^delittuoso

thought, which
^

at first

stealthily

the mind, and often

da prima
its

alia sfuggita

returns to tempt

victim,

who in

the end follows

its

promptings,
instigazione

and

blindly

goes to ruin.

ciecamente

150

IDIOMS AND REMARKS

Dare,

to give.
to,

283. Addarsi^ to perceive, to addict one's-self

to give again, are conjugated like dare.

and ridare^

Dare means
vha
egli fatto ?

also to strike.
che

Ex.
I

Fercli date a cotesto ragazzo f

Why
:

do you strike the boy ? what has hb done to you ?

284. Idioms formed avith

Dare

Darsela a gambe,

Dare addosso ad

uno,
a,

Dar

nella rete,
or V animo

Dare il cuore, Mi da V animo

To run away, to take To fall foul of one. To fall into a snare. To have the heart.
I do not fear to do.

flight.

di fare,
a.

Dar fede
Dare ad

a.

intendere
a,

Dar
Dar

del tu
del lei

To believe. To make believe. To address one in

To

a,

Dar
Dare

del voi a,
alla luce,

Darsi a fare.

Dar

nel rosso, &c.,

di,

Darsi pensiero

Dar del furfante a. Dar -parola. Dar la burla, la baia,

ad uno. Dar in prestito. Dar fuoco, Dar la caccia a, Dar principio, ox fine Dar conto.
Darsi
allo studio.

the 2d person singular. address one in the 3d person feminine singular. To address one in the 2d person plural. To bring forth, to publish. To begin to do somethin*. To border on red. To take to heart. To call one a rascal.

To promi
la

quadra To make game of one.

a,

Dar di naso da per Darsi bel tempo. Darsi pace di, Darsi briga.
Dar
la colpa

tutto,

ad

uno.

To lend. To set on fire. To give chase to. To begin, or to finish. To account for. To apply one's-self to study. To meddle in everything. To enjoy one's-self. To console, reconcile one's-self. To give one's-self much trouble. To throw the blame on one.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

151
lieed.

Dar

retta a,

Dar mano a. Dar una mano Dar luogo a,

a,

To To To To

mind, to listen, to begin to do.

help.

occasion, to give rise to.

EXERCISE LXIV.

The

first

person
Cassar.

who was

addressed in the 2d person plura.

was Julius

The

(214)

(284)
in

custom of addressing one

the od

Giulio Cesare

(61) costume.

person feminine
Spaniards.

singular,

was introduced
irr.

into
in

Italy

by the

War gives
us
to

Spagnuolo
our
cavalry
cavalleria

rise to strange laws and customs. When strano (284) advanced, the Russians took flight, They have

(284)
mobilia
first

promised

change the furniture of our parlour.

salotto

From

(284) (123) the time of our

{Fin da)

parents, every

the blame on his neighbour.

vicino

Epicureans lived to enjoy Epicureo per (284) hair themselves, and never took anything to heart. The of capello p. (284) Titian's beauties often borders more on red than on fair. Tiziano hello L biondo (105) (284) Erostratus set fire to the Temple of Diana, in order to imErostrato (284) Tempio (18G)

The

criminal is ready to throw delinquente j^ronto (284)

mortalize

those who (speak ill) of sparlare (284) (165) every one, and do not believe those who always speak well of
his

name.

Do

not heed

(194)
themselves.

his law-suit.
lite

have not "To

I

(284)
the heart to
tell

him

that he has lost

(284)

sell

glow-worms
lucciola

for

lamps," lanterna
is,

is

a pretty
try

Italian proverb, of

which the
(178)

meaning
significazione

that people

(72)

(213)

volere

152
to

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

make

us believe something whicli has not happened,

(280) (284)

(233)

Fare,
285,
suit
;

to

make,

to do.
;

The

derivatives, as assuefare, to accustom

confare, to

disfare, to

undo

soddisfare,

to

satisfy

contraffare, to

imitate, to forge, are conjugated in the

same manner asfare.

286. Idioms formed

with Fare:

encourage.

Farsi animo,

Far animo.
Far
capolino,

Far all'amore Far alto. Far pompa,

con.

Fare il grugno. Sul far del giorno, Sul far della notte,

To take courage. To give courage, To peep in. To make love to. To halt. To boast. To sulk.
At At

the break of day.

the close of evening.

Far

di mestieri.

Farsi innanzi, Farsi in qua, Farsi in l, indietro,

Far brindisi. Fare la spia.

Fare il sarto, il calzolaio, &c. Fare una visita. Fare una passeggiata, Fare ini bagno,

Far bel tempo. Far cattivo tempo. Far freddo, caldo, umido, Far colazione, Far merenda, Far vista di, Far mostra d. Far piacere a. Far le veci di, Far naufragio^ Far vela.

To be necessary. To advance. To draw near. To draw back. To drink a toast. To be a spy. To be a tailor, shoemaker. To pay a visit. To take a walk. To take a bath. To be fine. To bo bad weather. To be cold, warm, damp. To breakfast. To lunch. To pretend. To display. To please. To replace, to represent. To be wrecked. To set sail.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

153

Far
Fare

V orecchio
beffe di,

da mercante,

accoglienza,
attenzione,

Farsi

Fare

Far vedere, Far inale a, Far parola di. Far prova di coraggio,

To turn a deaf ear. To give a reception. To ridicule, to jeer. To pay attention, to be careful. To show. To hurt. To mention. To give proof of courage.

EXERCISE LXV.

Alexander
of

killed

his friend Clitus, for ridiculing the title

Alessandro Kccidereirr.

(286)

Son of Jupiter, which he assumed.

Giove

Never

turn a deaf ear to

good advice.
than to
(105)
die of

We

(286)
are often

more inclined
disposto

to ridicule misfortunes

consiglio

pity

them.

At Naples, a nobleman (would

nobile

a (286)

disgrazia
rather)

averjnetcl (138)

preferire

hunger

than

be

a merchant

at Venice, Florence,

[anzich] (286)

and Genoa, on the contrary, commerce can boast of many names a incontro mercatura (286) of the noblest lineage. Philosophy could never take the place

lignaggio
of Christianity.

We were
you.

filosofia

(286) ordered to halt at the close of the

(218) (286) evening, and to (set out again) at break of day.

ripartire

Be

(286)
careful or

they will

cheat

Do

(286) not mention (286)

(286)
(of) it to

any

one.

ingannare

chicchesia

On

the Continent, friends paid us often visits after dinner.

In
and

(286) the reign of Louis XII., people dined

(91)

when we

breakfast,

(213)

supped almost cenare quasi

courage,

when we

lunch.

Why do you hurt him Take

?

(286)

(286)
despair
is

(286)

(286)

my

friend,

unworthy of a Christian.
L

The

disperazione

154

IDIOMS

AND REMARKS ON VERBS

greatest part of the Spanish

Armada was wrecked on

naviglio

the Irish

(286)

coast.

Queen Henrietta
(33)

at first pretended to be very favourably

(286) misled every one, ingannare (194) displaying great moderation in her religious views.
disposed

towards

Protestants,

and

by

(286)

opinione

Stare,
287.

to

remain.

The

following verbs are conjugated like stare:

;

Distare,

to be distant

restare, to stop, to discontinue

soprastare or so-

vrastare employed with the signification to delay, to temporize,

and contrastare
stare
;

in the sense of to be against, are conjugated like

but when sovrastare means to threaten, to sway, and con-

trastare

means

to contest either

by word or

action, both of these

verbs follow the regular conjugation.

288. Idioms

formed with Stare

or unwell, to be well

Stare in piedi, Star bene, or male,

To stand. To be well,
off.

Sta lene. Star su, Stare a sentire, Stare a sedere, Star per. Star bene a cavallo. Star di casa.

He

is

well.

To get up. To listen. To be seated. To be on the To ride well. To reside.

point

of.

Come state di salute f Non mi state a dire.

Questo vestito non vi sta bene, Ci non sta bene. Stare alt erta, \ Star colV occhio alla penna, j alla cintola. Star colle mani
Stare a vedere^

How
Do
That

are you ?

tell me. This dress does not become you.

not

is

not right.
one's guard.
idle,

To be on
crossed.

To remain To

with

arms

wait, to do nothing.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

155

Star
il

in dubbio, or in forse,
si e il no,

fra To be

in doubt, wavering.

Star saldo, Stare in pace, d'accordo, Star fermo, quieto, Stare zitto, cheto, Star allegro, di buon animo, Lasciare stare, Sta a me, a voi, &c.,

To bold firm. To agree together. To be quiet. To be silent. To cheer up. To let alone, not to
It is
for

touch.
it
is

my
me,

turn, your turn,

for you.

EXERCISE LXVI.

Tasso was on the point of being crowned at Rome, but on inf. coronare a (288)
the eve of the day on which the solemnity was to take place he
vigilia

in

died.

We

(243)
all

(244)

remained standing

the time that

we were

in tlie

Queen's presence.

That

(288)
child cannot

a
be quiet half an hour.
(77)

(288)

The

inhabitants were in doubt whether they should open the

(288) (253) gates of the city to the victorious army of their enemies.

porta

vittorioso

Reason and imagination, says Pope, are

never agree,

like

two relations who parente

although intended to live together and to help one (288) quantunque fatto per another. I shall not stay to hear the end of the concert, as I a siccome (230)

am

not well.

(288)

soon feel well.

Are you better now Let me alone, and I will (288) The That Arab rides with grace and
?

ease.

Arabo
Turks remain
all

('288)

grazia

disinvoltura

day with their arms crossed, smoking and

(288) dreaming. People sognare

who

fumare want firmness are perpetually mancare di

in

166
doubt.

IDIOMS

AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

poorly to-day to be well off tostentatamente per

Misers
avaro

live

always

morrow.

Those who

listen to

what

their friends are saying, do

not always hear themselves praised.

inf.

site

the English ambassador's residence.

In Dresden we oppoDresda dirim A great misfortune

lived

(237)

petto a

ambasciatore

palazzo
reasons,
it is

sventura
for

threatens

us.You have heard my

Caisar

you

to

(287)
decide.

(288)

was

in

doubt

if

he should

cross

dovere sub. 2 attraversare

the Rubicon.

Rubicone

SECOND CONJUGATION.
289. All words that have the diphthong mo, drop the u when
the tonic accent
falls

on the syllable that follows the diphthong.

Cucere, Cocva, cocer.

To cook, I cooked, I will cook, To move, I moved, I will move,

solere, valere, &c., take a

Muvere, Moveva, mover.

in lere,
l

290. Verbs ending in the infinitive

as volere, dolere,
in the first person

before the letter

singular,

and the

first

and third persons plural of the present of

the indicative, and in all the persons of the present of the subjunctive.

Ex.
we wish, they I, thou, he, we, wish. I, we, they are in the That I, thou, he, we,
I wish,

Che

Voglio, vogliamo, vogliono, voglia, voglia, voglia, vogliamo,

vogliate, vogliano,

That

wish. you, they

habit.

may

Soglio, sogliamo, sogliono, Che soglia, soglia, soglia, sogliamo,

sogliate, sogliano,

Vaglio, vagliamo, vagliono, Che valga, valga, valga, vagliamo. vagliate, vagliano,

you, they may he accustomed. worth, we, they are worth. That I, thou, he, we, you, they may be worth.
I

am

291. Verbs ending in the infinitive in nere, as rimanere,

tenere, take a

in the

first

person singular and third person

plural of the present of the indicative, and in all the three per-


IDIOMS AND

REMARKS ON VERBS.

157

sons singular and third person plural of the present of the subjunctive.

Ex.
I remain, they remain. That I, thou, he, they may remain. I hold, they hold. I, thou, he, they

Rimango, rimangono, Che rimanga, rimanga, rimanga, rimangano,

Tengo, tengono,

Che tenga,

tenga, tenga, tengano,

That

may

hold.

292. All verbs ending in lere and nere double the consonant

r in the future and conditional.

Valere, varr, varrei.

Ex.

To be
I

worth, I shall be worth,

would be worth.
hold, I shall hold, I

Tenere, terr, terrei,

To

would

hold.

293. Let the pupil observe that the preterite of irregular verbs
is

only irregular in

i\iQ first

person plural; the

first

person,

and third persons singular, and third which always ends in i, is changed and into ero
for the third

into e for the third person singular,

person plural.
Scrissi,

Ex.
Scrisse,

Scrissero,

I wrote.
Presi,
I took.
Lessi,

he wrote.
Prese,

he took.
Lesse,

they wrote. Presero, they took.

Lessero, they read.

I read.

he read.

EXERCISE LXVII.*

hung In the captivity of Babylon, the virgins of Judah schiavit Babilonia Giuda appendere
on willow-trees and wept. Benvenuto Cellini wrote salice (150) arpa a (293) his biography at 60 years of age. The reasons that they adduced
their harps

biografia

addurre

are

not convincing enough. convincere (268)

He

(brought forward)

six

produrre
and tranquil
life

witnesses.

He

preferred an obscure

to

the

testimone

anteporre
* Irregular verba are no longer marked.

(73)

158

IDIOMS AND HKMARKS ON VKRliS.

splendour of a throne. arono

We

will

remain in town until the be(292)

fino
of

ginning of spring.
for

They are

in the habit

going every year

two months

to

the sea-shore.

Whilst Galileo was tortured

Mentre
torturare

(290) (280) (262)

presso

by the Inquisition

for his theory, that the earth

moves
(289)
ref.

round
intorno

teoria

the sun, he calmly said: "nevertheless,

it

does move."

The next
on the

number
fine

of

pure the Edinburgh Review

Rivista

will contain

an

article

pretend that the Celtic and Etruscan knCeltico Etrusco (290) volere guages are both derived from the Phenician, and are very like Fenice simile (251) (209) one another, but of the Etruscan language there only remains [fra loro) (291) (232) inscriptions that nobody can read.
arts.

Some

294.

To KNOW

is

rendered in Italian by sapere and conoscere.

Sapere implies
Sapere la
lezione,

to

cing of things that

know through the mind, and is used may be learned by heart. Ex.
|

in

To know

the lesson.

Conoscere implies
Io conosco vostro
vostro zio,
zio,

to

know through
I

the senses.
uncle.

Ex.

but not io so

know your

295.
Focili

To KNOW how

is

simply rendered by sapere.

1

Ex.

sanno godere della

felicita

Few know how

:

to enjoy the happi-

che posseggono,

ness they possess.

296. Idioms formed with Sapere

you.

Sapere a mente, a memoria, Saper viale. Saper trovare il pelo nell'uovo,

Vi so dire,

To know by heart. To displease. To be clever, cunning.

I

can

toll


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERES.

159

Sapere Ex. of.

is

also used in the signification of to taste of^ to smell

Saper di cattivo, di buono, Saper di poco, di niente. Saper di muschio, di sale, &c.

To smell, to taste badly, well. To have little, no smell, taste. To smell of mask, to taste of salt

EXERCISE LXVIII.
"

How

mucli woiild you give to

know

all

know ?"

said a

(74)
conceited pedant to a lady.
all

(169) " I would give much more to

witty
spiritoso

know
in

you do not know," was the

answer.

Petrarch,
Petrarca
the

presenting some

(263)

medals valuable ancient medaglia prezioso

:

to

Emperor

Charles

iv.,

said

" Prince, I

know
it is

all

these great men, I

know

how much

they have

(288) (74) This Camellias are beautiful flowers, but they have no smell. Camelia (296) (79) oranges smell badly. These dish has very little taste. vivanda (296) (57) arancio (296)

done operare
;

for

you

to imitate

them."

Those who are not able

(173)
able to

to

bridle their

own
(156)

passions are not

capace
others.

frenare

command

Dolabella

said to

Cicero,

"

Do you
know

Cicerone

know
it,"

that I

am
(89)

only thirty years of age?" " for dachi

" I ought to

answered Cicero,

it

is

now more than

me."

ten years that

(7)
to

you (have been) andare

(189)
better than

telling

it

(127) everything without studying anything.

Many wish know No one knew mankind

to

La

{gli uomini) (262) (202) Bruyre. It displeases him that you were not

(296)

160

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

able either to write or send.

It

is

said that

cooks (of old)

{51) cuoco antico

ne

ne
to

(214)

kuew how
(295)

dress vegetables in such a way that they cucinare (57) erbaggio (185*) guisa

had the

taste of fish or fowl.

The
(31)

polio
intiero

gondoliers of Venice know gondoliere (296)

by heart whole stanzas of Tasso, which they sing with a

ottava
peculiar

melody.
melodia.

particolar

297. Idioms formed with Tenere:

back one.
with.

Tenere da uno, Tenere a bada, Tenere in contrario, Tenere uno per galantuomo Tenere le lagrime, Tener le risa, Tener conto di, Tenere a battesimo. Tener mano.

To To To To To To To To To

side with one, to

trifle

be of different opinions. believe one an honest man.

restrain one's tears.

keep from laughing.

esteem, to value. be godfather, godmother be an accomplice.
to.

298. Idioms formed with Volere

and Mettere

they

Voler bene a. Voler male a.

Ci vuole. Si vuole.
Voler dire. Mettersi a, Mettersi a dormire, Mettersi a tavola. Mettersi a sedere, Mettersi in testa. Mettersi all'ombra. Mettersi in via, in viaggio,

To love, to like. To hate, to dislike. One must have.

It
is

said,

they pretend,

believe.

To To To To To To To To

mean.
set about, to begin.

go to sleep. go to table. sit down.

take into one's head. go in the shade. set out on a journey.

exercise lxix.

Dante used, during the summer evenings,

solere

to

himself on


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.
a stone opposite the pietra dirimpetto

161
still

Cathedral, which

is

pre-

Duomo

^(214)

^ancora ^con-

served in Florence. servare

Salvator Eosa worked so quickly, that presto

when he began
(298)
finish it

to

paint a landscape in the morning, he could dipingere paesaggio

before evening.

In
it

setting out on our journey, the

(263)
carriage overturned, and as

we were

not hurt,

we

could not keep

vettura

rovesciarsi

from laughing.
alone.

He

(286)

took
(298)

into his

head
as

to

ascend Vesuvius Vesuvio

(297)

We recommended him honest man. He with

trifles

to you,

we thought him an
and pays none. (202)
the type
tipo

all his creditors,

(297)
It is

said

that the language of a people

is
2

is

friend

ispirazione

To be an accomplice a crime a (297) begin same commit a (298) che than an enemy. mean that one must have (105) (298) (298) precepts be good The come pure precetto per Queen was godmother the In order speak
of their national character.
in

(298)

but \nQn \he

carattere

delitto

the

as to

it.

It is easier to

to dislike a

to

like

inspiration

(as well as)

to

poet.

to

princess.

to

or to

(297)

(66)

write well, one must have ideas and words present to the mind.

(298)

We should only value the

(276)

(297)

approbation of the good. approvazione p.

He had
Eliza-

the good fortune to back the horse which

won.

Queen
(33)

(297) beth never ceased to hate a French (298) ridiculed her French pronunciation. pronunzia. (286) (154)

vncere

ambassador, for having (228)

162

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERR3.

THIRD CONJUGATION.
299. Idioms formed with Venire
:

conclu-

meno, venir manco, Venire stimato, Venir biasimato, lodato, &c. Venire alle inani, alle strette,
Veiiir

To faint, to fail. To be esteemed. To be blamed, praised. To come to blows, to a

sion.

Venir voglia, desiderio. Gli venne voglia di viaggiare, Mi viene in mente, Mi vengono le lagrime agli
occhi.

To

take a fancy, to wish.

He

wished
tears

to travel.

I remember.

The

come

to

my

eyes.

Venire alla luce,

To come

to light, to appear.

DIFFERENT SIGNIFICATIONS OF CONVENIRE.

300. This verb,

when employed with

the signification of being

to

compelled, or of being convenient, must,

be necessary,

is

imper-

and takes no preposition verb. Ex.

sonal,
Gli convenne, fuggire travestito, per
1

after it if followed

by another

He was

obliged to escape in disguise

life.

campar

la vita,
I

to save liis

Cio non pu convenirgli,

That cannot be convenient

to

him.

Convenire may Ex. person.

Convengo
esser egli

also

mean,

to

agree on some point with a

uomo dabbene,

I agree in his being an honest

man.

Convenire is used Ex. assemble.

in the sense of to meet by appointment, to

Convennero sullapiazza del mercato,

They met

in the market-place.

Udire,

to hear.

Sentire,

to feel.

301. Both these verbs are employed in Italian to render the

verb

to

hear ; Sentire likewise means

is

to feel.

To hear from a
Ex.

person,

rendered by ricever

lettere, or notizie.
I

Udirono, or sentirono Io mi sento male,

una

voce,

They heard
I feel
ill.

a report.

Abbiamo

ricevuto lettere d'Italia,

We

have heard from Italy


IDIOMS

AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

EXERCISE LSX.

163

I agree with

him who has

said, that

to

be a good poet, one but

(173) (300) must be a good man.

per

They

met

in

a friend's house,

(300) (300)_ separated without agreeing (on anything), having nearly come quasi (225) di nulla separarsi (300) Cato, at eighty, fancied for the first time to learn to blows.

(299) (299) Catone Gothic ruins on the banks of viewing the Greek. In riva (263) contemplare (50) Gotico rovina the Rhine, we remembered the famous robbers of the thirteenth

Reno
century, against
secolo

(299)

whom
form

the merchants of more than

a league,

hundred

towns agreed
(300)

to

The

first

(41) printed books that

lega

stampare

appeared were only printed on one side of the leaf. da parte foglio. (299)
from our friends in Ceylon every three months. reduced to such poverty, that he was obliged
(300)
night,

We hear
writing at
faint

(301) Tasso was once

to cease

having no candles
hunger.

and Eacine beheld Corneille

is

from

Xenophon
pen.
fit

(299)

blamed

for

writing

history

Senofonte (299)

(262*)
it

with a

novelist's

To

govern men,

is

necessary to

romanziere

make them
rendere
of ignorance

to

(300) be governed, by dissipating the darkness

tenebra

Per

capace

and

superstition.

The

ambassadors assembled in
(300)

Paris to

settle the dispute between Switzerland and Prussia. per comporre Svizzera fra Newspapers first appeared under the aristocratic government

gazzetta

(299)

aristocratico

of the Republic of Venice.


1G4
IDIOMS AND

REMARKS ON VERBS.

To Play.
302.

The English verb

different significations,

to play, which must be rendered

its

is

used with so

many
parti-

in Italian

cular verb, according to

various significations.

by a Ex,

To play a game, To play upon an To play a part, To play on one, To play false, play, in the To ^ "
amuse one
,

Giuocare
instrument.

a.
il.

Suonare

Fai^e, rappresentare la parte.

Prendersi giuoco Ingannare.

di.

s-self,

sense of to") r>ty Divertirsi, ruzzare. Tf.

)

To To

play, speaking of a fountain. Gettare, zampillare.

play a trick.

Fare una
prendere,
is

celia, burla.

303.

To TAKE,

rendered by portare, when used

in the sense of to carry, to bring, to

wear ; by condurre, menare,

via, to take
off,

to signify to conduct, to lead

by levare, portar

take away.
'^

Ex.
"""' ''''''^^' ""''

^^'sMla
Portate la sella al sellaio. Mi condusse a fare una visita,

T'"^'

^y

^'""''^ ^'^

*^'

^^''^^'-

Take the

saddle to the saddler.

to

He

took

me

pay a

visit.

Prendete questo libro. / Turchi portano il turbante, Levate la tovaglia,

304.

Take

this book.

Turks wear turbans.

Take away the

table-cloth.

To UNDERSTAND, TO

LEARN, TO BE TOLD, OR TO BE IN-

FORMED, can be translated

in the following

ways

Ho sapulo,
Mi Mi
stato detto,

I have been told. I am informed.

I
I

vien riferito, Sento che,

is

am given to understand. hear or learn that.

305. It is said, it
la voce, correr fama.

reported, may be rendered by correr Ex,

i

Corre la voce che il Parlamento verr i)resto disciolto,

It is reported that

Parliament will

soon be dissolved.


IDIOMS

AND REMARKS OX VERBS.

EXERCISE LXXI.

165

The
played,
-inf.
it

Swiss, on hearing their national

air,

the

Bans

des Vaches,

Svizzero

^(263)
(so

nazionale aria
to (see again) their

long

much)

own
*

country, that

bramare talmente was forbidden to play it

proibire

rivedere
in the

Swiss regiments in the French

to plav with his children,

service.

Henry
Saul's

iv.

of

a France used

carrying them on his

(303)
soothe

back. David played on the harp to per {150) spalla p. fury. The fountains played all day at Pots-

(280)

calmare Saidle smania p.

dam.

(302)
for

Spanish

nobleman was banished from the Court

esiliare

Spagnuolo

having won several games of chess which he played with the parecchio partita scacco-^. (302) king. Molire died whilst he was playing the part of the mentre

Imaginary Invalid^ the last comedy that he wrote. The immaginario ^malato commedia favourites of James the First played on their royal master's imGiacomo imbecility, but the king, in his turn, played them shamefully
becillit
false,

(a sua volta)

vergognosamente

expressing to them the greatest affection esprimere

when he had

re-

solved to ruin

them. perdere

Louis

xiv. created a subject

an ambasnot play the

suddito (38)
billiards skilfully.

sador, because

he played

Do

bigliardo abilmente.
fool.

It is reported that a revolution

sciocco.

The
Dutch

(305) Spaniards brought chocolate

(302) has (broken out) in Sicily. scoppiare Sicilia.

from

Mexico, and Messico

the

and English

claim

the honour of having carried the

Olandese

attribuirsi

166
first

IDIOMS

AND REMARKS ON VEUHS.

cargo of tea to Europe.

carico
in

Take these hyacinths

to

your

sister.

giacinto (303) Socrates was not ashamed to phiy with children. In Louis Socrate (231) (302)

the Fourteenth's reign, courtiers rode to dinner, and wore at cortigiano (282) (303)
table their boots

and

spurs.

Mazarin,

before his death,

took

{\bO) stivale

sjrone.

Mazzarini

Colbert to Court, and introduced him as his successor to the

kinsf.

VERBS WHICH GOVERN, IN ITALIAN, A DIFFERENT PREPOSITION FROM THE ENGLISH,

306. Verbs which require to be followed by the preposition

A bbisognare
Abbondare
Adornarsi
di

dl

danaro,

di provvisioni,

Accorgersi di uno sbaglio,

gemme,

Affliggersi delle sventure altrui,

To want money. To abound in provisions. To perceive a mistake. To adorn one's-self with jewels. To grieve for the misfortuneB
others.

of

Appagarsi di poco, Ardere di sdegno,

Arrossire
di

vergogna,

Aver piet

degli infelici,

Avvedersi elVinganno,

To be satisfied with little. To burn with indignation. To blush for shame. To pity the unfortunate. To perceive the deceit. To
ridicule or laugh at a fool.

Caricare

di

grano una nave.

Colmare

di gentilezze,

Contentarsi del necessario.

To load a vessel with corn. To load with kindness. To be satisfied with what
sary.

is

neces-

Coprire di un velo. Decidere della vittoria.

Diffidarsi

eW adulazione.

Dimenticarsi del passato,

Empire

di confusione,

Guarnire di velluto, Innamorarsi di una persona,

Intendersi di
belle arti,
libri,

Ingombrare la tavola di Languire d fame, fiancare di buon senso.

To cover with a veil. To decide the victory. To distrust flattery. To forget the past. To fill with confusion. To trim with velvet. To fall in love with a person. To understand the fine arts. To crowd the table with books. To languish with hunger. To want cood sense.

IDIOMS AND
Ilaravi^Uarsi dei fenomeni, Minacciare di morte, Ojprimere di tasse, Piangere di gioia, Ballegrarsi della huoia notizia,

REMARKS ON VERBS.
To wonder at the phenomena. To threaten with death. To oppress with taxes. To weep for joy. To rejoice at the good news. To argue or to speak on politics. To remember
the promise.

167

Cagionare

di politica,

Rammentarsi

) i n ^^^^^^ Promessa, incordarsi \ Ridersi delle censure. Ringraziare ei favore.

Risentirsi di un'ingiuria, Satollarsi di dbo.

Scemare

di jjopolarit.

Vendicarsi di wn tradimento.

To laugh at censure. To return thanks for the favour. To resent an injury. To surfeit with food. To decrease in popularity. To revenge a betrayal.

EXERCISE LXXII.
laugh at the miser who (starves himself) in order to avaro lasciarsi morir di fame (306) enrich his heir. They were threatened with torture, and even

We

erede.

with death,
tovi.

if

tortura (306) they refused to reveal the names of the conspirasvelare

In

cospira-

his painting representing the sacrifice of Iphigenia,

tore.

Timante having exhausted

esaurito

Ifigenia (268) in the faces of the spectators every

volto

spettatore
art,

conception of grief, and distrusting the farther power of

hid

(306)

ulteriore

with a veil the features of the miserable father. sembianza misero

are

Regal

(306)
robes
veste

trimmed with ermine.

(306)

Those who

possess

much

are not so

ermellino

rich as those

who

(165) content themselves with little, To laugh at

is

(306) the censure of the world

a sign of great fully.

In

(306)
Italy,
it

is

not even allowed to speak on politics.

The best

way

to

forget

(306)
the past,
is

to live actively in the present,

(120) moc^oc?/ (306) ref. and to remember often

(306)

the future.

Count Ug'olino languished nine days with hunger

(306)

(34) Conte


168
IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS,
thirst before

and

he died.
inf.

The

island

abounded in
(306)
fruit

game

and

cacciagione

provisions,

but the

natives

lived

on

and on

roots.

(306) Simonides perceived such a connexion between painting and Simonide fra (306) poetrv, that he called painting mute poetry, and poetry speaking (268)
painting.

307. Verbs which require to be followed by the preposition A Adempire

ai

propri doveri,

Affidarsi ad uno sconosciuto,

Appigliarsi ad un partilo,

Appoggiarsi
Avvicinarsi

al

muro,
}

To perform one's own duties. To trust a stranger. To take a decision. To lean against the wall. To draw near
or approach the
fii'o.

ApprossimaTsi^^^^
'
'

Badare
Dire

conseguenze, Credere ad wn impostore,

alle
al coccJiiere, ai genitori,

Dispiacere

Domandare ad un

amico.

Disubbidire alle leggi. Insegnare all' ignorante, Inspirare ad ognuno stima e

rispetto,

To mind the consequences. To believe an impostor. To tell the coachman. To displease one's parents. To ask a friend. To disobey the laws. To teach the ignorant. To inspire every one with esteem and
respect.

Nuocere al prossimo, Pensare ai lontani, Perdonare ai nemici,

Permettere ai lavoranti di far festa, Pervenire agli onori, Piacere ai buoni. Proibire ai nostri figli distare oziosi, Bassomigliare ad una persona,
Pesistere alle tentazioni, Ribellarsi aXVopressione,

To injure one's neighbour. To think of the absent. To pardon enemies. To allow the workmen a holiday. To attain honours. To please the good. To forbid our children to be idle. To resemble a person. To resist temptation. To rebel against oppression.
To
refuse charity to the poor.

Piflettere all'avvenire.

Rinunziare al mondo. Rispondere ad una lettera.

Rubare

ai viaggiatori.

Sopravivere a&a. perdita della

tazione,

reju-

To reflect on the future. To renounce the world. To answer a letter. To rob travellers. To outlive the loss of one's
tion.

reputa-

Ubbidire

ai genitori,

To obey

one's parents.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

169

EXERCISE LXXIII.

Those who are not able

(173)
avoid
evitare
it.

(276) A Spartan

to to resist temptation ought (276) (280) (280) (307) chose for the device of his shield a * Spartano scegliere divisa scudo

size, and being ridiculed by his friends, he fly of natural grandezza mosca " answered them, I will approach the enemy so closely, that he

(307)
shall see clearly
2

[da vicino)

enough
1

this

mark."

Dante
offer

says, that

it

is

great misery to think of past happiness in present misfortune. dolore miseria (307)

We

gave them time

(307)

to reflect

on our

before taking a de-

cision.

Bacchus was
Bacco
as

di (307)

ojerta

(262)
vite

the

first

to teach

men

to cultivate the vine.

The
water,

inhabitants of Nola having refused

Virgil

a glass of

(307) Virgilio he was passing through their city, displeased the

(237)

mentre

per

(307)

poet so much, that he (blotted out) the cancellare

name

of

Nola from the

in the trans-

second book of his Georgics. Georgica

Pythagoras believed
Pittagora

tras-

migration of souls, and forbade his disciples to slay animals or migrazione discepolo uccidere (307)
to use
(of)

them
(138)

for food.

The

city of Syracuse attained a great

servirsi

cibo

Siracusa
(263)
(307)

degree of splendour.

Vespasian, on becoming emperor, renounced

Vespasiano
(307)
inspires troops with courage

(307)

cdto

grado

the vices of his youth, and faithfully performed all the duties of
his position.

Martial music (307) confidence. Christianity the only

'^marziale
^

and

soldato
religion

is

which teaches men

(307)

Cristianesimo

(252)

170
to ininre

IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

no one, and
(202)

to forgive their enemies.

(307)

(307)

It

has heen already given as a general

to,

rule, that the preposid.

tion

before infinitives,

is

rendered in Italian by
is

(See 5.)

And when
motion, by

the preposition to
a.

governed by a verb expressing

(See

9.)

308.

The
is

following verbs also require the infinitive by which

a,

they are followed to be preceded by the preposition

although

no motion

expressed.

Abihiarsi Accostumarsi studiare, Assuefarsi Avvezzarsi Adattarsi a vivere senza lusso, Aspirare ad imitare, Attendere a cucire,

'}

To accustom

one's-self to study.

Condannare a viver

in esilio,
'

To adapt one's-self to live simply. To aspire to imitate. To attend to sewing. To condemn to live in exile.

Continuare^^^j
Seguitare
J
)
,

To

continue to liem.
to print.
one's-self fishing.

Cominciare

Principiare r'^''"'^''''''
Dilettarsi \ , Divertirsi r^''''''^'' Dare a raccomodare, Esibirsi

To begin

To amuse To
To

give to be mended.
offer to teach.

'"<". Froferird} '

S;;-.-i

-/"'.

To expose To

one's-self to sulTer.

learn to sketch.

Impiegare a copiare, Incoraggiare a parlare, Insegnare a ricamare, Invitare a venire, Obbligare Costringere > a chiedere scusa,

To employ to copy. To encourage to speak. To teach to embroider. To invite to come. To

oblige to apologize.

Forzare

Occuparsi a fortificare, Perseverare a negare. Prepararsi a viaggiare, Proseguire a querelarsi,

To be occupied in fortifying To persevere in denying. To prepare to travel. To continue to complain. To remain

sitting.

Tenersi pronto

!x

partire,

To be ready

to start.


IDIOMS AND REMARKS ON VERBS.

171

EXERCISE LXXIV.

The Spartans placed

sleep, in order to

the statue of death

beside

that of

morte accanto a

accustom themselves
(308)

to consider sleep

and death

sonno
as the

same

thing.

Domii'ian,
ammazzare

Eoman
in

emperor, amused him-

self

palazzo Joan of Arc, who, under the walls of Orleans, defeated the (60'') Giovanna sconfiggere English, and forced them to raise the siege of that town, levare assedio (308) having afterwards fiillen into the hands of her enemies, was
(225) (308) Rouen.
quindi
to

catching acchiappare

Domiziano (38) and killing flies

(308)
his

imperial palace.

condemned

be burned as

witch in the market-place of

(3)
;

From Horace
;

(38) Strega

to love virtue

one learns to laugh at vice from Persius, Ora^20 (213) (308) (306) Persio and Juvenal teaches us to detest vice. Plato Giovenale detestare Platone

was invited

to give a

code
codice

of laws to the

town

of Gyrenes, and

(308) (on being asked)

Cirene

why he

persevered in refusing, he answered, that

domandatogli

(308)

the inhabitants were too opulent to begin to follow his laws.

per (308) seguire Daring the siege of Constantinople, the inhabitants, instead of Durante assedio in vece thinking of the common danger, were occupied disputing
pericolo contrastare (308) about theological questions, and before (that) they accanitamente sopra

(307)

bitterly

were prepared to receive him, the Sultan arrived to put an end Sultano giungere {por fine) (308)
to the controversy.

controversia.

172

CHAPTER

X.

Advei'bs are invariable, aad are joined to a verb, an adjective,

or another adverb, to express

some circumstance
They
..

of time, place,

manner, &c.
Giunsero
tardi,

Ex.
i

arrived late
well.
j.^

Ella Mia _ parla

Italiano molto bene,

vicino al ponte,

Dimorano
B09.
mente.

...

She speaks Italian Italia very

live

They

near the bridge.

Many
Ex.

adverbs are formed from adjectives by adding

Grande, grandemente,
Diligente, diligentemente,

'

Great, greatly. Diligent, diligently.

o,

310. Wlien the adjective ends in

into a.

that vowel

is

changed

Ex.
I

Oscuro, oscuramente, Bieco, riccamente,

Empio, empiamente,

'

Obscure, obscurely. Eich, richly. Impious, impiously.

le

311.

When

the adjective ends in

or re, the e

must be sup-

pressed in forming the adverb.

Amorevole, amorevolmente,
Particolare, particolarmente,
i

Ex.
Loving, lovingly.
Particular, particularly.

312. Adjectives are sometimes used adverbially.

Vi parlo chiaro,
I

Ex.

I speak plainly to you.

Piangendo

forte,

'

Weeping

bitterly.

313. Mai, giammai, never, or ever, are generally accompanied by the negative non ; when employed negatively, non is usually

placed before the verb and

mai
non

or
I

giammai

after.

Ex.
silent,

Non

rideva mai,
talvolta,

He

La

Previdenza tace

ma

dorms mai,

never laughed. Providence is sometimes never sleeps.

but

signification of ever, or at
lire

314. Mai, giammai, employed without the negation, have the any time ; we occasionally find they

used without a negation in a negative sense.

Ex.

ADVERr.S.

173
would ever have tliought it ? was the most contented man that

Chi

vi avrebbe

mai pensato

Who
He

Fu il pi
Alle sue

contento

uomo

che giammai

fosse, B.

comandT), che ad alcuna persona mai manifestassero chi fossero, B.

femmine

He gave

ever was. orders to the women, that they were never to reveal to any one who they were.
sJ,

315,

Mai

often precedes or follows sempre,

no,

when

it

is

used as an expletive, and gives more strength to these words.

Ex.
Una parte
hrine, P.

del

Mai sempre
316.

mondo che si giace, in ghiaccio ed in gelate

It is a part of the

world that lies for over entombed in ice and frost.

both languages.
rendered by
s,

The negation not is expressed by non ; no Noi is tlie abbreviation of non

si
;

is

alike in

lo.

Yes
:

is

but the following expressions are also used

di

yes

di no, no.
?

Ex.
Did you not see him I do not know him. He answered him
?

Noi vedesti tu

No,

No.
yes,

Non

lo conosco,

Gli rispose di s, quando avrebbe dovuto risponder di no,

when

should have answered no.

EXERCISE LXXV,

Love without esteem

stima
lights
easily

is

like

fire

of

straw,

which
can

{simile

ad)

and

accendersi

estinguersi

goes out quickly. No action pronto {ZIO) (202)

paglia

properly be called virtuous unless it be fully proprio (310) (214) (a meno che) pieno (310) approved of by one's own conscience. The best champion of * (156) (121) campione

liberty

is

he

who always obeys most

(165)
devotedly the laws. devoto

Then
Allora

scrupulously and most (307) (110) scrupoloso Calandrino said, " Wert thou ever

there ? " to which he

answered, " No, never,"

(313)

Who
(172)

(314)

would would

(171) ever have thought, that a (314)

man

so lately poor himself

{poco fa)

174

ADVERBS.

have treated so cruelly others in poverty.

felt

Friendship
is

is

never

by a corrupt

heart.

The

human mind

ever

(313) ready to

welcome novelty.
accogliere
his

The

(315) iironto
Cardinal to

whom

Ariosto dedicated
sarcasti-

novit

well-known poem, Orlando Furioso, asked the poet

(624)

Physicians

(307) (622) ironico cally, " My good fellow, where did you ever find such nonsense?" [caro mio) corbelleria p. (310)
cure

sometimes,

relieve

often,

and generally

guarire
cheer their patients. rallegrare malato

sollevare

A Spanish king

obstinately refused to

employ as secretary an excellent Catholic subject, simply beper '^Cattolico huddito cause his name was Martin Luther. Lutero. Martino

317.

The

principal adverbs oi place are the following

Here. There.

:-

a,

qui, qua,

Vi, col, l, ivi, cos, cost,

Quindi,
Quinci,

From From

tLat place.
this place.

Dove, Onde, donde, di dove, Quass, Lass, Quaggi,

Where. Whence.

Up here. Up there. Down there.

There below. Up and down.

Su

e gi,

318.

When
;

the place

is

not mentioned, and no emphasis or

no particular
is

signification falls on the

adverb of place,

ci or vi

used

in a contrary case, l or col,

qua or qui must be emno room.

ployed.

Ex.
col,

Andate
posto,

dach qui non

Go

there, as here there is

is

Chi ia?

Or

fvjstarvi tutto

die siete cost, vi consiglio di Vinvevno,

there? Now that you are there, I advise you to remain all the winter.

Who


ADVERBS.
319. Qui or qua
is

175

used to indicate the place in which the

the place in which the person
is

speaker

is

cost, cost,

to

whom

we

are speaking or writing.

L,

col,

ivi,

quivi,

mark

a place

distant alike from the speaker

and the hearer.

Let
time there
;

Ex.
we
are enjoying our-

Scrivetemi come passate cost il vostro tempo, noi qui non facciamo die divertirci, Quando voi ritornerete col da dove
veniste,

me know how you spend year

selves here.

When

you return there from whence you came.

EXERCISE LXXVI.
Skins for the use of writing were
pelle
first

dressed at Per-

gamus, in

gamo

Perda prima conciare We Asia, whence the name oi parchment is derived. derivare pergamena (317)

are in the habit of going there every year for three months.

(280)

(318)

He

alleged, as proof of his innocence, that he

was not here

to

addurre

when
long
?

the crime was committed.

Do you intend

(318) remain there

(319)

Here
(132)

are the verses (that)

you wrote at Vallombrosa,

and the flowers

Florence

(that)

you gathered there.

cogliere

When we were

in

(318)
;

we

lived near the cathedral dimorare presso duomo

and afterwards we

took a house between Florence and Fiesole.

there,

Since
Poich

you are

you should

visit

(319)

mines. coal the [carbon fossile) cava

vicino

From thence
a mirage called

we proceeded on
a
spent the night.

foot as far as the

(317) neighbouring town, where we

Men are always

is

passare
happiness, which

pursuing correr dietro a

fantasma

never grasped here below. The house raggiungere (317) you see there below is an hospital. There lies my friend. ospedale giacere (317)

176
320. Ora, iow,
is

used in the formation of

many

expressions

with various significations.

then, at that time.
Finora, Qualora,

Allora, composed of

a quella ora,

Ex.
Till

now.

Whenever.
Early. Since tben.

Di

buon'ora,

Fin d'allora. D'ora in ora. In mal ora, Per ora.

D'allora in
poi.

From hour

to hour.

In an unlucky hour.

For the present.

From

that time.

D'ora

in poi,

D'oggi in poi,

Henceforth.

Or

ora, teste, poco fa,

is

Just now.
tlien signifies

321. Allora
then
is

used when

at that time ; but

when
is

employed

for consequently,

dunque, and not allora,

the

corresponding word in Italian.

Ex.
was then the custom to dine in the morning. Let us, then, be cheerful and thankful in prosperity, and resigned in
It

Era

allora costume

pranzare

nella

mattina,

Slamo dunque
sit,

allegri e grati nella

prosperit, e rassegnati nell'avver-

misfortune.
vero,

Se do

dunque mi avete ingan-

If that be true, then

you have de-

nato.

ceived me.

322.

No

longer

is

translated by non pi ; no farther by non

pi lungi, non pi
after.

oltre,

non pi innanzi.

In both
oltre,

cases,

placed before the verb, and pi, pi lungi, pi

non is pi innanzi,

Ex.
I will bear tbis humiliation no longer.
Ij(it

Non

voglio sopportare piii quest'umi-

liazione,

Non andiamo pi innanzi, Non voglio incoraggiare pi

vostre pretensioni,

US go no farther.

oltre le

I will encourage tensions.

no farther your pre-

323. Quando, when,

tions.

is

used in forming several adverbial

locii

Ex.
in quando,

Di quando
n-i Ui tempo

.^

'

Da

tempo, quando in qua,

in

^
)

now and how

-,

then.

since when, long.

how long

is it

since ?

Fino a quando, Quando... quando,

now. ..now, sometimes. ..sometimes.


ADVERB,
Egli venne di quando
vederci,
in (quando

17'

He

carne

now and then

to see

Fino a quando resteremo schiavi? Da quando in qua siete in Iscozia

How long shall we remain slaves ? How long have you heen in Scotland
?

Prosegu il viaggio quando a piedi, quando a cavallo,

He continued hia journey now

now on
horseback.

on

foot,

EXERCISE LXSVII.
Louis the Sixteenth then mounted the
(321) the following words to the people seguente
(91)
:

scaffold,

and addressed
indirizzare

" Frenchmen, I forgive my

(307)

palco,

enemies

I wish that

my

death"... The

King could proceed no

procedere

farther, as

General Santerre then ordered (the drums) (to be 2 tamburo i (214) (322) (321) (33) beaten,) in order that the people should hear no longer the King's (256) (322) voice. We amuse ourselves sometimes shooting, sometimes fishing.

How long

(323)
is it

(265)
let

since they

have

their

house?

The

appigionare (323) Gauls were then husbandmen, and were easily subdued by Gallo agricoltore soggiogare

the warlike
bellicoso

Romans.

Her language, though unstudied,

is

now

and then highly dramatic.

have just now

(320)

semplice (323) seen the " Pilgrim's

Progress" translated into Chinese. tradurre

family, let

Pellegrino "When you hear from your

me know

(it.)

fare{\21)
ceives early

are never effaced (320) (214) (313) cancellare

The impressions which a child from mind. We expected

reits

(248)

(301)

aspettare

you hourly.
(320)
324. Merc, signifying by the grace or kindness
followed

of, is


178 by the genitive, and is sometimes preceded by the definite article. Ex. I came here, where, by the ^xaq,q of Q me ne venni, dove, merce d'Iddio
1

e di questa gentildonna,

scampato
I

God and
lady, I

the kindness of this noble

in safety.

sono, B.

am

325.

Come prima, and

in

iion

prima, as soon
;

as,

no sooner, are

more used

an elevated style

subito che, tosto che,

appena or

come, in familiar language. Ex. Be sure, that as soon as you were Vivi sicuro, che come prima addorasleep you would have been murmentato ti fossi, saresti stato am-

Come

mazzato, B. or appena

dered.
lo

videro tutti gli

As

andarono incontro,

went
are

soon as they saw him, they to meet him.

all

326. The following commonly in use

:

some of the adverbial locutions most

Ad

Con comodo,

alta voce, aloud. belVagio, J ^^ j^.;^^^^_

Da capo, again. Da senno, seriously. Da solo a solo,_ |tgte.-tte.

quattro occhi.

A A
A

buon mercato, cheap.

buon'ora, early. caso, by chance. destra, to the right.
in spite
of.

Di buon grado, Di buona voglia, Di mala voglia,

, \ ,. i'^^^'^'Sb-

A A

Ad onta,

gara, in emulation.

malincore, > unwillingly. 3Ial volentieri, ) Di mano in mano, gradually. Di nuovo, again.
,

^gr-^';^^}now-a-days.
AlVimprovviso, unexpectedly. AWincirca, i i,
i.

Di nascosto, i ui Di soppiatto, r^'^'^^^'^Di presente, presently Di rado, seldom.

Dirottamente, heavily.

un di presso,

Almeno,

r^'-'^^'"'^''''^at least.

dirotte lagrime, bitterly.

Al pi

A A A
A A

al pi, at the utmost. jioco a poco, by degrees. proposito, by the by, seasonably.
sinistra, to the left.

In avvenire,
{^">

in future.

^mquadro,^
Alia rinfusa,
J

^^^

'

sufficienza, sufficiently.

tin short. Jn somma, ) In fretta, in a hurry. In un batter d'occhio, marno In un attimo, | In vece, instead.

tempo, in time.
tratto, all at once.

Niente

affatto, not at all.

A un
In

Cio, vale

dire, that is to say.

\ i

r>a banda,

disparte, i^''"^^-

f)a banda a banda, Da parte a parte,

\ through and
j

through.

Ogni qual volta, whenever. Per esempio, for instance. Per ischerzo, in jest. Per Vappunto, exactly. Per lo pi, generally. Per tempo, in lime.

179
Su due piedi,
Tanto pi,
so

at once.

much
'

the more.
'

Prima

di voi, &c., before you. Quanto prima, \ as soon as possible. II pi presto possibile, )

^^'''^'.]-sooD, byandby, ' A momenti, j

Vie pi or via pi,

much

more.

EXERCISE LXXVIII.

The language
linguaggio
palaces.

of the heart

and of truth

is

seldom spoken in
^
^

Hail

(214)
rain crystallized
cristallizzare

is

by the cold before reaching

arrivare

the earth.

Taste
gusto

is

rather a gift of nature than an acquisition

a
of art.

One

dono (326) shovdd rather die than commit a dishonourable

that piece of music again.

action.

Play

(213) (276)

The
:

letter

y was

in-

(302) (326) vented by Pythagoras, a native of Samos Pittagora Samo

the two branches are

ramo
vice, the

emblematical of the two paths of virtue and emblematico sentiero

stretching to the rigbt side, the latter to the * (326)
tors died willingly

former
(163)
gladia-

left.

amidst the applause of the

The gladiaRomans. From

now

tore

(326) that time he has by degrees increased his savings, and ' risparmio (320) (326)

shortly he will be rich

of advice given in
consiglio

enough

to retire

from commerce.

A word

ritirarsi

season,

may

just be

in time to save one

life

(326) of repentance. As soon as we opened cur trunks, the

(custom-house officers) examined them with doganiere

much more

rigour

than we expected. attendersi. (107)

It

was raining heavily, when by chance we

(326)
(326)

180

PKFPOSITION8,

met the servant with an umbrella.

she heard the sentence.

She wept

bitterly as soon as

To

(326) (325) read aloud in a foreign language Straniero ^ (326)

is

a most useful exercise.

CHAPTER XL
PREPOSITIONS.
have already treated of the prepositions di, a, da^ employed as segnacasi, in the first chapter but as prepositions are often used in Italian in a way differing altogether from the
;

We

English application of them, we will in this lesson show how

some

of

them may be employed.

Di,
of.

327. In Italian, di
to, after

is

substituted for the English preposition

nouns which express relationship, inheritance, &c.

l'erede di

Ex.

Voi
TI

siete

ima gran

for-

You

are heir to a large fortune.

of Prussia
is

tuna,

Principe di Prussia nipote del

The Prince
the king.

nephew to

328.

When

the nation or town of a person

if

is

mentioned,
is
is

we

use the preposition di; but

the town or place of birth

menused.

tioned, to signify a native of that country or town,

da

Ex.

La

Questo signore e di Dublino, famiglia Medici di Firenze, Raffaello da Urbino,

Leonardo da

Vinci,

This gentleman is from Dublin. The Medicis of Florence. Raphael a native of Urbino. Leonard a native of Vinci.

329.

When

the words road, way, are followed in English by

to,

the preposition
Additatemi

in Italian
Livorno,

it

la strada di

must be translated by di. Ex. Show me the road to Leghorn.

I

Vho

incontrato sulla via di Pisa,

met him on the way

to Pisa.


PREPOSITIONS.

181
:-

330.

Di

is

used in the following phrases

di,

Esser adorno
carico
contento

di,

di,

dotato

di,

provveduto
sorpreso
di,

di,

soddisfatto di,
stupefatto di.

Viaggiar di giorno^
di ?2oe.

Vivere di radici e di ere,

To To To To To To To To To To To
A,

be be be be be be be be

adorned with. laden or loaded with.

pleased with. endowed with. provided with.
satisfied with.

surprised at. astonished at. travel by day. travel by night.

live

on roots and vegetables.

to, at.

a indicates the end or object to which the action of a verb, or an idea, is directed it expresses tendency towards, and for this reason, verbs of motion, which always imply movement directed towards some point or end, are followed by the preposition a. Ex.
331.
preposition
;

The

Eglino vennero a trovarmi, Io mi appoggiai al mziro,

Avvicinatevi 8l fuoco, Stiamo di casa dirimpetto a
voi.

Tliey came to look for me. I leaned against the wall. Approach the fire. live opposite you.

We

332. In Italian, the preposition a

of expressions

is
:

used in a great number

and adverbial locutions

sWoscuro,

Andare Andare Andare

a due a due,
al buio,

alla volta di

Roma.
ko,..

Cantare a maravialia, Cvcinare alla Francese,

Darsi a conoscere, Fare sW^ peggio, alla meglio.

Giungere n\Y impensata,

Morire a

centinaia.

Partire alla sfuggita, Spendere &\V impazzata, Stare a bocca aperta, a capo
chino, a occhi bassi, &c.,

To go two by two. To go in the dark. To go towards Eome. To sing wonderfully well. To cook, in the French fashion. To make one's-self known. To do one's worst, one's best. To arrive suddenly. To die by hundreds. To set oif by stealth. To spend foolishly. To remain open mouthed, with one's head hung down, with
downcast eyes.


182
Stare alla larga^ Tagliare afetie^ Trattare alla buona,
PREPOSITIONS.

Trovare
Vestire

le

cose alla rinfusa, &c.,

W Italiana,

Vivere &\Vantica, Un battello a vapore, Un bastimento a vela, Un mulino a vento, Un cannone carico a metraglia,

To keep away from. To cut in slices. To treat familiarly. To find things topsy-turvy. To dress in the Italian fashion. To live after the ancient style.

A A
A A A

steam-boat.
sailing-vessel.

wind-mill. cannon loaded

shot.

with grapeballs,

Un fucile

carico a palla,

gun loaded with

EXERCISE LXXIX.

Almost
This

all

European nations dress Europeo (332)

is

in the

French fashion.

macaroni maccherone

dressed

in

the

Neapolitan fashion, with

p.

(332)

Napoletano

Parmesan
promotes
his

cheese.

One

who
;

is

endowed with prudence

is

Parmigiano formaggio

(173)

own

happiness

(330) but one who

endowed with

promuovere
1

eneficence promotes that of others.

vegetables.

The
we

hills

are

Brahmins live on Bramino (330) covered with snow. The heat was

The

collina
so

(330)

neve
travelled

great

that

slept

by
(330)

day and

bv night.

Although he was the king's son, and heir to the throne of

(256)
land, the judge reprimanded him.

Eng-

The

eagle,

provided with
(330)
is

giudice

aquila
claws,

great wings, strong

and

sharp
tagliente

beak,

clearly

[51) artglio

intended to live on prey.

destinare

The

preda plains of Babylon, and those pianura Babilonia

shepherds pastore
Egitto

who
to

inhabited the

of

Egypt, seem

have been the

(259)


PREPOSITIONS.
first

183

to

devote themselves to the contemplation of the stars. consacrare

giant. The Swiss gigante Svizzero (332) on the Neapolitans (with) cannons loaded with
a -wind-mill for a

Don Quixote mistook

Chisciotte prendere
soldiers
fired

far fuoco
grape-shot.

In a short time there

The
*

(332)
will be

more steam-boats than

sailing-vessels.

(332) musical scale was invented by Guido, a

scala

(332)

native of Arezzo, called Aretino.

We

are

happy

to hear that

(328)

you are pleased with your new home. The road to Portici dimora (330) (329) crosses charming hills, covered with vines, from which (the
attraversare

(244)

ameno

(330)
Cristi,)
(is

vite

famous wine, called lagrima

made).

1(214)

Da, from.
333.

The

preposition da, from,

is

used to express the point

;

from which a person or thing departs or comes

idea of physical or moral
difference,

it

conveys an
derivation,

movement, separation,

and dependence.

Ex.
I will not go
I

Non voglio allontanarmi AaW&patria,

Vengo dalla mia villa, Essendo incalzati dal
difesero alla meglio,

away from

my

country.
tliey

nemico,

si

come from my country-seat. Being pressed by the enemy,

defended themselves the best they could. Satiety springs from pleasures.
to express

way

La

noia nasce dai piaceri sfrenati.

334.
to,

Da

is

employed with verbs of motion

at,
is

when

the object towards which the motion

is

directed

person.

Ex.
Next day James went
I will take

Ud seguente Giacomo and da Teresa,

Questa sera vi condurr da lei. Ieri venni da voi per pregarvi "gassare oggi da me,
di

to Teresa.

you this evening to her. Yesterday I called on you to beg of you to call on me to-day.

184

niEPOSITlONS.
if

But
person

the object of the

is

movement
am

is tlie

place or house of the

who
casa,

going,

it is

necessary to say a casa.

I
zio, or

Ex.
liouse.

Vado a

Voi andate a casa di vostro da vostro zio,

You

going home. are goiug to your uucle's

335.

We
;

say partir di Napoli, di Firenze, dalla

citt

being

understood

but

we must

say, partir

da

lui,

partir da loro.

Ex.
Abbiamo
ricevuto lettere di Londra,
| I

We

have received

letters

from Lon-

don.

336.

The employment

tensive, as the following

of the preposition da is varied and exexamples will show. Ex.

Abbiamo da

vivere,

beneh

non

We
He

abbiamo molto

da. fare,

Combatt da leone, e si condusse sempre da galantuomo. Datemi da scrivere, da leggere, Dite da vero or davvero uri azione da mariuolo, Eqli fa da dottore, da medico,

have enough to live, although we have not much to do. fouglit like a lion, and always acted like a good man. Give me something to write, to read. Do you speak seriously ? It is a knavish trick.

Cfiulia dalle bianche braccia.

Lo ha

trattato da amico.

He plays the doctor. Julia of the white arms. He has treated him as a friend.
I

L'ho fatto da me, Levarsi da dosso un peso, L'errare da uomo, Non cosa da ridere, Uomo da poco, da niente. Uomo da bene or dabbene, Vi parlo da padrone, e voi dovreste ubbidirmi da servo, Vi giuro da tiomo d'onore, Venite qua da me,

have done
err is

it

alone.

To To
It

get rid of a burden.

human.

A A

is no laughing matter. good-for-nothing man.

good or I speak to
I swear to

worthy man. you as a master, and yen

should obey

Come

me as a servant. you as an honest man. over "here near me.

EXERCISE LXXX.

Sympathy
situation

is

said to

arise

from an imaginary change of

our compassion.

simpatia (214)

nascere

with

those

who

excite
eccitare

called

on
(334)

him

to-day, but

he was not at home.

Sublime and

passare
pas-


PREPOSITIONS.
sionate eloquence

185

was introduced into Eome not many years

of Cicero,

before the

birth
nascita

by the two Gracchi, by Crassus, and

Crasso

by

Sulpitius.

The

first

Sulpizio

pheasants came from the banks of the riva fagiano

Phasis, a river of Colchis. Colchide

France

is

separated from Italy by

the Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees.

A2)e

He
(336)

lived

as

Pireneo
as a Christian.

hero,

and died

He

did

it

alone.

(336)

went

to

your house, and asked your servant to give

2 1

me something
as
friends.

to

eat

and drink.

They

have not treated us

The

(336)

(336)

Pyramids served as (burying-places) for the kings.- -Princes sepoltura Piramide should punish as Christian rulers, and not as executioners.
(280)

(336)
arises
free

carnefice

From tyranny

government, and from the abuse

of

tirannia nascere
liberty despotism returns.

Con, with.
337,

The

preposition con conveys an idea of company, and

points out the

Venite

means by which a thing

noi,

is

achieved.

Ex.

a desinare con

Spaventare con minacce,

Il pittore

Come and dine with us. To terrify with threats.

lo

lavora col pennello, scultore collo scarpello,

meglio sdrucciolar
colla lingua,
coi

piedi che

It is better to slip

painter works with a brush, and a sculptor with a chisel. with the feet than with the tonsue.

This preposition nouns mi,

se.
ti,

is

often contracted with the personal pro-

si

7neco, teco, seco, instead of

con me, con

te,

con

Ex. N


186
Se varrai meco,
egli

PREPOSITIONS.
ritorner teco,
If thou comest with me, he will rcturn with thee.

In, into, in.

338. This preposition indicates station, time, space,

Dimorare
in citt,
i

zc.

Ex.

To

live in town.

Imparo Vltaliaiw

Eprofessore in quella Universit, in due anni,

He He

professor in that University. learned Italian in two years.

is

339. Tlie article

is

often joined with the preposition

in,
:

when
em-

we wish
surface.

to

convey the idea of anything being inside

in

ployed alone, on the contrary, often implies something on the

Ex.
Fish

I pesci
Aveva

vivono nel mare, L'uccello non nella gabbia,

The

live in the sea. bird is not in the cage.

II pranzo
il

in tavola.

cappello in testa,

un amilo

Dinner is on the table. He had on his hat, and wore a ring

on his finger.

in dito.

840. In speaking of going to a country, the English preposition to is expressed

by

in.

Ex.
I

Come

o in

se in Francia, o in Ispagna, alcun altro luogo lontano,

volesse,

As

if

he wished to go to France, or
Sixain,

to
|

or

any other distant

andar

B.

place.
is

341. In Italian, the preposition in

often used without renit

dering the definite article which accompanies

in English, as

may be

seen from the following examples

in

Vivere in campagna, Essere in giardino, in cucina,

salotto,

To live in the country. To be in the garden, in

in the parlour.

the kitchen,

Avere

in

mano.

To have
EXERCISE LXXXI.

in the

hand.

Our propensity

to

sympathize with sorrow

simpatizzare dolore

is

very strong, and

our inclination to sympathize with joy very weak.

gioia
for operas

The
to

taste

gusto

was introduced

into

France by Cardinal Mazarin.

is

When wo

Gnd no happiness

in ourselves, it

useless

seek

it

inutile (34)

PREPOSITIONS.
elsewhere.
altrove.

187

There

is

grandeur in the works of nature which grandezza

the

art cannot

attain.

Amongst

Eomans,
sea.

parricides v/ere

raggiungere
(tied up) in a sack,

and thrown into the

gettare (339)

The Chinese have

me
to

legare

sacco
first

made

the

step in
jKisso

many branches
ramo

of civilisation, but they

have never made the second.

Will

you come with

is

France
snake
gilded

next
in

summer
his hand.

Esculapius
white

(337) represented

(340) with a

serpente (339)
staff,

Esculapio (238) The royal standard of France was a stendardo

with

dorare

asta

(flowers-de-luce.)

silk flag seeded with di (72) bandiera spargere not If you do find them in the garden, go

(57) giglio.
_

into the house

and

(248) look for them. cercare *

One
(213)

(341)
learns with one's

own
into

experience, never with that of others.

The Seine
little

(156)
falls

Senna shoccare
the sea.

The

Chinese eat with

two

ivory or avorio

ebony
ebano

sticks,

which they

(51) stecco

handle with great dexterity. maneggiare

Per, for^ through,

342.

by, in.

per expresses motion through a place, and conveys an idea oi passage in the moral and physical analogy of the term. Ex,
preposition

The

Ora viaggia per la Francia, dopo aver fatto un giro per l'Italia,
Ilo ricevuto questo posta.

He

is

now

travelling

in

France,

after
Italy.

having made a tour through

danaro per

la

Un'idea strana mi pasfb per la mente, Per pi giorni stava malissimo,

I have received this money through the post. strange idea came into my head.

For several davs he waE vcrv

ill.


188
343. Per
action
;

PREPOSITIONS.
is

also used to express tlie motive or intention of

an

it

may sometimes be
in,

used to translate the English words

as, about,

from,

out of ; and in

some Go

cases,

when

joined to an

infinitive, supplies the place of the

present participle.
about your business.

Ex.

Andate per

fatti vostri,
risa,

Per soverchia letzia, Per non poter tener le

From
ing.

Not being
I
to,

great joy. able to keep from laugh

in the street.

L'ho incontrato per

la strada,

met bim

344.

When

the preposition

which precedes an
to,

infinitive,
of, it

has in English the meaning of be translated by per.

in

order

on account

must

Ex.
1 will (lo you.
it

Lo fari)

per non dispiacervi,

in order not to displease

Sono in prigione per aver rubato,

They

are in

prison on account of

having robbed.

345.
is

The
:

following are a few of the expressions in which per

employed

Andar Andar

Avete per nidla

Gli fu offerto

per il dottore, per terra, per mare, ci che io vi dico,

]peT

To go for the doctor. To go by land, by sea. You do not heed what I

It

say to you.

parte del

re.

pesci guizzano per mezzo delle pinne,

dieci scellini per uno,

was offered to him in the king's name. Fish swim with the aid of their fins.

Levarsi per tempo,

Pagare

To rise early. To pay ten shillings

I will

a-piece, a-hcad.

Per amor suo lo faro. Per mezzo i boschi, Per modo or via di diporto. Risposero per V appunto gli uni come
gli altri,

do

it for

his sake.

In the midst of woods.

By way

of

amusement.
alike.

They answered exactly

Si spaccia per dotto. Vendere per minuto, Viaggiare per tutto il

He
i

pretends to be learned.
retail.

To To

travel all over the world.

EXERCISE LXXXII.

When

the family of the

triumph through the streets trionfo (342)

Macedon was led in Macedonia menare of Eome, by Paulus Emilius, their

of

King

Paolo

Emilia


PREPOSITIONS.

189

misfortunes attracted the attention of the Romans, more tlian the sventura attrarre

glory of

tlieir

conqueror.

True
to

generosity sacrifices,

in

some

measure, one's

own

interest

advance that of others.

passport.
to

He
of

(344)

was

arrested for not having his

(262)

passaporto.
take place.

when

the marriage

is

to

us Write (344) The shipwrecked

tell

old
antichit

naufrago (243) (280) (244) went about the streets begging and singing, with a
(343)

mendicare
their neck, on
collo

tablet
tavoletta

hung

round

which were painted

dipingere
to compassion.

appendere intorno a (150)

their misfortunes, in order to

move the
for

public

(344) examination {Non pass a) (150) esame

pubblico

He

lost

his

not having answered cor-

rectly in

mathematics and
and out of love

logic.

distress,

(for

last, out of pity for their Alia foie (34:3) di you) who sent them, I gave them

At

vostro

a pound a piece.
(345)

The father
enemy

of Frederick the Great of Prussia

was the

avowed
dichiarare

of poets

having read some verses

written on the door of his palace, he sent for the poet, and

ordered him to go about his business, and leave Prussia.

(345)

Su
Oil,

or Sopra, on, upon, over.

346. These prepositions are used indiscriminately to translate

upon, over, and imply

rest, reliance,

both in the moral and

literal signification.

Ex.
I

Riposiamoci svAVerha, Riposate svi[\& mia parola, Col pastrano sopra le spalle,

Let us rest on the grass. Eely on my word.

With a

cloak over his shoulders.

190 347

I'REPOSITIONS

Su, super, np, conveys an idea of elevation

su, in su,

expresses tendency towards a certain point.

Ex.

Su per la collina, State sa, In euWalba,

Sulla sera,

Up
At

the

hill.

Stand up.

Towards dawn.
the
fall

of evening.

348. Sopra
than, against.
Ve7iti mit/lia

is

often used in Italian to express beyond,

more

Ex.
Twenty
milea beyond Florence. She loved her son more than her
life.

sopra Firenze,

Ella amava il figlio sopra la vita sua, Ordinarono un grandissimo esercito per andare sopra i nemici, B.

They organized a very numerous army to go against the enemy.

Fra

or tra, between, amongst, in the midst of.

349. These two prepositions are alike in meaning, and indicate

connexion between two or more objects.

Cominciarono
siglio,

Ex.
to consult friends.

tra loro

ad aver

corir

They hegan
selves.

among them-

Fra due amici,

Vivere
fi'a i

Between two

piaceri,

To

live

amidst pleasures.

They

also

mark a space
objects.

of time between

two

dates, or space

between two

Ex.
I will

Vi pagher) fra due mesi, Tra la libreria e la camera da letto, vi era uno sjiogliatoio ed il bagno,

pay you in two months. Between the library and the bedroom, there was a dressing-room and a
bath room.

350. Fi^a or

tra,

used before one object, implies being in the

midst

of,

being surrounded by.

Ex.
Then almost
I
tired,

Poi quasi stanca, tra la pi folta erba postami a giacere, mi posava, Vi vidi per un momento fra la calca,
e subito vi persi di vista,

amidst the thickto rest.

est grass I lay

down

saw you
you.

a moment in the midst of the crowd, and then lost sight of

for

351. To speak to one^s-self

is

translated

by parlare

tra se.

Ex.
Egli aveva il costume di piasseggiar solo, e parlar tra se ad alta voce,
1

He

used to walk aloud to himself.

alone,

speadng


FKEPOSITIONS.

191

EXERCISE LXXXIII.

Amongst
(349

the gods, Jupiter was the

first.

Jupiter

is

frequently

(22)

Giove
;

represented with an eagle on the top of his sceptre aquila rappresentato cima scettro
ivory
avorio (3)
sceptre, also

and an

surmounted by an eagle, was carried by

sormontare
victorious.

the

Eomans when they returned

murder was committed at the break of

omicidio

In palace day. have read

that
I

(239)

that

(347)

Henry
his

iv.,

King

of France, used to

amuse himself by carrying

children on

his

(280) back. A country house, situated in the

(150) spalla p. midst of groves and flowers.

(350)
distance,
boschetto

There

is

a flower which, at a

{da

resembles a lontano) rassomigliare

flower.

He

bee resting on the cup of a ape (266) riposare calice often speaks to himself in the street. Amongst the

(351)
Iroquois, the language with

which they express

their resolution

Irocchese
of

linguaggio

making war against an enemy is, muover a nation." Heather grows up the mountains, and

" Let us go and eat that

at a distance

crescere (347)

gives

them a purple hue. At the purpureo tinta.

appear.
sortir fuori.

fall

of evening,

bats

and

pipistrello

owls begin to
civetta

352.

The

following

is

list

of prepositions which require to

or da, or the

be followed by the segnacasi

jective,

di, a,

noun

in the ob-

which, as will be seen,

;

may

often be promiscuously
;

em-

ployed

di

is

generally used before a personal pronoun

192
Accanto,
allato,

PREPOSITIONS.
accosto,
al, \\

presso, vicino, dol,

appresso, fuoco,
di

Near, by

tlie

side of the

fii^.

Addosso ad uno, A guisa, a modo, a foggia, mezza luna, Al di l del, dal mare, Al di qua dei, dai monti,
Alla volta
di

On
una

one's person or back. In the form of, like a half moon.

Beyond the

sea.

On

this side of the mountains.

Firenze, Appi della colonna, Avanti, davanti, innanzi, dinanzi,

alla, la

Towards Florence. At the foot of the column.

In the presence of the Queen.

regina.

Circa venti, or a venti miglia. Contro di me. Contro al, il nemico, Dentro, entro al, il baule. Dietro alla, \a, porta. Dirimpetto, in faccia, di fronte
chiesa.

About twenty

miles.

Against me. Against the enemy, lu the trunk. Behind the door.
alla

Opposite the church.

After you. After breakfast. Until Easter.
I will accompany you as far as Paris, Out of the house. Round the table.

Dopo Dopo
Fuori

di voi.
la colazione.

Fino, sino, infino, insino, a Pasqua, Vi accompagner fino a Parigi,

di casa,

Intorno, d'intorno, attorno alla tavola, Incontro a me. In mezzo alla, della strada, Lungi, lontano, discosto dal proprio paese. Lungo alla, la spiaggia, Oltre a, di ci, Prima, avanti di me. Secondo, giusta la vostra opinione.

Towards me.
In the middle of the street. Far from one's own country.

Along the
Before me.

shore.

Besides, moreover.

Senza danaro. Senza di me, senza me. Sopra del, al, il letto, Verso il cominciar di primavera.
Verso, inverso,
di,

According to your opinion. Without money. Without me.

On

the bed.
of spring.

a me.

Towards the beginning Towards me.

EXERCISE LXXXIV.

Numa

Pompilius, the founder of the ancient religion of Rome,

Pompilio
pretended to be
near

fondatore

advised
consigliare

by the nymph Egeria,

whom

he met

a mysterious fountain.

The

ninfa
fleet

set

sail

towards the
(352)

(352)

flotta

(286)

Black Sea

a flock of splendid birds. (352) stormo

like

Hospitality was a
ospitalit

CONJUNCTIONS,
sacred duty whicli

193

the Caledonians not only practised towards

sacro
friends,

Caledone
but also towards their enemies.
not far from the

my

house, and

castle.

The church The bees

title

(352)
is

opposite

(352)
flew

castello

ape svolazzare
of Philippics to

round the
(352)

roses.

Demosthenes
Demostene

gave the

Filippica

the orations he wrote against Philip of

Filippo
in imitation of

Macedon and Cicero, Cicerone Macedonia

;

him, gave the same

name

to those

he wrote against

Mark Anthony.
Jifarco Antonio

They have
a
hill,

built

a country house near the

fabbricare

sea, at the foot of

about thirty miles from town.

(59)
led
to

Accordbirraio

(352) ing to the king's order, they were

(352)

Palermo.

The brewer

menare

makes beer and

sells

it

wholesale
all'ingrosso

or retail, according to the

wants of his customers.

avventore

Murat

inhabited the palace Elyseabitare

Bourbon
Alps.

until his departure for Naples.

The lands beyond

(352)

the

partenza (352) (352) The vineyards and olive-groves along the Arno.
vigneto
oliveta

CHAPTER

XII.

CONJUNCTIONS.
353.
difficult.

The
is

use of the conjunction pure., yet,

is

varied

and
for

Pure

often used instead of the adverb only,

and ne pure

not only, not even.

Ex.

194

CONJUNCTIONS.
1

^ avvenne pure una volta, ma se ne sariano potute annoverar mille,

B.

It

happened not only once, but we might reckon a thousand times.

In phrases which express opposition, pure

ever.

is

used

for

how-

Ex.
j)ure

Ma,

arrabbiato,

non

volea

sentir ragione.

But he, however, being enraged, would not listen to reason.

Pur troppo

signifies only too.

|

Ex.
It is only too true.

pur

trojypo vero,

Pure

often translates the adverbs also, even, likeunse.

Ex.

Eqli pure /if messo a morte, Tu pure mi abbandoni ! Tu vuoi ch'io rinnovelli Disperato dolor che'l cor mi preme, Gi pur pensando j)ria ch'io ne favelli, D.

He

also

was put

to death.

Even thou forsakest me. Thou wilt have me renew the

des-

perate grief, which oppresses my heart already, even thinking of it before I speak.

Pure

is

often used as an expletive., to give

more

force to the

sense of the phrase.

Ex.

Mangiate pure,

Do
si

pray eat.
true
affair
it
is,

Ed

pur vero, che l'uomo non contenta mai. La cosa and pur cos'i,

How
The

that

man

is

never

content.

happened just

so.

354. Se,

if,

whether, which in English governs the indicative,

requires, in Italian, the verb to be in the subjunctive,

certainty or condition

is

expressed, and in the future

If the action

when unwhen the

present,

action

is

future.

(See 253, 248.)

is to

is

or implies certainty, the indicative

Se Se Se
il

be employed.

Ex.

ci

soccorso fosse giunto in tempo. pagherete alla fine del mese.

If the aid had arrived in time. If you pay us at the end of the

month.
i nostri antenati non avevano tante ricchezze, essi avevano certamente meno vizii della presente

If our forefathers

had not so much wealth, they had certainly fewer vices than the present generation.
it is

Se

generazione, io dico ci j^er vostro bene,

If I say that

for

your good.

355. The

following conjunctions require almost always

:

verb

to

be in the subjunctive

the

CONJUNCTIONS.
Accnoche, -Ji,
he, Affinch.

195
che,

order that. Perch, e, ) ,. , _^^^_^ condition A condizione che, > npon tliat, provided patto che, [if. Purch, i
.
.

Un

Dato

admitting that.

Di tema

che,

Fer tema che, ) .-,. Fino a tanto che,

for fear that, lest,

'

till

such time

AiHinti che.

Anzi

che,
J-

befon
unless.

Prima che, J A meno che, except,

Bench, Ancorch,

as, until, as > Finch, long as. Sinch, J Nel caso che, in case that. Non che, not that. Nonostante che, notwithstanding. supposing, proPosto che, "I that. Posto il caso che, >- vided

) although. )

Supposto

Quantunqu ique,
Conciosiach, ach,

\
,

che,

in case.

.}if;incase.
_

Avvegnach,

j^ ^^^^ ^,^^^^

Quando

che,

whenever,

if,

though.

EXERCISE LXXXV.
"

May

I die

if

I do not revenge myself on you," said

(354)
Euclid's brother to him (a Euclide suo fratello)
force
;

vendicare " and T," replied Euclid, "

if

I do not

you

to love

me

again."

The

Apostles received the gift of Apostolo

to all the nations of

tongues in order that they

the earth.
blind.
cieco

might preach
predicare

They can write

(355)

(355)

pretty well although they are quite

As long

(102)

(355)

(190)

as the Tarquins lived, there

was union between

Tarquinio
nolile

the

Eoman

people and the nobles, as the latter feared a recon-

(163)
scacciare

ciliation

between the people and the banished tyrants.

I
rejoice that

Yes, he

replied,

my

son

is

(231)
provided he
(355)
is

great in the face of men, * faccia a

the eyes of God. Although Phocion a Focione (355) was elected general by the Athenians fully forty times, he was
in

good

hen
nevertheless

condemned

to

death by them, and

was not even

(218)
2(353)

nondimeno

196

CONJUNCTIONS.

permitted (to him) tbe right of burial. Regulus kept only ^accordare sepoltura Regolo mantenere
too well the promise that he gave to the Carthaginians, although

Cartaginese

(355)

he knew (that
the enemy.

a) certain

death

awaited
attendere

him

at his return to

Vespasian
[gli

was all but condemned Vespasiano [corse pericolo di essere)

to

death, because

he happened to yawn whilst Nero was venne fatto) sbadigliare Nerone [237)

singing in a theatre at Eome.

If

it

is

not true,

it

is

well

(354)

invented, says an Italian proverb. If we did not succeed, trovare riuscire proverbio (354) was not our fault.

it

coljm

356. Ne. ..ne, neither... nor

fintantoch, fino
to
;

se non che., but, only ^cA, a che, unti] these conjunctions require the verb be accompanied by the negation. Ex.
;

Fintantocli non ahhia pi certe prove della sua capacit, Attendetemi finch io non ritorni, Non possedeva se non clie un piccolo
poderetto.

Wait

Until you liave surer proofs of bis capacity. for me till 1 return. He only possessed a little fami.

Non

si deve ne con pa parole n con azioni far danno al prossimo,

1

One
is

slioiild

not injure one's neig

bour either in word or deed.

357. Anzi,

this

conjunction

often used alone to signify

;

on

the contrary, with pleasure,

moreover
They

anzi che no signifies

i'ather.

Ex.
did not venture to aid him on the contrary, they exclaimed with the others that he was dead. Will you have a little asparagus?
;

Non

ardivano ad aiutarlo, anzi cogli altri insieme gridavano dici fosse morto, B.

Volete

due sparagi

Anzi mi far
gli

With
Vlio incontrato, anzi
Egli che
ricco anzi

pleasure.

ho parlato,

met him, and, moreover, I spoke

to him.
is

che no,

He who

rather rich.

358.
tions

The

following are the most

common

conjunctive locu-

CONJUNCTIONS.
Olt radiche.

197

Almeno, at

least.

A fine

di, in
is.

order

to.

Cio, that

besides that. Oltre che, 0...0, oppure.. .oppure. (either Ovvero... ovvero, |...or.
Ossia... ossia.

Cio a dire, that is to say. Ci non di meno, 'J Ci nvn per tanto, neveri Ci non ostante, however.
Contuttoci,

Di

J
)

maniera che, Talmente che,

che,
")

>
]

so that.
in conclu-

In modo
Infine,

in short,
sion.
)

In .wmma, Mentre che,

Tanto
die,
io,

whilst, as long as.

-,

Perche, why, because. Peroch, ) Perciocch, > because. Imperciocch, ) Poich, seeing that. \ since, Giacche, / after. Quaid' cos, in that case. Quand'ecco, when, all at once. F.econdo che, according as. Suhito che, Tosto che, > as soon as.

Appena

che,

)
) \

Neppure

&c., nor I either.

,

Tanto jn, so much the moro.

Tuttavia, Tuttavolta,
nevertheless, yet, at all events, however.

Nemmeno

voi, &c.

nor you either.

ever.

Nondimeno,
Nulladimeno,

\ nevertheless, how)

EXERCISE LXXXVI.

The
soldier.

inventor of gunpowder was neither a hero nor a schioppo (15) polvere eroe (356)

Danger
it

does

not

dannt
intimidire

the war-horse
destriero
fire to his

on

the

contrary,

(357)
(idle

appears only to add new aggiungere (232)

courage.

An
;

man) counts

the minutes, whilst a (busy

man)

scarcely

ozioso

counts the years.

Metaphors
metafora

(358)

industrioso

may

be used in every style

(214)

however, we find them oftenest either in familiar language or in linguaggio (358) (358) poetry. In short, languages always preserve the impress of the ritenere impronta (358)

times in which they have been formed.

It is a great misfortune

neither to have talent enough to speak well, nor judgment enough

(34)
to

be

silent.

Since you
(358)

senno
are not able to defend your opinion, you

(288.)


198

DELLA INTERIEZIONE.
it.

must not advance

No

(202)

philosopher ever described a republic dipingere filosofo

either so beautiful or so just as that

which was instituted by the

(239)
istituire

(358)
Apostles,

In that case yon are free to do as you

(358)
2

like

best.
1

As

3(236)

soon as a

new

fashion appears,

however
(212)

ridiculous,

we

are ready

(358) to adopt

it.

moda The imitation

ridicolo

of evil always exceeds the example,

male
whilst the imitation of good
is

superare

(358)
free-will,

always rather inferior. (357) so that he can do good and avoid evil.
bene

Man has

volont (358)

CHAPTER

XIII.

DELLA INTERIEZIONE.
359.
affetti

Le

interiezioni esprimono sorpresa, gioia, dolore, e vari

dell'animo.

Le pi

usitate sono le seguenti.

0, Oh, Oi, Oime.

me

beato sojjra gli altri amanti.

P. B.

Oh

liberalit di

Natan quanto

se'tu maravigliosa.

Oime

lassa me, dolente me, in che

mal ora
la

iacqui f

B.

Talora, singolarmente nelle espressioni di dolore, dopo l'addiettivo, che

accenna la miseria,

si

pone

persona in dativo, per

ch'io

propriet di linguaggio.
pili

Oh poverino

me

non sar mai

buono a nidla.
e

Firenzuola.
frappone talvolta alcuna voce dinotante mag-

Fra Ahi
Ahi
B.

mi

si

giore effetto.
lassa

me

ch'assai chiaro conosco,

come

io

ti

sia

poco cara

Deh, Interiezione deprecativa che corrispondo

all'inglese />ra^,

DEL RIPIENO.
suole .iver dopo di se
il

199
vuo'tii

vocativo
?

Deh, amico mio, perch

entrare in questa fatica

B.

Guai, Interiezione
il

di minaccia, o di dolore

che ha dopo di se

Guai a me die mi manc quello che ]n m'era di bisogno. Passavanti. Cos, si adopra a modo d'interiezione, e in buona e in cattiva
dativo
:

parte

Cos cresca
s'

il

bel lauro in fresca riva.

P.

E cos vada,

pur mio

destino.

P.

DEL KIPIENO.
360. Chiamansi Ripieno alcune particelle completive proprie
della lingua Toscana, le quali
alla tela

non sono assolutamente necessarie

;

grammaticale, che potrebbe stare senz'esse

ma

che

per accrescono all'orazione forza, grazia, e ornamento.

Noi

faremo soltanto menzione di alcune delle pi comuni.

Ecco^ Questa particella

clausola, e

si

suole

adoperare in principio di
al-

d forza

al parlare,
:

mostrando tolora prontezza

io

l'operazione, ed affetto

Ecco,

non so ora dir di

tio,

per
al

tal

donna me n'hai pregato. B. Bene, Questa particella accresce forza di espressione corso La donna disse : bene, io il far. B.
:

dis-

Talvolta

si
:

trova preceduta dalla particella

s

ed ora

Disse

Calandrino Bello,

bene.

B. B.
:

Or bene, come faremo?

si

adopera addietivamente come ripieno di forza

he.'

Le

port cinquecento

fiorini d'oro.

B.

Pure, aggiunge evidenza. La cosa and pur cos. B. Gi, aggiunge forza Ora fossero essi pur gi disposti a venire.
:

B.

Mica, Punto, aggiungono

dir,

eificacia alla

negazione

Una ne

non mica d'uomo di poco affare. B. Madonna, Tetaldo non punto morto, ma vivo, e sano. B. Egli, Ella, si adoprano per ornamento, e sono sempre invariabili Egli non sono ancora molti anni passati, che in Firenze fu una giovane. B.
:

200
Ella non andr Esso,
si

dell'apostrofo.
cos.

B.
i

adopra indeclinabile in ambedue

generi e numeri,

dopo

la particella con^ avanti alcuni pronomi, e

anche senza.

Fatti alla finestra e chiamala, e d che venga a desinare con

esso noi.

B.
:

Oka, si adopra per ripigliare, o continuare il discorso Come non sapete voi quello, che questo voglia dire f Ora io ve l'ho udito
dire mille volte.

B.

Le
mi

particelle 3Ii, Ci, Ti, Vi, Si, Ne, si trovano

accompagnate
:

ai verbi

senza necessit,
le

ma

per sola propriet di linguaggio

Io

credo, che

suore sian tutte a dormire.

ti

B.
n' caro.

Che

tu con noi

rimanga per questa sera

B. B.
lin-

Chetamente ne and per la camera

infino alla finestra.

Non,
guaggio

si
:

pone talvolta dove nulla opera per propriet di

Diragli da mia parte che
si

guardi di non aver troppa

non credere alle favole di Giannotto. B. Uno, Quell'uno, quest'uno, e simili, dove la voce uno di pi, Deh e solamente accenna con maggior evidenza, e precisione B. desti tu a tutte, o a quest'uno, quella fede che a me donasti ? E caramente accolse a se quell'ima. P. Tutto, aggiunge energia La donna udendo costui parlare, il quale ella teneva mutolo, tutta stord. B. Tutto a pie fattosi loro
creduto, o di
:
:

incontro, ridendo disse.

B.

DELL'APOSTROFO.
361. Chiamasi Apostrofo quel piccolo segno a guisa di virgola

che suol porsi

trassegno di
della vocale
lo indica.

al termine, o al principio

d'una parola come conCos: grand' eroe

mancamento
e,

di lettere.

manca

e l'apostrofo posto al termine della tronca parola

Gli Accademici della Crusca nella Prefazione al Vocabolario

insegnano che non sempre in mancanza di una o pi lettere

si

deve far uso dell'apostrofo

e che quelle parole che soglionsi

troncare anche quando vengon seguite da consonante, non vanno

dell'apostkofo.

201
:

segnate dell'apostrofo n pur quando incontransi con vocale

perci cuor^ parlar^ pensier e altre simili voci che
troncare, seguane o vocale, o consonante,
trofo
si

si

possono

scrivono senza apos-

anche innanzi a vocale.

si

apostrofo, poich

dovr scrivere
della vocale a,

un uomo senza ma non si un anima senza il contrassegno della mancanza non potendosi scrivere un donna, ma ima donna;
Quindi
si

scrive
libro,

pu anche scrivere un

&c.

quindi converr scrivere un'anima facendo uso dell'apostrofo.

Le

parole della

Lingua Toscana
:

finiscono tutte in vocale,

da

pochi monosillahi in fuori

per,

in,

non, con, &c.

Ond', che

sovente, o per togliere alcuna asprezza di suono, o per render pi

concatenata, e robusta l'orazione

si

troncano

le

parole in

fine, e

segnansi di apostrofo.
I

nomi

Italiani

golare allorch s'incontrano con

ammettono generalmente l'apostrofo nel sinuna vocale. Come otiest'uomo,

:

fedeV amico.

Non
essendo
canti,

per nel plurale, se non quando

le

due vocali che s'incon-

trano, siano le stesse.

Quindi bisogner scrivere onesti uomini

:

le due vocali differenti ma si potr per scrivere dold inpiagge erbose avendo luogo l'incontro fra due i e due e.

Le

parole sulle quali

si

trattiene alcun poco la voce

non
si

si

troncano, e ci avviene delle parole ultime dei periodi, membri, &c.

Le parole che hanno

cano, n
si

l'accento in sull'ultima sillaba

:

non

tron-

dice per esempio

pari' onestamente per parl ones-

tamente.

La

parola che con tutti

suoi composti, bench, perch, &c.,

in sull'ultima sillaba, pure
:

quantunque abbiano l'accento

contraffatta della persona.

vanno

eccettuate, solendo talvolta ricever l'apostrofo

Bench'effe /osse

B.
si

Le

parole che finiscono in a non

troncano innanzi a conso-

nante, eccettuatone Suora quando sta per aggettivo, usata

sostantivo non

come
i

ammette troncatura
:

e l'avverbio ora con tutti

suoi componenti
meile

Non

intendo, disse la Suora, se

pi

specijca-

non parlate.

Passavanti.

Vide correre suor Maria alla

B.

sua

cella.

Firenzuola.

Talor sua dolce vista rasserena.

202

dell'apostrofo.
le

Innanzi a consonante possono troncarsi

in e senz'accento
;

parole che finiscono

tolto

purch l'ultima consonante che rimane,

/,

via Ve sia una di queste,

?i,

r, e la

seguente parola non cominci

da un

lavato.

impura Non si vuol dire, B. Datole mangiar pan Essendo una mattina il marito di lei cavalcato in alcun luogo per dovere stare alcun giorno. B. L'avverbio come, la voce nome, ed i plurali dei nomi che finiscono in e non si troncano. Quindi non si pu dire pen^gravi
s
:

B.

per pene gravi

conosciuto.

ri

com^ state, nom'conosciuto, per come state,

nome

Le

voci

grande. Frate quando stanno per addiettivi, e preil

cedono immediatamente
innanzi a consonante
portato aveva. B.
ficatore.
:

loro sustantivo, perdono l'ultima sillaba

ci,

Gli convenne fare gran mercato di

oltre

che

B.

ad ogni altro, grande, e presto versiFra Puccio non andava mai fuor della terra. B.
Fu,
i si

Le

parole che finiscono in

possono non di rado troncare

innanzi a consonante.
di modo. B,

Si cominciarono
mo, no, ro,

ad

avere in odio fuor

troncano dell'ul-

Molte parole

finienti

in lo,

so, si

tima vocale innanzi a consonante.

Soglion questi tranquilli,
e lieti

La sera

desiare, odiar l'aurora

amanti. P.

Andiam, che

la

vii.

lunga ne sospinge. D.
mettiate. B.

Questo far

io volentieri, sol

che voi pro-

Le

parole che finiscono

il

Ilo,

mio,
e

si

trovano spesso troncate

grande della persona. B. Vagliami il lungo studio e'I grande amore. Che m'hiin fatto cercar Le voci corallo, cristallo, ballo, snello, non si lo tuo volume. D. trovano mai tronche.
dell'ultima sillaba.

Bel giovane,

La

voce santo innanzi a vocale perde Vo, e riceve l'apostrofo,

si

innanzi a consonante

tronca dell'ultima sillaba purch stia per

addiettivo, e sia innanzi

immediatamente
Venutosene per
lo

al

suo sustantivo, e

questo sia
infino

nome

proprio

corso degli Adimari

Vescovo, e

a San Giovanni. B.
il

Uno

antichissimo nostro

Cittadino, Zanobo

Santo.

Salvini.

Andiam

noi con esso lui

Roma ad

impetrare dal Sauto Padre. B.

/ miracoli

di Sant'-

Antonio.

dell'accrescimento delle parole.

203

Le

voci dell'infinito dei verbi

si

possono troncare deirultima

vocale innanzi a consonante, ed innanzi a vocale, sostitxtendovi

l'apostrofo.

Simili troncature per s'incontrano rade volte nei

buoni Autori, e debbonsi solamente praticare, quando l'orecchio

lo consiglia
:

veggendo se non poter ritornare^ in tanto mut

e

V animo, che mimo pi fiero Ghibellino,

a Guelfi avversario, fu

come

lui.

B.

DELL'ACCRESCIMENTO DELLE PAROLE.

362. Nella Lingua Toscana sovente
si

accrescono le parole in

principio, o in fine, o per togliere l'asprezza, che nasce dall'in-

contro di alcune consonanti, o per empiere

l'iato,

che risulta dal

concorso delle vocali.

Quando
appresso,

la parola finisce

in

consonante, e quella che viene

comminci da

s segi;ita

da un'altra consonante,
i,

si

pu

accrescere la seconda parola in principio d'un

la pronunzia
:

per raddolcir

Voi mi avete
e, o,

colto in iscambio.

B.

Di

scoglio in

iscoglio

andando. B.
innanzi a parola che cominci da vocale,
particella su in simil
le

Le
si

particelle a,

soglion talvolta accrescere di

si

caso

accresce di
e

un d ; et la un r: Vi cominciarono
ad adorarlo. B.
Viotto

genti

s.

andare, e

ad accender lumi,
fiumicello.

Ed

ivi

presso correva un
B.

B.

Senza far

ad amico, od a parente.

Radunare
Segni.

ogni mese la banda del suo quartiere in sur

una piazza.
sull'ul:

I Poeti accrescono talora le voci, che

hanno l'accento in
il

tima
ecco

sillaba,

di un'e, o di
tolse

un

o,

per far pi sonoro

verso

Ed
bel

pi andar mi

un
le

rio,

Che'n ver sinistra con sue picciole

onde Piegava,

Vei^ba, che'n

sua ripa uscio. D.

tenebre mie. P.

Che quasi un

sereno a mezsdl die

Fer

Nei Prosatori antichi s'incontrano sovente tali accrescimenti, e non sono scarse le occasioni ove garba anche oggi il terminare
con la
la terza voce singolare dei preteriti della seconda, e terza

coniugazione.

204

UECAriTULATOIlY EXERCIBEb

IIECAPITULATOKY EXERCISES ON ALL THE RULES.

ON THE CUSTOMS AND HABITS OF THE ANCIENT

CALEDONIANS.
The
ancient Caledonians esteemed highly
(54)
the body
;

the vigour of

Caledone
(25)

pregiare
(35)

alto

(310) limbs

majesty of person, robustness of the

race,

and
(60^)
tlieir

mcmhro

swiftness in the
velocit

constituted the principal merit of

corso

(245^)

heroes.

They
(213)

considered also as an important

anche
it

(140) quality, the pregio

2

strength of the voice, either because gagliardia (358)

strength,
or because
it

was a sign of personal

indizio
in

(was useful)
valer molto

frightening
atterrire

the

Sforza

enemies, and in inspiring (to) the soldiers with courage. *

quality was moreovernecessary for (to) them, to * inoltre

2*1
(131)
(263)

per

(262)

This

make themselves
(228)

heard,
inf.

in spite

of winds and torrents, in calling to

war a muldeserts.

dispetto

(25)

(17) (35)

titude of

men, who lived dispersed in groves and per bosco (51) (58) (177)
qualities nor military exploits

But neither physical

(356) llem to fame,
if

entitled
diritto

impresa dar

unaccompanied by quando andar disgiunto

justice

and humanity.
(17)

ON

Al.I,

THE

KUl.ES.

205
were generally

The

erne], the
pi.

tyrannical,
sopraffattore pi.

and the
title

violent,
pi.

stigmatized with the ignominious coiidannare

of " ignoble souls."

oscuro

The

principal and almost perpetual exercise of the Caledonians

perpetuo

was war, which they undertook

intraprendere

in order to revenge

an injury
torto

(186)
talora

done to the nation or to an individual, and sometimes merely

particolare

from the desire of conquest.

They always
(213)

sent to declare

war

per

(2452)

by a herald, and a curious ceremony was that of defying to per araldo sfidare torch on the top of battle a singer plants a lighted accendere {12) fiaccola cantore punta
:

a lance, shakes

it

to the

scuotere [12Q)
terra

wind, and then sticks it in the * quindi conficcare

If the
sfida

ground, accompanying this act with words of defiance.

herald intended to offer peace, he threw his lance at the foot of

(5)

him
(165)

to

whom

he was

sent

and the same act was amongst

it

{21A.) inviare

warriors a sign of friendship and reconciliation, or that the warrior acknowledged himself vanquished. darsi per vincere

indicated
unfor-

The

tunate or oppressed
pi.
pi.

who came

to ask

help
soccorso (307)

from the
attitude

(9)
pi.

generous and powerful, presented themselves in an

pi.

cdteggicnnento
;

suited

to their situation

convenevole

they held in one hand a shield scudo

;

covered with blood, and in the other a broken lance spezzare (306)
in sign of the death of their friends, the latter as

the former

(163)
of

an emblem per *

206
their misery

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES
and
despair.

If the chieftain resolved to

help
soccorrere

capo
them, he presented
(124)
(to)

them with a
*

shell,

symbol of hospitality

conca

and friendship.
In war they did
in

not

make

use of horses, which were scarce

(11) (12) a mountainous country.

^

They always

^paese

" mention far memion di

the

horses of the strangers," which shows that the few they hai straniero quello (171) (286)

were pillaged from the Britons or the Danes. Britanno predare sopra Danese
nevertheless, used
contuttocib (245^)
to

The

nobles,

go sometimes
talora

in

a chariot, either on

sopra

account of the dignity of their rank, or in order to be better disgrado (110) Their battles were fought with tinguished from their followers. seguace (214)
great ferocity, and without any discipline
(80) ferocia
;

night separated the

(25)
dividere

combatants, and to attack the enemy by night was considered a riputare (330) (34) base and ignoble action. The chase after war was the caccia d'animo basso (73)

common

occupation of the Caledonians, especially

speciale

as with

(311)

this exercise alone they provided for their subsistence,

*

and sup-

^solo

a
All the warriors, and

plied (to) the deficiency of agriculture.

particularly

mancanza young men,

giovane

(took pride) in being skilful in the inf. destro pregiarsi di

chase

hunter, and only exercised but he who was simply a [2,%) cacciatore (173) the vigour of his arm against (wild beasts), was despised as
;

fiera

ox ALL THE RULES.

cowardly and unwarlike, (so that) cosicch codardo iiibelle
this distinctive title

207

became a

term of reproach.
rimprovero.

The

greatest passion of the Caledonians

was singing.
(264)

The

carried farther enthusiasm for poetry and music could not be (214) spingere (322) (25) those rough but sensitive mountaineers. Their than by

(107) [facessero] (160) rozzo

sensibile
;

wars commenced and ended with song

songs were the most

seasoning of their banquets welcome convito aggradevole condimento

by singing they
(214)

rendered funereal honours

(to the

dead
^pl.

;)

the warriors sank to sleep

funebre

amidst songs to the sound of the harp

to

(231) with songs they went

(213)

meet

the guests,
ospite

the most distinguished

and honoured

[incontro a)

music in short had a share in '^ parte (358)

pleasing
;

all their affairs,

whether serious or
serio

be said, in (a certain) measure, the potere (214) qualche modo Caledonians led a musical life.
it

and

may

vivere sub. 2

'

After

abolishing

the Druids, they maintained the order of

Vabolimento di

Druido

the bards, or singers, which had been established amongst

them
to

bardo
in

the most remote times, and whose principal office

was

da

(180) celebrate in verse the most brilliant deeds of the nation, and of luminoso fatto
the heroes.
eroe.

Each
(192)

chief, or distinguished

member
;

of the tribe,
trib

bad

(in his service)

one or more of these bards

they followed

presso di se

208

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES

everywhere the chieftain on

(193)

whom

they depended, and performed

da
ambasciatore
(17)

the functions of ambassadors and heralds.

respected,

fare Their character was

and held sacred, even by usurpers and enemies

tenere sacro

usurpatore

and

their

were the most precious reward of the exploits canzone guiderdone (60*)
lays

of heroes, and were considered as the great consolation in death,

and the necessary

'^

requisite for happiness in the other

^

life.

(196)
of their most famous deeds, the

To

preserve the

memory

(60*) (344) conservare Caledonians used to erect a stone, which was called by them

rizzare (239) " The stone of memory^^ and this event was accompanied by (214) (16) songs and particular ceremonies. A warrior, followed by

(16)

one or more bards, repaired portarsi

(to the spot)

where the deed had

fatto
to
;

col

happened, the fame of which he desired

(244) then raised a torch over an alzare fiaccola (308) trophy of their descendant's
trofeo

immortalize he volere (280) immortalare

oak-trunk,

and with

this

he

intended to invite the shades of his ancestors to

(108|)
glory.

witness this riguardare

stone

Under the

was
(214)

placed
collocare

a sword and some

rings
cerchio (57)

of the enemy's shield

and the stone was

then

surrounded by a

heap

of earth.

All

cumulo (239) (321) attorniare di this proceeding was executed in cadence, the movements of the operazione (214) fare
warrior (being in accordance) with the musical notes of the bards, " ' a adattarsi

ON ALL THE RULKS,

209
is

who accompanied bim with

(123)
those " stones of

songs.

It

said that

some

of

memory"

are

still

(214)

(214) (to be found) in the north. trovare nord.

there are found no particular laws Concerning marriages, i 3 Intorno a maritaggio (57) * (214)
or ceremonies
2
;

and although the name of wife often

(256)
3 4

occurs,

it

itrovarsi
;

is

not clearly
2

known
1

in

what

it

differed from that of friend

(214) the simple

(255) wish of both parties formed or dissolved a marriage. volont matrimonio.

In marriages

approved of by the parents, congiunto confermare *

it

appears that a

(232)
to

dowry was given.

dote (239)
tain a divorce from

An
her

Irishwoman
Irlandese (64)

had the right

ob-

husband without alleging any other

allegare
*

(141)

reason than her will, and covdd, at the same time,

half of the
flocks.

claim the pretendere

Besides, abductions were frequent,

ratto
relations

and

(78)

greggia.

often followed

by murders amongst the

omicidio

and

rivals,

congiunto

sometimes by wars between nations.

talora

Hospitality was
of

common amongst
it

the Caledonians, and some

them practised
sacred,

even towards their enemies.

in families.

This duty

(126) anche

was

and became hereditary

help

Every guest
;

had a right to claim

*

(192) ospite from another in his perils they

soccorso

(were accustomed), in separating, to exchange shields, which costumare ref. scambiare

they afterwards preserved in their halls, poi conservare sala
in

order that their

(256)

210

RECAPITULATOKY EXERCISES

descendants might have a testimony of the friendship of their posteri

heat of battle, two enemies happened to calor venire (9) discover that their ancestors had been mutual guests, they de* antenato
parents.
If,

in the

padre

posed their arms immediately, and renewed between them the

ancient friendship.

(On

this account)

it

was considered

as a

Quindi
cowardly act to reveal ^codardo ^ svelare

(214) one's name, or to seek

ricercare

che

that of the

enemy, as

it

(156) seemed a pretext to

escape

the conflict

and

the

sottrarsi a

cimento
2

man who

reveals his

name

to the

enemy was a proverbial term of

(165) contempt. ignominia.

It does not appear that they
(232')

had
(251)

any knowledge of
*

arts,

conoscenza

except that of building roughly some houses of stone for the fuorch rozzo (310) (262) chiefs of the tribes, and of manufacturing iron for the purposes * trib lavorare uso
of war.
drink,
It
is

unknown what

liquor

they

made
this

use of for

(214) ignorare

which was served

in shells,

and from

comes the

bevanda conca (239) phrase in Ossian, " The feast of shells."

(50)

(168)

They

liked to invite

amare

one another reciprocally to banquets, which were spread with convito (214) imbandire the gifts of the chase. The night, which for the most part was * dono
devoted to their
destinare
oak, as candles were
feasts,

was illuminated by torches of burning

(239)
confiaccola
acceso

unknown.
ignoto.

(72)

For the most particular solemIn

ON ALL THE KULES.

nities,

211

burned, which abbruciare (they apparently) reserved for this use, and called " The trunk tronco sembrava a
the
entire

trunk of

an

oak

was

of the feast."

It

is

(to

be observed,) that in the feasts and cosa osservabile

rejoicings of the Caledonians, in which, as

we have
is

already said,

allegrezza

(1'''9)

music had always the

(25)
tion

pri)icipal share, there

never any men*

strict

parte

(214) (313)

made

of (dancing,) although this has naturally

danze

(256)
""

a naturale (311)
all

connexion with music, and the universal custom of

'uso

nations

(187) has rendered dancing inseparable from poetry and music.

It

(264) seems that the Caledonians had no distinct notions of

(232) (251) (214)
(to) that defect.

reli-

gion

nevertheless some ideas are found amongst them, which

l^er

(were meant) to supply

valere

We

find frequently in-

dicated a class of
of the

spirits,

which seem

of a superior order to
^
^

the

spirits

dead
pi.

(19) they bear no particular name, but are avere (214)

after that part

only
soltanto

denominated

of nature in which

it

is

da
;

(214)
such as the spirits of the

supposed they particularly delighted dilettarsi (251)

tempests, of the mountains, of the night, of the heavens, &c.

They considered

that the air

was swarming with these

{251) popolare
di

spirits,

and they attributed

to

them
(131)

all

the

phenomena

of nature.

The

immortality of the soul was one of the principal points of the

212
doctrine of
tlie

RECAPITULATORY EXERClSKa
Druids, universally and faithfully preserved by conservare
;

the Caledonians

and they considered, that

after death

their

amusements would be the same as those which had occupied

trattenimento

them
(123)
the

in this

life.

They thought they

could

hunt amidst andare a caccia

stags,

clouds,

with darts of mist,

aerial

or continue

nuvola

di aereo cervo

former wars against the shades of their enemies. antico con

to preserve) their passion for song, they

(As they were Siccome

were

to

conservavano
the voice of their praises
lode

hasten wherever accorrere ovunque

summoned them.
chiamare

The Caledonians,
dered
it

Greeks and the Eomans, consiGreco[bi) but as the greatest misfortune not to be buried
like the
;

(121)
;

seppellire

sepulture was not sufficient for their happiness

the shades of

(25)

ombra

the departed could not enjoy that species of beatitude which the godere di trapassare

uncultivated mind of the Caledonians had imagined, until a mente L (355) rozzo

song was chanted in their honour cantare Canzone as the most sacred duty towards the dead.
funereal
*

this

was considered

Until this honour

estinto pi.

was paid and

to the spirits,

rendere

they wandered through the clouds agitated errare

by the winds like a ship in a tempest. tossed * travagliare (352)

The funereal
^

freed spirit ascended to the highest elegy (being sung), the i(274) spiv'gionare ^elegia

and purest region of the

air,

and there received a kind of

(319)

ON ALL THE RULES.

213
Valor^

reward or chastisement, according guiderdone gastigo (352)

ous men,
'

to his past conduct.

who had
actions,

distinguished themselves

by generous and magcon

(228)

nanimous

were met by their fathers with a serene and on the contrary,) the proud and cruel
lo

smiling aspect

(whilst,

(268)

per

contrario

superbo
their indignant fathers,

were

terrified

by the frowning aspect of

oscuro
far

spaventare

who chased them

scacciare

from the habitations of heroes, to wander

Finally, cowards,
^poi

through wands and tempests.

and

all

those

^(25)

who

lived ivithout infamy or without praise, to

e

(make use
usare

of)

per
ricacciare

phrase

from Dante, were (driven back) into the mist, a

dentro

fit

espressione di

* degno

dwelling for the slothful and ignoble. soggiorno di neghittoso

The Caledonians placed

prestare

a superstitious trust in omens, and

^

^fede

a presagio

any

sudden sound whatever was believed by them to be the ' * improvviso \2n) (239)

warning
agitated a scuotere
little

voices of spirits.

If the chords of their harps,

ammoiiitore {Qo)

arpa
by the wind, (sighed
forth) a

faint

sound, this
^

mandare
of a shade,

Heggiero

was the sign

who, in passing, touched the harp, and (263) informed (those assembled) of the death of an absent friend.
avvisare
gli astanti

lontano

The howling
urlare

of dogs, the

wagging

of their ears, and the sudden * crollare

bounding

s/anc2bpl. (57)

of stags and goats, were also fatal omens, as it was cervo cavriolo funesto (214)

believed that those animals could see from afar the shades of the

(251)

(276)

214
dead.
pi.

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES
Sometimes they imagined (they saw) a rain of blood
di vedere

which announced approaching war, and they even thought they prossimo di perceived in their houses the arms of the distant warriors tinted ^ inf. Hontano with blood, which was considered as an infallible sign of their
di
death.

The Caledonians had

which did
'
;

(171)

for the

shades of their ancestors a

religious respect,
^

not,

however, reach to adoration or per giungere

worship
culto

they were never wearied praising them and celebrating inf. (214) (313) stocare (265)

their exploits,

and

at every

moment they thought they saw and

inf.

impresa

(192)

heard them. They retired to their mountains with the intenref. sopra inf. (128) they also invoked them before tion of conversing with them (262) war, and in the most important solemnities, not, however, as
;

beings that could give them aid, but only as witnesses and
ente
friends.

(276)

(131)

appears they had formed a kind (251) (232) of divination, of which they made use in some cases. When they
these pretended signs,
it

From Su

were in doubt as to
*

whom
to

should (172) dovere

be

confided the

command

of

{2U)

the battle, they used

invoke the shades of their ancestors,

solere (280)

striking three times on their shields, and then retired to sleep,

volta

quindi
to

ref.

supposing that the shades would appear (251)

them and design the

destinare

ON ALL THE RULES.

most worthy for the degno a
fully their

215
faith-

battle.

Re-awakened, they related

Risvegliare
(245^)
attitude,

dream, and described the form,

and

(35) atteggiamento
voice of the spirits they

had seen

and whoever could relate the

(211)
riferire

most distinct and least equivocal

the shades,

indications of the will of

equivoco (53) contrassegno

from amongst the others. {2^9) prescegliere *

chosen

was

It is pro-

bablo that they had another kind of divination, founded on the

genere (251) sound of the wind and in this they were not more absurd than
;

the Romans,

who

(106) from the entrails of victims, viscera (traevano gli auguri)

(168)

augured

from the pecking of hens, or from the flight of crows. corvo. beccare pollo volo
(263) champions, followed by several
1

Finally,

they had recourse to another expedient in choosing their comcapisingers,

manders
tano
retired
ref.

the

rival
2

vario (56)

to

hill

sopra

which was enveloped in mist, and each waringombro di

;

the command of the armies was (321) (214) given to him whoso shield resounded the loudest, as they ima(180) (213) sup(165) (118) gined that the shades of the dead had co-operated in rendering porre ph (261) a inf.
rior

then struck on his shield

the sound powerful and clear.

gagliardo

The
dead,
pi.

veneration that the Caledonians had for the shades of the

2yer

made them even

respect their bodies.

After the battle,

the conqueror gave sepulture not only to his

vincitore

own

warriors v/ho

216
had
fallen,

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES
but also
to those of the

enemy

and

to sacrifice this

(225)
pious observance to resentment would have been deemed an expio riputare uffizio

There was no duty performed by the Caleadempire donians with greater care and willingness than that of attend
cess of inhumanity.

(108*)

compiacenza

iug to the sepulture and funereal honours of the dead.

pi.

The

mode

of interment
seppellire
;

was

this

they

dug
scavare

a grave from six to

fossa deep the bottom was then covered with fine earth, profondo '^fino ^creta (306) on which they lowered gently the body of the defunct. If he adagiare
eight feet

had been a

warrior, they placed beside

him

his sword,

and the

(352)
points of twelve arrows.

Over the corpse they spread another

cadavero
stendere

punta

strale

m.

layer of earth, in which they placed a horn, the symbol of chase, strata collocare corno *

and a hunter's bow

they then covered the whole with fine poscia (306) (1^9) earth and with four grey stones, which were placed at the extre;

cacciatore arco

bigio

estre-

mities

to

mark

the

size

of the tomb.

Those stones
and are

mit
are

am/nezza (48) (344) segnare frequently mentioned in the poetry of Ossian,

pi.

sometimes called " The stones of fame."

talora

In their centuries of
secolo

heroism, the Caledonians, like

many

other nations, used to bury

with the master his favourite dog, but this

2
1

is

not mentioned in
called

Ossian.

During the ceremony of interment, the singers

sepoltura

ox ALL THE RULES.

on tLe shade of the warrior three times, inviting him
"A/5 narrow house," as angusto
It

217
to visit

the sepulchre

was
(239)

called
'

(by them.)
i

appears that the mourning and funereal songs were regularly

to this

lutto funebre (214) renewed each year, and autumn was the season devoted

(251) (192) annual commemoration. ^ ^anniversario

destinare

Immediately

after death, the shades of the departed

ombra
;

revealed trapassato far vedere

themselves to their relations they were generally preceded by (141) congiunto comparire per lo pi,
a meteor, which, according to the Caledonians, served (to escort
1

Mi

scorta

and
e

light)

them through the darkness, and

2(131)
in

their departure

was

di lume

oscurit

partenza

always accompanied by a strong gust of wind.

(16)
soffio

They sometimes
Halora
the exploits

came
^

to

demand

funereal honours, or to
'^funebre
^

witness
assistere

impresa

of their sons or descendants,

in order to

animate them and

their

share

in

their

glory

but for the most part

*

prender parte

a
vicino
2

appearance indicated some approaching misfortune, and in this

comparsa
lasciare

case they sometimes abandoned their natural form, and assumed

i

various shapes, (such as that) of an afflicted (old man.)

come

vecchio.
it

As
III

to the

appearance of the Caledonians,

fattezza
fair

seems they
they had

quanto

were generally of high stature and

(251) very
(1

complexion

bianco carnagione

long

hair,

and thought

it

15) (1 IG) capigliatura

a particular ornament to vezzo

218
let

RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES ON ALL THE RULES.

it fall

down

their face (in sncb a

in

lasciare
to

gi per (150) viso

cover their cheeks and eyes. {copriva) (152) guancia[5)

(72)

way as) frequently modo che The women esteemed most

hair.

beautiful are always praised for blue eyes and black

The

capelli.

Caledonians attained to a great age, but were usually giungere lungo vecchiezza
afflicted

with blindness,
cecit

In

the

beautiful

and almost unin-

opprimere da
rivalled

poetry of Ossian, a detailed and minute description

comparabile

may be found of the manners, customs, opinions, and obserpotere (214) vances of the people who have been slightly sketched in the leggermente tracciare
preceding exercises
(268)
refer the student who may desire to acquire a further know* ulteriore rimandare " ledere of The Customs and Habits of the Ancient Cale;

and

to the

poems

of Ossian

we

therefore

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

219

PHEASES AND DIALOGUES.

Arti e Mestieri.
11

Arts and Trades.

MERCANTE Vende
a minuto compra,
;

all'ingrosso

The tradesman

sells

wholesale

l'avventore
spilli

or retail; the customer buys.

L'agoraio
aghi,

fa gli

gli

The needle-maker makes

and needles.

pins
sil-

L'argentiere lavora
cesella

l'argento,

The
all

silver-smith works in

getta ogni

specie

ver,

and chisels and moulds

d'argenteria,

L'ariiauiolo fabbrica, raccomoda, e forbisce ogni sorta

di armi,

come spade, pugnali,

scimitarre, fioretti, fucili, pistole,

&c.,

monta

le

lame e

adatta loro il fodero o guaina ed il manico, impugnatura o

elsa,

kinds of plate. The armourer makes, repairs, and polishes all kinds of arms, as swords, daggers, sabres, foils, guns, pistols, &c., sets blades and fits them in scabbards and handles.

L'arruotino arruota
forbici,
i

e affila le

The
&c.

knife-grinder
knives,

coltelli,

temperini,

scissors,

sharpens penknives,
his imple-

&c..
Il

barriere rade,
i

fa la
il

barba

The barber shaves

ments are a
basin, soap,

suoi arnesi sono,

rasoio,
il

razor, a strop, a

la

coreggina, il bacino, sapone, e lo sciugatoio.

and a towel.

Il

calderaio

fa e racconcia le

The

caldaie e le casserole,
Il

calzolaio prende la misura

all'avventore, e gli fa stivali,
scarpe, stivaletti o pianelle
il
;

makes and repairs and pots. The shoemaker takes the measure of a customer, and makes him boots, shoes, half-boots,
brazier
boilers

ciabbatino racconcia vecchie scarpe,

le

or slippers; the cobbler old shoes.

mends

220
II

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

le

cANDELOTTAio vencle
dele di sevo
di cera,
e

can-

The chandler sells wax candles.

Tlie basket-maker
sells baskets,

tallow

or

Il

CANESTRAIO fa strini, zane o

gabbie, vimini,

vende Canelavori
di

culle, panieri,

makes and cradles, ham-

ed

altri

Il

CAPPELLAIO

fa e tinge

cap-

cages, and other osier works. The hatter makes and dyes hats
pers,

pelli e le berrette,
Il

and caps.

CARROZZIERE fabbrica cocchi,

e

The coachmaker

builds

carall

carrozze,

calessi

barocci,

riages, chaises, carts,

and

carri e ogni specie di legni.

Il

kinds of conveyances.

CARTARO fabbrica

nella car-

tiera pi sorte di carta, fina,

The papermaker makes in the paper-mill many kinds of

paper, fine, middling,

mezzana, ordinaria, sugante

cartastraccia, bianca, bigia,

com;

mon,
paper.

and

blotting-paper

turchina,
sica,

e rigata
fa
le

da mule

white, grey, blue, and music-

11

CHiAVARO

chiavi,

The locksmith
locks,

makes

keys,

serrature o toppe.
Il

COLTELLINAIO
bici,

fa coltelli, for-

The

and key-holes. cutler makes knives,

penknives,
lancets,

temperini,

lancette,

scissors,

rasoi, &c.,
Il

razors, &c.

Il

CONCIATORE concia le pelli per farne cuoio. CURANDAIO cura i panni lini, purgandoli dalla bozzima, e
imbiancando
i

The

tanner dresses skins for

bleacher bleaches linens,

leather.

The

rozzi,

them from roughness, and whitening the unbleachfreeing

ed.

Il

DORATORE indora

metalli,

Tlie gilder gilds metals, wood-

le cornici di legno, &c..

frames, &c.

Il

FALEGNAME

fa tavole, sedie,

The

carpenter

makes

tables,

stipi, scrivanie, telai,

armadi,
filatoio,

chairs, cabinets, desks, looms,

ed ogni mobiliare,
Il

presses,
al

and

all furniture.

FILATORE lavora
e
fila seta

The

filo,

spinner works with the spinning-wheel, and spins

silk or thread.

La MODISTA vende

cuffie,

cap-

The

milliner sells caps,

artificial

bonrib-

pellini, fiori artefatti, nastri,

nets,

flowers,

ghirlande, ed altre acconciature alla moda per l'uso delle

bons, wreaths, and other fashionable habiliments for

ladies.

donne,

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

II

221

VETRAIO
fa
il

fornaciaio di vetri
soffia

The

glass-blower
it

makes

glass,

vetro, e ne

bot-

and blows

into the form of

tiglie, fiaschi, bicchieri,

cami

bottles, flasks, glasses, bells,

pane, lastre, &c.,

Il

FUNAIO

fa le funi, la corda,

window panes, &c. The ropemaker makes

cord, cables, &c., with

ropes,

canapi, &c.,

con

fila

di

ca-

hemp

napa
Il

di lino.

or flax thread.

GIOIELLIERE incassa
le

incastra
vezzi,

The

jeweller
for

sets

precious

pietre

preziose per farne

e

stones
sells

ornaments,

and
dia-

ornamenti,
braccialetti,
aiineli di

vende

necklaces,

bracelets,

orecchini,

ed

ear-rings,

and rings of
emeralds,

diamanti, smeraldi,

monds,

rubies,

rubini, turchine, perle &c.,

turquoise, pearls, &c.

L'iiiBiAN'CATORE

imbianca

le

The white-washer whitens

front

the

facciate delle case e le pareti

col suo pennello. L'intagliatore intaglia

il

le-

gno

e le cornici

in

figure,

fogliami, &c.,

La lavandaia

lava i pannilini, che insapona, lava, sciacqua, torce, e stende per farli asciugare, inamida i pi fini, e poi col ferro da spianare li
stira.

and walls of houses with his brush. The wood-carver carves wood and frames into figures, leaves, &c. The laundress washes the linen, which she soaps, washes, rinses, wrings, and spreads out to dry. The fine things are starched, and then ironed with the smoothing iron.

Il

le

MONETiERE batte e impronta monete col conio alla

The

coiner

strikes

off

coins,

and
mint.

stamps

them

in

the

zecca.
Il

MURATORE
mattoni o

costruisce

fab-

The mason

builds houses

and

brica le case ed
sassi, e

i muri con con calcina.

walls with bricks or stone,

and mortar.

L'ombrellaio

ombrelli per parar la pioggia, ed i paraseli per preservare dal

fa
gli
sole.

The

umbrella- maker makes umbrellas to save from the rain, and parasols to preserve from the sun.
furrier

Il

pellicciaio fa
tora,

le

pellicce o

The

makes

articles

of

vesti di pelle di volpe, di

mar&c.

dress from the fur of the fox,

di lupo, di orso, di ardi

mellino,

coniglio,

the marten, wolf, bear, ermine, rabbit, and other skins ;

vende manicotti, berrette di

pelle, &c.,

he

sells muffs, caps,

&c.

222
II

PURASES AND DIALOGUES.

fa
gli
il

SARTO
nette
cuce,
ranti,

abiti,

taglia

The

tailor

makes

dresses

he
it,

colle forbici

panno, lo cona punto di baste, lo d a cucire ai lavo-

cuts with his shears the cloth,

bastes

it
it

together,
to his

sews

or gives

workmen

to

sew.

Lo SPAZZATURAIO netta e spazza

le strade,

The

scavenger cleans and sweeps the streets and street

crossings.

Lo SPAZZACAMMINO
spazza
scritti
i

puliscC

The

cammini.

chimney-sweeper cleans and sweeps the chimney.

printer prints manuscripts with type of various sizes, with capital letters, small

Lo STAMPATORE Stampa i manocon tipi di varie grandezze, con lettere capitali, piccole e italiche, ed altri

The

and

italic letters,

and other

signs.

Quadrupedi.
L'asino un animale da da basto mangia i cardi, ha le orecchie lunghe e ra;

Quadrupeds.

The
it

ass

is

a beast of burden

eats thistles, has long ears,

and brays.

glia,
Il

cinghiale o cignale
si

una

The

specie di porco salvatico, che

pig,

wild boar is a kind of wild which defends itself with

bull

difende colle zanne,

its tusks.

Il

Il

TORO o BUE ed il giovenco mugghiano la vacca e la la giovenca muggiscono carne del bue si chiama manzo, BUFALO bue salvatico
; ;

The

and bullock bellow

;

the

cow and heifer low flesh of the ox is called

the

beef.

The

buffalo

or

wild

bull

is

generalmente nero, e alcuni hanno corna grandi ecurvate. L'orso, animale forte e peloso,
si

fredde

trova spesso nelle regioni esso bufonchia e rugghia, castoro o bevaro stato
;

generally black, and some have large twisted horns. The bear is a strong hairy animal, generally found in
cold

regions

it

grumbles
c.illed

and roars. The beaver

has been

chiamato
animali,

l'architetto
pell'artifizio

degli
col

" the architect of animals,"

quale costruisce la sua casa.

on account of the art with which it constructs its

PllRASES
I

AND DIALOGUES.
Cats

223
kittens

GATTI ed

gattini miagolano,

and

mew

and

e sgraffiano,
II

scratch.

GHIRO dorme sotterra tutto

l'inverno,

11

Il

DROMEDAKio Una specie di cammello a doppio scrigno. CANE il pi intelligente

degli animali

dormouse sleeps under ground all the winter. The dromedary is a kind of camel with a double hump. The dog is the most intelligent
of domestic animals

The

domestici, vi

cani da guardia, da pecorai, mastini, levrieri o

sono

are watch dogs,

dogs,
mastiffs,

there shepherds'
;

greyhounds,

veltri, alani,

barboni, cani da fermo, &c. I cani ringhiano,

bull dogs, spaniels, pointers,

&c.

Dogs

snarl, bite, bark,

mordono, abbaiano o latrano, gagnolano, mugolano, e

squittiscono,
11

yelp, howl,

and squeal.

naso

la
si

FANTE
i

tromba dell'ELEchiama proboscide,

in
fuori

The

elephant's nose or trunk

is

called a proboscis, its teeth are ivory,

suoi denti son detti avorio,

and project from

sporgono

dalla

the jaws.

mascella,

L'arjiellino animaletto di pelle bianca e coda nera.

The ermine
tail.

is a little animal, with a white skin and black

La VOLPE
mente
e
la

acchiappa
le si

destra-

The

fox catches cleverly fowls,

;

Inghilterra
trofeo

&c. In d la caccia, sua lunga coda il

polli, conigli,

it is hunted in England, and its long tail or brush is the trophy of the

rabbits, &c.

della

caccia

essa

chase

it

yelps or cries.
is

gagnola.

La GIRAFFA
facilmente

si addomestica la pelle sua macchiata come quella del leopardo, ed ha un collo

;

The
its

giraffe

easily

tamed
like

skin

is

spotted

the

and it has a very long neck, and a very small

leopard's,

lunghissimo,
piccolissima.
Il

una

testa

head.

giovane capro o capretto gambetta per i prati, la lepre giovane si chiama leprotto, La iena crudele e feroce, e

Quando

The young goat or kid frisks the meadows. "When the hare is young, it
called a leveret.

in

is

The hyena
cious,

somiglia

il

lupo,

is cruel and feroand resembles the wolf.

221
11

PITRASI-S ANT) DTAI.OfiUF.S.

RICCIO lo SPINOSO coperto di spine o pungiglioni, e si rannicchia come in un gomitolo, quando da alcuno vien
toccato,

The hedgehog
quills,

is

covered with

a ball
it.

up like when any one touches

rolls itself

and

Il

CAVALLO
;

domato o

scoz-

The

zonato dallo scozzone o domatore bardato e sellato dal palafreniere o mozzo, e cavalcato e spronato dal
cavalcatore,
Il

horse is trained by the horse-breaker, bridled and saddled by the groom, and

ridden and spurred by the

rider.

trotta, e

eavallo va al passo, ambia, galoppa, ma spesso

tira calci, restio,

The

horse walks, ambles, trots,

gallops,
is
;

and

ombreggia,
e

kicks,

restive,

and often shies, and runs

leva la

mano
Il

nitrisce.

il cavallo cavalcatore

away
rider

horses neigh.

The

monta a cavallo, e smonta da cavallo, e lo regola per mezzo delle redini, della
briglia, dello sprone, e della
frusta.

mounts and dismounts his horse, and controls him with reins, bridle, spurs, and
whip.

L'agnello chiama
col belare,

la

pecora

The lamb
bleating.

calls

the sheep by

Alla LiONESSA manca la giubba, il che la distingue dal leone; questi animali ruggiscono,

The

lioness

has

no

mane,
her

which
roar.

distinguishes
;

from the lion

these animals

La SCIMMIA

molti

riguardi
ch'essa

The monkey,
is

in

many

respects,
to

somiglia all'uomo, cerca d'imitare,

like

man,

whom

it tries

imitate.

La

pelle

della

martora, spezibellina,

The

skin of the marten, espe-

cialmente della
di
Il

cially
costly.

the

sable,

is

very

gran prezzo, sorcio o topo

stride,

The mouse
is

rosicchia mobili e vivande,

fino a che

furniture

non

sia acchiap-

squeaks, and nibbles and eatables, till it caught in a trap.

pato in una trappola,

Il

rinoceronte ha un corno
grossa pelle quasi impenetrabile. ratto pi grande del
sul

The
its
is

naso,

la

sua

Il

The

rhinoceros has a horn on nose, and its thick skin almost impenetrable. rat is larger than the

PIIKASES
sorcio,

AND PIALOGUF.S.
mouse, and,
ferocious.
for its size,

225
very

per la

il

sua gran-

dezza molto feroce,

Il

TARANDO

cervo del Nord,

The

reindeer

is

the stag of the

dove gli abitanti se ne servono come bestia da tiro e da soma. In un giorno pu

fare ottanta miglia.
Il

Il

CONIGLIO si rintana in buche che scava sotterra, CERVO un animale boschereccio velocissimo al corso,
la sua testa

adorna di corna
si

maestose. Cerviatto
il

chiama

Lo

giovane cervo, SCOIATTOLO, animaletto

dotato
di

salvatico,

una

lunga coda vellutata, s'arrampica su per gli alberi, e da uno ad un altro salta
coll'agilit quasi di
cello,

un uc-

North, where the inhabitants it as a beast of carriage and of burden. It can travel eighty miles in a day. The rabbit burrows in little holes it digs in the ground. The stag is a forest animal, very swift on foot its head is adorned with majestic branches or horns. The young stag is called a fawn. The squirrel, a little wild animal, with a long velvety tail, climbs trees, and jumps from one tree to another, almost with the nimbleness of a bird.
use
;

La

pelle

della
e

chiettata

tigre picmacchiata
;

The

tiger's skin is spotted

;

and
its

speckled
teeth,

it

gnashes
in

quando
digrigna
Il

irata ruggisce,

and roars when

denti.

passion.

LUPO
cini,

urla, e la

lupa difende
i

The wolf

con gran ferocia

suoi lupi-

roars, and the female defends her whelps with great

ferocity.

La ZEBRA
listata

cavallo d'Africa,
giallo
e

The

zebra,

nero nel

Africa,

maschio,

nero e giallo nella

femmina,
Volatili,
Uccelli di

black white

if

or the horse of striped yellow and male, and black and if female.
is

Birds.
Notturni,

Rapina^

Nocturnal Birds^ Birds of Prey.

L'aquila, per la sua forza, e pel suo ardire, vien detta il

re degli uccelli
;

The

ha
;

la vista

acutissima,

e
il

si

dice

possa fissare

sole

che vive di

eagle, owing to its strength and daring, is called the king of birds it has very sharp sight, and can even, it is said, gaze on the sun. It
;

226

PHRASES AND ftlALOGUES.

lives

rapina, e nidifica fra le rupi

inaccessibili d'altissime

mon-

eyrie

on prey, and builds its amidst high and inresembles

in in

tagne,

accessible mountains.
si
;

L'astore
cellare

di

teneva per ucforma e colore

The

goshawk

colour and size the falcon,

simile allo sparviere,

and was used

hawking.

L'avvoltoio
l'aquila

si distingue dalper avere il capo coperto di lanugine, o calvo, quandoch questa l'ha col'avvoltoio perto di penne si ciba di carogna, e l'aquila co'snoi artigli ghermisce viva
;

The

vulture differs from the eagle in having its head either covered with down or bald, whilst the eagle's head the is covered with feathers
;

la sua preda,

La CIVETTA

un

uccello

vulture feeds on carrion, and the eagle seizes with its claws live prey. The screech-owl is a nocturnal
bird, very like the owl,

notturno, molto simile al gufo, e com'esso, odiato dagli uccelletti, e perci serve per
l'uccellagione
squittisce.
;

and

both are hated by smaller

screech-owl is a decoy-bird, and Poets have called it Minerva's bird. The rook is the devastator of crops, and is smaller than the crow it caws.
birds
;

the

essa
I

stride
la

used

as

poeti

screeches.

La

chiamano augello di Pallade, MULACCHIA, CORNACCHIA,

devastatrice de'seminati, pi
piccola del corvo
chia,
;

essa gracsi

Il

nero corvo, o coreo,

di

pasce

The raven The

will feed on carrion,

Il

carname, e crocita, cuculo si pigro che eziandio le sue uova non vuol covare.
Il

and croaks.
is prothat it does not even hatch its eggs. Its note is the sound cuckoo.

cuckoo's indolence
;

verbial

it

is

said

suo verso cuculiare,

Il

FALCO, o falcone, armato di becco, e d'unghie ricurve serve all'uccellagie acute

;

The falcon

one.
Il

Havvene
il

di pii specie

is armed with a beak, and with bent and sharp claws it was used for hawking. There are several
;

e variet,

species of

it.

girifalco
falconi
;

supremo dei
becco
;

The gerfalcon

is
;

the chief speits

;

ha

il

le

cies of falcon

beak and
strong,

gambe

azzurrine forte, ingegnoso, ben avventurato in predare,

legs are bluish

it is

dexterous, and very daring in capturing prey.

niRASES AND DIALOGUES.

II

22?

solingo GUFO, dagli occbi di

fuoco,

The

lonely owl, witli fiery eyes,

disconsolately about old

va tubando
diroccate.
Il

sopra gli antichi

tetti

dolente e su
l'o-

flies

roofs

mura
dia,

volgo

disliked

and ruined walls. It is by the ignorant, who

its

stimando di cattivo au-

consider

whoop an

evil

Il

gurio il suo canto, NIBBIO, che volentieri insidia alle galline, fa ruote in aria volando, come quasi ogni altro uccello di rapina.

omen.

The

kite,

which entraps cleverly

chickens, wheels about in the air, like almost all birds of

prey.

Il

PIPISTRELLO
turno,

un animale note

The

bat

is

mezzo topo
;

mezzo

uccello

esso stride,

half mouse, screams.

a nocturnal animal, half bird. It

Uccelli Cantatoli,
Il

Singing Birds.

CANARINO

un uccelletto gen;

The

tile di color giallo,

che canta dolcissimamente dicesi pure passera di Canarie dalle isole di questo nome, donde ei
viene,

La scherzosa CAPINERA dal becco

gentile,

va sui verdi prati soavemente cantando.

col capiciuo ncro

is a pretty little yellow bird, that sings very called the is it sweetly Canary sparrow from the Canary Isles, from which it comes. The playful tomtit, with its pretty little head, is seen ic the fields while it sings sweet-

canari/

ly.
Il

CARDELLINO,

The

pezzato d rosso, e le ale di giallo, gareggia col canarino

nel canto,

goldfinch, with its little black head speckled with red, and its yellow wings, rivals the canary in song.
is

L'Americano colibr

nn ucda noi

The American humming-bird

celletto piccolissimo,

Italiani detto mellivoro, perch, librandosi in su'fiori, vi

a very small bird, called in Italian the honey-bird, because, poising itself on floAVers, it

va succhiando

mele dal loro calice. Vaghissimi sono i colori delle sue lucide piume.
il

extracts the honey from

their cups.
its

The

colours of

glossy feathers are beaulinnet is very easily tamed,

tiful. Il

FANELLO si addimcstica facilmente, e ghiotto di canapuccia va svolazzando por le

The
it

and very fond

of

aroes fluttering

hemp-seed about the

;

228

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

rooms, picking
it finds.

stanze, beccandone gli acini

up any grains
chatterer,

che trova, La GAZZA, o PICA, garrula e loquace, imita maravigliosa-

The magpie is a great

and imitates wonderfully the

mente

la favella

umana,
da'

La LODOLA, O ALLODOLA,

human The lark,

voice.

Latini detta Alauda (quasi da a laude Dei), pei'ch sollevandosi a volo verso il cielo, si perde di vista, e solo se ne
lena,
lodi

Alauda

ode la sua armoniosa canticolla quale pare che

il

by the Latins (probably from a laude Dei, praises to God), because, soaring towards heaven, it is lost from sight, and its sweet lay, which appears
called

sung
is

in praise of the Creator,

Signore,

La

nera merla (o il merlo) ha il becco giallo, e chioccola, L'ortolano col suo piacevol canto diletta in vita, e morto buon boccone. Il PAPPAGALLO ve n'ha di pi specie tutte per convengono nell'avere il rostro grosso e torto, con la mandibula di sopra pi lunga dell'inferiore, la lingua carnosa, non appuntata i piedi con quattro diti, mediante i quali, e con l'aiuto del rostro, salgono e scendono come per una scala. I pappagalli imparano a parlare sono garruli, piuttosto docili, ed hanno vita assai lunga,
;

Tlie

heard. blackbird has beak, and sings.

ortolan,
its

ahme

yellow
delights

The
is

alive,

with

sweet song, and dead,

a great delicacy.

The parrot.

There are many

;

species of this bird

all

are

alike in havingathick curved

ble longer than the lower

beak, with the upper mandia fleshy tongue, not pointed feet with four claws, by means of which, aided by their beak, they climb and descend as if by a ladder. Parrots learn to speak they are very talkative, rather docile, and live pretty long.
;

Il

PASSERO

si

diletta di stare so-

The sparrow
tary,

likes to be soli-

litario e solo, e in ispecie la

mattina va
Il

pispilando.

and particularly in the morning its chattering is

heard.

PICCHIO, che volando a scosse,

The woodpecker, which

starts,

flies

by

va a posarsi sugli
quivi,
col

alberi,

picchia (donde

suo fermo becco il suo nome)

e ripicchia sul tronco di essi,

perches on trees, and with its strong beak taps them (the origin of its name), in order to shake out of the

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

per farne uscir faora
celli di cui si pasce,
Il
il
i

229

vermi-

trunks the worms on which

it

feeds.

PIVIERE ha per solito, bianca la testa, nero il petto, e gialli i piedi, se la fa per le sabbionose rive dei fiumi,
le

The plover has

La QUAGLIA ha
fetto
;

chiettate, e talora
il

penne ha il

picciuf-

generally a white head, black breast, and yellow feet, and frequents the sandy shores of rivers. The quail has speckled feathers, and sometimes a crest it
;

suo volare dritto,

la

flies

straight
in
;

forward,

and

e vive per seminati e per le

lives
fields

corn

and

stubble

stoppie
sita,

sua carne squi-

its flesh is

excellent.

La RONDINE,
un uccello

RONDINELLA,

The

sicalloiv is a bird

of pas-

di passo, e traver-

sage,

and crosses the Medi-

sa tutta la larghezza del

Meore.

diterraneo in

men
la

di

24

Essa prende

sua pastura volando, e costruisce il suo nido di creta con mirabile

maestria,
Il

terranean in less than twentyhours. It catches its food while on the wing, and builds its nest of mud with admirable skill.
four

ROsiGNUOLO

un

uccelletto

stimatissimo per la soave dolcezza del suo canto. Posato

sulle

The nightingale is a small bird much prized for the melodious sweetness
of
its

song.

cime dei pioppi,

i

egli

manda

suoi pi melodiosi
al

gorgheggi nella notte

gli sia
Il

lume

di luna. I poeti fingono ch'e-

l'innamorato della rosa.

di varie specie.
Il

TORDO

tordo d'America, detto Canoro, vince qualunque altro uccello per la soavit e facilit
di cantare, contrafiacendoli e

Perched on the top of the poplar, it warbles its most melodious notes at night by moonlight. Poets imagine it to be enamoured of the rose. There are various kinds of the thrush. The American thrush,
called the Singer, excels every

superandoli
so
si

tutti.

Il

suo ver-

other bird in the sweetness and ease of its song, imitating and surpassing them all. It
whistles.

trutilare o zirlare,

Uccellame Salvatico
tico,

Domes-

Wild and Tame Birds.

L'anitra, o anatra, un uccello acquatico a tutti noto ;

The duck is an aquatic bird known to all of us it quacks,

;

230

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

dives, and swims. The wild ducks have various names the spoonbill^ from the shape the diver^ from of its beak
;
;

essa schiamazza, s'attuffa, e

nuota. Le salvatiche hanno vari nomi come quello di Mestolone, dalla forma del suo becco Tuffetto, dal con; ;

constantly diving,

(fee.

tinuo tuffarsi, &c.,

La

CHIOCCIA cova le uova, e guida i pigolanti pulcini il

;

The hen hatches and leads about

her brood of chirping chickens she clucks
;

little

suo verso di chiocciare,

Il

and

cackles.

candido cigno, dal lungo collo e dal ricolmo petto; esso, come ogni uccello acquatico, adopra le palme dei piedi a guisa di remi si tiene per ornamento nelle vasche e nei
;

The

fair

neck

swan, with the long and swelling breast,

like all aquatic birds, uses its

it is kept as an ornament of ponds and lakes

feet for oars

in parks.
it

Poets fancied that

laghi dei parchi.

I poeti fin-

sang sweetly when near

11

gono che canti dolcemente quando vicino a morire, COLOMBO e la colomba si sogliono allevare nelle colombaie essi tubano, grugano e gemiscono, i poeti hanno immaginato che tirino il carro di Venere, e sono uccelli de;

death.

Doves are generally bred in they coo, and are dovecots dedicated by the poets to Venus, whose car they draw. Pigeons are of the same family, and the wood-pigeon
;

dicati a questa
Il loro

Dea.

I pic-

is

a kind of wild dove.

cioni sono della stessa famiglia.

Il

verso tubare.
il

colombaccio

colombo

selvatico,
Il

Il

fagiano, si custodisce ed alleva nelle fagianaie i piccoli fagianotti, s'ingrassano dando loro a mangiare delle formiche, FRANCOLINO ha Ic penne va;

The pheasant

is

confined and
;

young bred in preserves pheasants are fattened on

ants.

The The
a

heath-cocJc has variegated

riegate, e la cresta gialla,

Il

feathers and a yellow crest.

cock's
fine

GALLO ha un ampia

la testa adorna di
cresta, e porta gli

head

is

crest; its

adorned with feet bear

pre-

sproni ai piedi.

Tronfio e

spurs.

Haughty and

pettoruto, con la cresta alta.

sumptuous, with itscrest aloft,

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

231

va Intorno, e signoreggia nel di tempo in tempo d una chicchiriata, o, come

pollaio
;

it walks about, lord of the poultry-yard, crowing from

time to tune.

si

suol dire, canta,

Il

GALLO d'India, vien pur detto Gallinaccio, e Tacchino, ha

rossi e larghi bargigli, striscia
l'ale e fa la

The turkey has

trails
its

ruota a guisa di

large red gills, wings, and fans them like a peacock ; it clucks, stretching out its neck.

pavone, e grida gi gi allungando il collo. Il GRIFONE animale biforme e

favoloso, la cui
la

The

griffon

is

a fabulous bi;

parte ante-

riore d'aquila con le ale, e

posteriore

di

leone

con

formed animal its foreparts resemble an eagle with wings, its hind-part a lion with four
feet.

Le

quattro piedi, GRU, o GRUE, volano a stor-

Cranes

fly in

flocks,

one after

mi una dietro l'altra, vendo nell'aria varie

e figure, L'ibi,

descrilettere

the other, describing various forms and letters in the air.

o ibidi, una spezie di cigogna d'Egitto, che va facendo strage di serpenti, di cui si ciba. Veniva venerato

The

ibis is

a kind of Egyptian
it

stork, that destroys serpents,

on which
tians.

feeds.

It

held sacred by the

was Egyp-

dagli antichi Egiziani, T/ocA, a chi non nota ? Colla sua lanugine si riempiono e formano i soffici piumini le penne delle sue ale si adoprano per iscrivere,
;

Who

are

does not know the goose ? With its down soft cushions made the feathers of its
;

wings are used

for writing.

Il

PAVONE ha

collo di serpente,

The peacock has

serpent,

ale di angelo, voce di diavolo,

e piedi d'andar cheto di ladro, cosi lo descrisse
il

Sacchetti.

Esso vagheggia la sua occhiuta coda che spiega facendo ruota, e si va pavoneggiando,
Il

the neck of a angels' wings, the voice of a demon, and the stealthy feet of a thief. Sacchetti describes it thus. It admires its own starry tail, which it displays in a fan,

and
il

struts proudly about.

is
it

PELLICANO

pi grosso uc;

The pelican
tic

the largest aquais

cello acquatico

l'Asia Minore.

campa nelEsso ha nelun

bird

a native of

l'inferiore parte del collo

Asia Minor. It has in the lower part of the neck a

232

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

pouch, in which it stores some of its food already swallowed, This to feed its young with.

falso esofago, in cui conserva

una parte dei

e

cibi trangugiati,

ne nutrisce i suoi figliuoli. Ci ha dato luogo alla favola

si

gave

rise to the fable, that it

ch'egli

ferisca

il

petto col

tore its

own
It

breast with

its

becco, onde nutrirli del suo sangue. Quindi venne preso per simbolo dell'amor materno,

beak, and fed

its

blood.

its young with was chosen, on

this account, as a

symbol of

La PERNICE ha
il

gli occhi rossi,

molto scaltra nello sviare

cacciatore dal luogo dove sono i suoi pcrniciotti. quantunque vestito STRUZZO, Lo di penne ed abbia ale, ha

maternal love. Hha partridge has red eyes, and is very cunning in misleading the sportsmen from its young.

The

gambe

piedi

come

quelli

del cammello, ed perci che

da alcuni vien detto struzzo cammello. E il pi grande

di tutti gli uccelli.

ostrich^ although covered with feathers and having wings, has legs and feet like a camel, and has been sometimes called the camel ostrich.

It is the largest of all birds. It uses its short

oars, flapping

Si serve

wings like
it

delle ale, che in proporzione

them while

sono corte, a guisa di remi agitandole mentre corre. La TORTORA molto simile alla colomba, ma pi piccola ha penne bigie essa pure
; ;

runs.

The

turtle-dove

is

very like the

dove, but smaller, and its it coos. feathers are greyish

;

tuba,

geme,

Dei Pesci.
I pesci vivono nell'acqua
;

FiSH.

nuo-

si muovono, e sguizzano nell'acqua per mezzo delle loro pinne per le bran-

tano,

chie respirano
si

le

loro ossa

Fish live in water; swim, move, and dart about in the water, by means of their tins they breathe through their gills, and their bones, in Italian,
;

chiamano lische. Ci sono mare e d'acqua dolce, I TESTACEI, e crostacei hanno

pesci di
il

are called lische.

sea-fish

There are and fresh-water fish.

guscio

nicchio.
alici, o

Le acciughe,

sardelle
si

sono pesciolini che

pescano

shell-fish are covered with a shell. Anchovies and sardines are little fish caught in the Meditar-

The

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

colle reti nel Mediterraneo,

233
and are pickled
in

ranean,
brine.

si

sogliono conciare in sa

lamoia,

L'anguilla

un pesce d'acqua

The

dolce, a foggia d'angue, con

pelle scivolosa.
di

eel is a fresh- water fish, resembling a serpent, with a

Le

anguille

slippery skin.

The

sea eels

mare son pi grosse, e si chiamano Gronghi, Le ARINGHE che si pescano in

nell'Oceano, (ove sogliono passare in infinite frotte ;) per il solito si salano, o si seccano, e si afcerte

are

larger,

and arc called

stagioni

conger eels. Herrings, which are caught at certain seasons in the ocean, (where they float in immense shoals,) are generally salted,
dried,

and smoked.

fumicano.
Il

BAccAL
salato,

MERLUZZO, sorta
disseccato.

di pesce che viene spaccato,

e

Ling or stockfish is a kind of fish which is split, dried, and

salted.
it is
it.

Prima

di cuocerlo si

mette in acqua ad ammollare,

Before being dressed, steeped in water to soften

La

BALENA

un

pesce
;

di
il

The whale
size,

smisurata

grandezza

primo della specie de'cetacei. Si pesca nei mari settentrionali ove abbonda, onde
estrarne
l'olio. I bastimenti che vanno a questa pesca si dicono balenieri. CARPIONE pesce delicatissimo d'acqua dolce, coperto di belle scaglie argentine pic-

is a fish of gigantic the chief of the cetaceous species. It is caught in the Northern Ocean, where it abounds, in order to extract the oil. The vessels

which are engaged in

this

fishery are called whalers.

Il

The carp

is

a very
fish,

delicato

fresh-water

covered
scales

chiettate di rosso.
Il

with silvery fine speckled with red.

CEFALO, dai Toscani detto muggine, pesce che nasce

nei fiumi, e quindi entra in

The
is

mullet, called

by the Tusa
fish

cans muggine,

is

that

spawned

in

rivers,
;

and

mare, ove si pesca in alcuni luoghi colle reti, in altri colla fiocina, come nella baia di Napoli, ove di notte si vede una quantit di barchette muovere lentamente, con una gran fiaccola a prua,

thence enters the sea where it is sometimes caught in nets, and sometimes with a spear, as in the bay of Naples, when a quantity of boats are seen slowly moving about, with a great torch fastened at the

234
col

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

lume
i

della quale abba-

gliano
Il

pesci,

che infilzano

prow, with which the fish are dazzled, and are then speared.

colla fiocina,

DELFINO va

in schiera, e salta

The

fuori dell'acqua.
Il

GAMBERO, ed il GRANCHIO, sono del genere dei testacei,

di

dolphin swims in slioals, and jumps out of the water. The lobster and the crab are
shell fish.

La LAMPREDA
di

UH

delicatis-

The lamprey

simo, bench indigesto pesce

is a very delicate but indigestible sea and river

mare

fiume

della

fish of the eel species.

specie delle anguille.

LUCCIO un pesce d'acqua per esser molto vorace; spesso divora i lucci pi piccoli. Deve avere circa sette cento dentini, La MORENA un pesce del Mediterraneo, va nei fiumi, e vive pi giorni fuori d'acqua. Ha somiglianza con
Il

dolce, noto

The pike is a fresh-water fish, well known for its voracity

it

often devours smaller pikes.

It

must

have
i?,

about

700

teeth.

The lamprey
fish, is

a Mediterranean
in

found
It

rivers,

and
of
eel,
is

lives

several

water.

days out resembles the

;

l'anguilla,

ma
Il

la pelle

non ha squame, ha macchie bian-

has no

scales its skin spotted white and black.

che e nericce.

NAUTiLO ha tante cartillagini, che comparendo a fior d'acqua, pomposamente tutte si spiegano, rassomigliando ad
le cui

The

nautilus has so

many

car-

tilages, that

on appearing on

the surface of the water, and

una navicella, L'orata pesce di mare,

scaglie son del color d'oro,

L'ostrica un mollusco
Il

bi-

valve notissimo, ROMBO pesce piatto, una

specie di sogliola.
in fino alla coda.

spreading them all, it resembles a little vessel. The goldfish is a sea fish, and has gold-coloured scales. The oyster is a well-known two-shelled mollusc. The turbot is a flat fish, of the
its dorsal fin extends from the eyes to the

L'aletta

sole species

dorsale s'estende dagli occhi

Il

tail.

SALAMONE

SERMONE

UH

The salmon
fish
;

is

a sea and river

is

pesce di mare e di fiume, la cui carne saporitissima. La SEPPIA CALAMAIO Contiene in se un certo liquido nero

the flesh

exquisite.

The

c!<<<Ze-^sA, also called in Ita-

lian the Ink-bottle, contains

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

simile
all'incliiostro,

235

che

getta fuori quando vien cacciato dagli altri pesci, onde

rendersi
invisibile
ai

a kind of black liquid like which it discharges when pursued by other fish, and
ink,

suoi

becomes
mies.

invisible to its ene-

nemici,

La SOGLIOLA
corpo
e
;

si

distingue per

The
its

sole is

known

for the ir-

l'irregolarit del
gli

suo piatto

regularity of its flat

body

occhi

ha da un

lato; di rado le pinne eguali,

mai
;

le

due parti della boc-

ca

suol farsela al fondo,

Lo STORIONE,

gran pesce di mare, rimontai fiumi, amando la sua carne l'acqua dolce Con le sue uova ottima.
;

eyes are to one side, its fins are seldom even, and never the two parts of its mouth. It generally lives at the bottom of the sea.

The

which enters
fresh water.
cellent.
its

sturgeon, a large sea fish rivers, liking

Its flesh is ex-

salate

in

botti,

se

ne fa

il

caviale.
Il

TONNO

il

pi grosso pesce

mangiabile.
libbre,

Pesa 400

e fino

a 1000, e talora fino a 2000 ed voracissimo,

se

is made with eggs salted in casks. The tunny is the largest eatable fish it weighs sometimes 400 to 1000, and even 2000 pounds, and is very voraci-

Caviar

ous.

La TROTA
ne'laghi

per lo pi d'acqua chiara

la fa
;

The

fresh- water lakes.

guizza due o tre piedi fuori dell'acqua per acchiappare

insetti,

generally lives in It leaps two or three feet out of the water to catch insects.
ti^out

Insetti,

Insects.

L'ape, ola pecchia, nota per la sua industria nel fare il

The bee

is

remarked

for its in-

mele

e la cera.

Neil' arnia

alveario regna

suprema

la

regina sopra circa qundici o trenta mila api operaie. Le api pungono con un pungiglione vanno a sciami, ronzando per l'aria, e dai fiori traggono il pi squisito ali;

dustry in making was and honey. In the bee-hive the queen reigns supreme over about 15,000 or 30,000

working

bees.
;

Bees sting

with a sting they fly buzzing about in swarms, and extract from flowers the most
exquisite food.

mento.

236
II

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

BACO DA SETA, O FILUGELLO, quando s'incrisalida, s'inviluppa in un involucro tessuto da se. Si nutrisce di foglie di gelso, abbonda in Lombardia,

The

chrysalis, rolls itself

little
it

silk-worm, in becoming a up in a covering of silk which

spins. They are fed on mulberry leaves, and are kept in great quantities in

Lombardy.
Il

ERUCO

s'incrisalida, sfarfalla,

The

caterpillar

e diventa farfalla.

Eode
far

la

chrysalis,
butterfly.

becomes a and bursts out a

It

verdura,

suol
orti,

gran

eats

leaves,

guasti agli
Il

and commits great ravages

in the kitchen garden. di

CALABRONE

Una Specie

The hornet

grossa vespa, armato di gagliardo pungiglione, e ronza

fortemente.

is a large kind of wasp, with a sting, and buzzes loudly.

La CAVALLETTA, O LOCUSTA,
di varii colori e

The

locust

is

of various sizes
;

grandezze
le

ha

le

gambe

ale pi

and colours its legs and wings are longer than those
cricket. It is very and a swarm commits the greatest ravages. The grasshopper, in the heat of summer, with its sharp note irritates the ear. The butterfly springs from the which, greedy caterpillar, after being transformed into a chrysalis, becomes developed, and, bursting from its covering, flies forth a beautimanyful butterfly, with coloured wings, which sports amidst flowers, extracting their honeyed juice. According to the poets, the butter-

lunghe di quelle del grillo. E molto vorace, e volando a

schiere fa guasti infiniti,

of the

voracious,

La

tate, col

CICALA, nel bollor dell'essuo roco stridere,

all'udito.

molto infesta

La FARFALLA

nascc dal vorace bruco, il quale si trasforma in crisalide, e poi sviluppandosi, si spoglia del suo involucro, e fuori se n' esce con ale variopinte, la leggiadra farfalla, la quale va scherzando fra i

suggendone il mellifluo Secondo i poeti, umore. l'emblema dell'anima,

fiori,

fly is the

emblem

of the soul.

La FORMICA,

a torto o a ragione, vien reputata l'insetto il pii industrioso, infaticabile, ed

accorto.

The ant

is

considered, falsely

or with reason, the most industrious, indefatigable,

and
dif-

Le

differenti Fj)ecie

si

prudent of insects.

The

THRASES AND DIALOGUES.

la guerra reciprocamente, e si battono accanitamente, Il GRILLO stride e salterella, e
si

237

muovono

ferent families go to

war with

diletta nel calore del foco-

lare,

La LUCCIOLA
che
al

un vermicello,

one another, and fight with great desperation. The cricket chirps and hops, and likes the heat of the hearth. The glow-worm is a little worm,

buio sfolgora pi o meno, secondo che apre o chiude le sue alette. Ce ne sono pure senza ale,

which shines more or

less in

La MOSCA,
mili
ria,

il

MOSCHERixo,
tutti

e sil'a-

the dark, in proportion as it opens its wings. Some have no wings. The fly buzzes about in the air,

vanno ronzando per

dandoci

annoying us
into
throat.

all,

by flying

molta noia

our eyes, mouth, and

col cacciarsi negli occhi, in

bocca, in gola,
Il

RAGNO,
bile

ARAGXO, con miratesse

il

Ttie spider, with wonderful industry, spins

little
its

industria,

suo

web

to catch
it

ragnatelo, per prendere altri

animaletti, e cibarsene,

insects,

on

which

feeds.

La SANGUISUGA,

MIGNATTA,

The

leech

is

put on the body to

s'applica al corpo per succhi-

extract unhealthy blood.

arne cattivo sangue,

Fiori,

Flowers.
fioretto au-

L'amaranto
L'anemone
color

un

The amaranth
little

is

an autumnal

tunnale di un color porporino,

un bellissimo
;

fiore

The

flower of a purple hue. anemone is a beautiful

;

che nasce da bulbo

di

porporino o piuttosto variato di pi colori. I poeti fingono che l'anemone nascesse dal sangue di

bulbous flower it is purple, or rather variegated with several colours. Poets have
fancied

that

the

anemone

Adone,

ucciso dal cinghiale,

La balsamina
estivo,

un vago fiore bench inodorifero,

di vivacissimi colori.
gJTiaria delle Indie,

ori-

sprang from the blood of Adonis, who was killed by a wild boar. The balsam is a pretty summer its coflower, but scentless lours are very brilliant, and it comes from India.
;

238

PHRASES ANO DIALOGUKS.

LacAMPANELLATURCHiNA cresce
spontanea nei campi e
le colline,
Il
si;

The

blue-bell

grows wild
hills.

in

per
SI

fields

and on

CONVOL VOLVO
;

VILUCCHIO

The convolvulus twines round

the other plants near
it
;

avvolge intorno alle altre piante il suo lungo fusto coperto di fiori di varii colori,

its

long stem

is

covered with

flowers of various colours.

L'eliotropio
in turchino
Il

ha
;

gentilissimi

The heliotrope has pretty bluishwhite blossoms

like vanilla.

fiorellini bianchi,

che danno

and smells

sa di vainiglia,

Il

fioraliso un fior campestre che cresce fra i grani e bianco e azzurro, GAROFOLO pu chiamarsi il re dei fiori pel suo odore, come la rosa vien detta la regina per la sua bellezza. Gli uni sanno di chiodi di garofano,
;

The

corn-flower is a wild flower it that grows in corn fields

;

white and blue. The carnation may be called the king of flowers for its scent,
is

gli

altri di viole
i

la

forma

queen some smell of some of violets the shape and colours of this
as the rose is called the
for its

beauty

cloves,

ed
Il

colori di questo fiore sono

flower are beautiful.

vaghissimi,

GERANIO
quale
le
si

una pianta con

i

la

The geranium adorns gardens

and rooms
;

adornano
il

giardini e

the scarlet gera-

sale,

rosato mette fiori

;

tinti del
si

stima

il

pi vivo scarlatto muschiato vulner-

nium has bright scarlet flowers, the musk geranium is

medicinal.

II

fiori

GIACINTO nasce dal bulbo i sono bellissimi scempi o

;

The hyacinth is a bulbous plant,

with beautiful flowers, either
single or double, blue, white,

doppi,
gialli.

turchini,

bianchi,

and yellow.

Il

GIGLIO d'odore acuto ma soave, maestoso fiorisce sul suo lungo fusto, ed l'orgoglio del giardino.

The

lily has a strong scent

;

it

pleasing but flowers ma-

jestically at the

summit

of its

Il

GIRASOLE vien cos appellato volgendosi ognora verso il

sole.

long stem, and is the pride of the garden. The sun-flower is so called from always turning towards the
sun.

Il

LEUCOio

scempio o doppio,

The

stock gillyflower

is

simple

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

fior vengono a ciocche, ed hanno un soave odore,
i

239
;

or

double

the flowers are

clustered,

and have a sweet

smell.

La MARGHERITINA
ha
i

PRATELLINA

The

fiori

rosa,

bianchi tinti di nasce spontanea nei

la

daisy, with its white and pink-tipped blossoms, grows wild in fields.
is an evergreen, with white blossoms and a sweet smell. The ancients dedicated this plant to Venus,

campi;
Il

MIRTO
ha
fiori

MORTELLA

Un

The myrtle

arboscello sempre verde, che

bianchi ed odore grato. Gli antichi lo dedicarono a Venere, quindi vien riguardato qual simbolo dell'amore,
Il

and it was considered the symbol of love.

MUGHETTO ha
fioretti

gentilissimi

The

bianchi e campani-

lily of the valley has pretty white bell-shaped flowers.

formi.

L'orecchio d'orso, pianta Alpina che comparisce in Italia nel mese di Febbraio le fronde della doppia pianta sono vellutate, ve ne sono di
;

The

auricula is an Alpine plant which, in Italy, buds in February the leaves of the double auricula are velvety,
;

and there are several kinds

of
it.

pi specie,
Il

papavero BIANCO contiene un latte il quale l'oppio di

prima qualit.
bella,

The white poppy

milky
juice,

which

contains a is the

strongest kind of opium.

La ROSA, bench gambo coperto

ha
;

il
i

The

rose,

though

beautiful, has
closed,

di

spine

the stem covered with thorns;

bottoni chiusi da prima, sboc-

the rosebuds, at

first

ciano in bellissime rose spiranti un soavissimo profumo. Vi sono le rose damaschine, d'ogni mese, le cinnamomo, le muscose, le canine, &c.
Il

open into

blossomed flowers, breathing a sweet scent. There are damask, monthly, cinnamon, and dog roses.
full

TULIPANO, bench inodorifero,

The
is

tulip,

although scentless,

un vago
I

fiore di colori

a pretty brilliant-coloured

vivacissimi.

tulipani

co-

perti di fiori vaghi, sono belli

Tulip-beds, covered with these flowers, look very

flower.

a vedere.

pretty.

La modesta viola
riceve
il

spira intorno

The modest

little violet difi"uses

a se un profumo squisito, e

suo

nome

dal bel

fume, and takes

around itself an exquisite perits name from

240

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

the violet colour of
flowers.
its

colore violetto dei suoi vaghi

fioretti,

sweet

DrALOGIII,

Oh

buon giorno

ella

giunge

Ah,
us.

Dialogues. you are good morning

;

proprio in punto per far cola-

just in time to breakfast with

zione con noi,

La ringrazioinfiiiitamente;
zione,

sono

Many

thanks, I have

break;

gi due ore che ho fatto cola-

ma

se

me

lo permette,
caff.

bever una tazza di

Come stanno i suoi ? Non benissimo, chi

dato, chi

infred-

ha mal di testa, chi mal di gola, ed io ho sofferto di mal di denti per alcuni
giorni,

but if you will allow me, I will take a cup of coffee. How are you all at home ? Not very well some have colds, some headaches, some sore throats, and I have had for some days severe toothache.
fasted
;

two hours ago

Non

meno ella ha buona ed ho caro di vedere pu uscire. che Oggi fa cos bel tempo, che
di

You
see

look very

well notwith-

cera,

standing, and I

am

glad to

che lo possono, dovrebbero fare una passegtutti quelli

you can go out. To-day is so fine, every one should take a walk who can.

giata,

Mi

stamattina di credeva buon'ora che sarebbe piovuto, ma poi s' rischiarato, ed ora
fa

thought
this

cleared,
is

it was going to rain morning early, but it and now the weather

un tempo magnifico.
;

glorious.
;

Mangi un bocconcino
posso
offrirle ?

che cosa
delle

Eat something

ecco
della

uova

fresche,

carne
t,

what will you take? here are fresh eggs, cold meat, preserves, tea and
coffee.

fredda, delle conserve, del

e del caff.

Per farle compagnia, prender un poco di pollo freddo, una fettina di presciutto, ed un
bicchier d'acqua,

To keep you company,

take a
of
little

I will

cold fowl, a slice

ham, and a glass of cold

you
for the toast

water.
I will trouble

Vuole averla bont di passarmi i crostini ed il butirro. TI servo ha dimenticato i cucchiai ed

il

and

butter.

The

servant has

forgotten spoons and salt.

sale.

niRASKS AND DIALOGUES.

211

Abbia
nare,

la

compiacenza

eli

suo-

Be

so kind as to ring.

Mariuccia cosa vuoi per colazione ?

Little

Mary, what

will

you take
roll.

for breakfast ?

Del

latte caldo ed

Come

sta

un panino, volentieri nella nuova

;

Some warm milk and a

How

casa ?

Spero che sia comoda e convenga alla sua famiglia ? Non molto, non vi sono abbastanza camere, e il pian terreno malamente disposto. Le sale di ricevimento mi son sembrate assai belle, special-

mente

il

salone,

Ha

ragione,
tutti

ma
i

disgraziata-

do you like your new house ? I hope it is comfortable, and suits your family ? Not very well there are too and the few bed-rooms, ground-floor is badly laid out. The public rooms seemed to me very handsome, particularly the drawing-room. Yes, you are right but unfor;

mente

cammini fanno

tunately

all

the

chimneys

fumo, e la cucina estremamente umida. Vi il gaz in tutte le stanze ?

smoke, and the kitchen is extremely damp. Are all the rooms lighted with

gas?

Non vi in nessuna, Come si chiama il suo padrone

di

None

of them.
is

What

your landlord's name

casa?

Mi ha

detto il suo nome, ma ora non me lo ricordo, proposito, son venuto oggi ad

He
By

has told
I

now

me his name, but have forgotten it.

augurare a tutti loro un felice Capo d'anno, ed un allegro

the bye, I came to-day to all a happy New Year and a merry Christmas.

wish you

Ho

Natale, portato questi giocattoli per i fanciulli non sono ancora

;

have brought these toys

the
little

for

ones

are they

up

alzati ?

yet?
tutti
alle

Ci leviamo

sette e

We
The

all rise

at half- past seven

mezzo

nell'inverno, e alle sei

in winter,

and at

six in

sum-

nell'estate,

mer.

I ragazzi saranno
de' suoi regali.

ben contenti

children will be delighted

gifts.

with your

Mi permetta
C-,

di presentarle
il

un

mio intimo amico,

Signor

Allow me to introduce to you an intimate friend of mine, Mr. C.

212

PIIUASES

AND DIALOGUES.
I

Ho

niolto caro di far la sua coci

noscenza, e spero che

ve-

dremo

spesso,

Ella molto cortese, E questa la prima volta cb'ella viene in Londra ? No, vi ho dimorato per molto

very happy to make your acquaintance, and I hope we shall see one another often. You are very kind. Is this the first time you have

am

tempo prima
Indie,

di andare nelle

been in London ? No, I lived here a long time before going to India.

Come

le piaceva il modo di vivere in India ? Passabilmente per il clima

;

How

did you like Indian

life ?

non mi

si

confaceva.

Ha
S,

l'intenzione di ritornarvi?
fra poco,

sei

Il

ma fra cinque o anni spero di potermi stabilire in Europa, mio amico va a passare un poco di tempo in Dublino, e le sarei molto tenuto, se ella potesse favorirgli alcune lettere d'introduzione.

Pretty well but the climate did not agree with me. Do you intend to return thither? Yes, shortly but in five or six years I shall be able to settle
;
;

in

Europe.
is

My

friend

going to spend a

short time in Dublin, and I would feel much obliged by

your giving him a few

of introduction.

letters

Con

tutto

il

piacere
si

mi

dis-

Most willingly
that
are just

but I regret

piace per che molti dei miei

migliori amici

trovino ora

many of my best friends now out of Ireland.

fuori d'Irlanda,

Ci non fa niente, una o due conoscenze bastano perch ne faccia molte altre. Ella pu star certo che io far di tutto per servirla,

That does not signify, one or two acquaintances will introduce him to many more.

You may
do
It is time

rely on me, that I will

all I

can to obl'ge you.

tempo di uscire, Dove vanno ? Andiamo a fare una passeggiata a cavallo prima di pranzo.
Faccia i miei complimenti alla sua signora madre. Ho appunto preso in affitto una
rivederci.

we were going.
take a ride

Where

are you going ?

We

are going to

before

dinner.
to

Good-bye

remember me

your mother.

I have just

taken an unfurnished

casa smobigliata, ed ora bi-

house, and
nish
it.

now

must

fur-

sogna che l'ammobigli,

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

243

La

proprietario

pigione molto cara, non vuole tarla per meno,

ma

il

The

affit-

rent is very high, but the landlord will not let it for
less.

Bisogna che trovi un bell'apammobigiiato, partamento per un amico che deve arrivare in citt questa setti-

want

to find a nice furnished lodging for a friend, who is coming to town this week.

Mi

mana, sa male
l

di

non potere

assis-

am
in

tervi nelle vostre ricerche,

Ecco

una casa che ha un

mi fanno, e la casa non mi va a
adesso ?

There
I

sorry I cannot assist you your search. is a house with a lodging

cartello d'appigionasi,

bill.

Le

stanze non
di

do not like the rooms, or the

landlady.

padrona
genio.

Dove dimorate

Where
I

are

you living now

Sto a casa di mio fratello, ma siccome ho intenzione di fermarmi qui per qualche tempo, bisogna che prenda casa.

Facciamo una partita chi o a dama.

agli scac-

Non

giuoco n all'uno n
?

al-

staying at my brother's, but as I think of settling here for some time, I must take a house. Let us have a game of chess or draughts. I do not play either.

am

l'altro,

Giuocate mai alle carte Molto di rado, Suonate il pianoforte ?

Do you

ever play cards

io era in Italia mi divertiva a suonarlo, ma ora son fuori d'esercizio, I ragazzi sono stati tutta la mattina in giardino a ruzzare, ora chiamateli a merenda,

Quando

Very seldom. Do you play the piano ? When I was in Italy I used
play, but
practice.

to

now

am

out of

The

all

children have been playing the morning in the gar;

den

call

them

in

now

to

lunch.
Siete disposto a venire a
delle visite
ftir

Are you inclined

visits

to

pay some
are

meco oggi?

Molto

purch siamo di ritorno prima delle cinque.

volentieri,

Certainly,

with me to-day ? provided we

five.

home by

Andremo

in citt in legno, e se

We

shall

non saremo stanchi, possiamo

ritornare a piedi,

then, if

we

drive to town, and are not tired, wo

may walk

back.


244
Facciamo un
niRASES AND DIALOGUES.
giro sui prati,

Let US take a turn meadow.

in

the

Fate attenzione ai vostri affari, Non badate a ci che dicono,

essi sclierzano,

Pay attention to your business. Pay no attention to what they

say, they are jesting.

Ci fecero ogni attenzione immaginabile, e non vollero permettere che restassimo

alla locanda.

They

paid us every possible and would not allow us to remain at the hotel.
attention,

Siate

pivi

rispettoso

verso

le

Pay
I

more

respect
five

to

aged
for this

persone attempate,

people.

Questo cammeo mi costa cinque lire quanto avete pagato il

;

have paid

pounds
;

cameo brooch

how much

vostro ? Nulla, poich

galato,

did you pay for yours?

mi

stato
ella

re-

proposito

d'Italia,

sa

Nothing, because it was made a present to me. Apropos, you know I have

che ho cominciato a prender lezione d'Italiano, ella che lo conosce a fondo potrebbe assistermi in questo studio. Ben volentieri, se lo vuole d'ora innanzi parleremo sempre in questa dolce lingua, e possiamo pure leggere insieme un qualche poeta Italiano, Mi si dice che la poesia sia molto difficile, ed io che non sono che un principiante bisogna che resti alla prosa. Vorrebbe dirmi i differenti modi di rendere in Italiano la parola /a?V.^ E perch no. Faccia attenzione alle seguenti frasi, ed ella imparer a tradurla in tutti, quasi tutti i suoi varii
significati
:

begun to take Italian lessons, you who know Italian perfectly might help me in my
studies.

With we

all

my heart.

If

shall henceforth

you like always

speak that sweet language, and we can read together

some of the Italian

I believe Italian
difficult,

poets.
is

poetry

very

and as I am only a beginner, I must content Could myself with prose. you tell me the different ways of expressing in Italian the word /afr.^

With
you
late

pleasure.
will learn

Pay

attention

to the following phrases,

and
its

how

to transall
:

the word in various significations

Una Una
I

hela signora.

fair lady.

carnagione bianca^

A fair
Fair

complexion.

capelli biondi.

hair.

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

245

Un

prezzo giusto,
parola,

fair price.
it is

Questa
zione
fiera,

quando
la

un

When

a substantive, this
is

sostantivo,

ha

significa-

word means a market, and

in Italian fiera.

di mercato, e corrisponde alla parola Italiana

La

ringrazio infinitamente, e cercher di trar profitto dai di lei cortesi schiarimenti. Bisogna che la lasci per adesso, a rivederci a questa
sera,
ella Inglese ?

Many

profit
tion.

thanks; I will try and by your kind explanaI must leave you now, so good-bye till this evening.

Is
alle-

England your native country?

Son nato

in

Germania, e

vato in Francia, Sta ella pi volentieri in

in

citt,

was born in Germany, and brought up in France. Which do you like best, town
or country ?
If I could

campagna

?
il

Se potessi seguire
starei

mio gusto,
in
citt,

follow

my

taste,

l'inverno

l'estate in

Ho

da

campagna. chiederle un favore,

dica prima, e se sar
potere,

vuol'ella accordarmelo ?

Che me lo in mio

non

glielo

would live in town in winter, and in the country in summer. I have a favour to ask you, will you grant it ? Let me hear it first I will not refuse it if I can help doing
;

ricuser certo,

so.

Desidererei

che ella mi conducesse seco a Parigi la prima volta che vi andr, L' saltato il grillo di vestire sempre a bruno, Perch porta degli stivali cosi sottili? ella prender un'infreddatura, Mi son cavato in questo mo-

want you
Paris
there.

to

take

me

to

when you next

go

She has taken a fancy to dress always in mourning. Why do you wear such light boots ? you will get cold.
I
off my strong boots before dressing for dinner. What dress will you wear to-

have just taken

mento

gli stivali grossi

il

onde
?

vestirmi per

pranzo.

Che

vestito

si

metter oggi

day
Quello che ha riportato
modista,
ieri

?
lias

la

The

one the milliner brought back yesterday.

246
Portami
taglio,
i

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

guanti ed
portar
il

ventutti

Bring me

my

gloves and fan.

Non

posso
li

meco

I cannot carry all these parcels,

questi

me

Vuol prima di uscire ? Ho bevuto una tazza

involti, bisogna che mandiate, bere un poco di vino

you must send them.

Will you take some wine before going out ? I have taken a cup of coffee. Are you not tired and sleepy, after having danced so much? Rather, but I must write a letter before I go to bed.
I

di caff,

Non

siete

stanco, e

non avete

sonno dopoaver tanto ballato? Un poco, pure devo scrivere una lettera prima di andare a letto, Ho corso un gran pericolo oggi il cavallo mi ha levato la mano, e son caduto. Spero che non vi siate fatto alcun male ? ]\Ii son fatto molto male ad un braccio, e un poco ad un
;

have had a narrow escape today my horse ran away, and I fell. hope you are not hurt ?
;

hurt

my arm

severely,

and

my
I

foot a little.

piede.

Ho

gran fame, Tanto meglio;

resti

a pranzo

con noi. Si accomodi sulla poltrona, Si adagi sul canap,

Non

faccia ceremonie.

Ho

gran piacere di vederla

salute.

in

stay and dine with us. Sit down in the arm-chair. Lie down on the sofa. Do not stand on ceremony. I am overjoyed to see you again
;

am very hungry. So much the better

buona

in

Quando

ella

ritornata

di

When
What

Francia

good health. did you return France ?

from

Io tornai sabato passato, Che le sembra di quel paese

I returned last Saturday.

?

Bisogna essere senza parzialit, la Francia un bellissimo

paese,

do you think of that country ? To be impartial, France is a very fine country.

che dice dei Francesi

And what do you

French
?

say of the

Sono

molto
i

civili

cortesi

They

are extremely civil and

verso

forestieri,

polite to foreigners.

PHRASES AND DIALOGUES.

In qua! parte della Francia
ella stata ?

247

Sono

stato tutto
:

il

tempo

in

In what part of France have you been ? I was all the time in Paris
:

Parigi nell'andarvi sono passato per la Normandia, e al mio ritorno, per la Piccardia,
Si vede che
i

going thither I passed through Normandy, and on my return, through Picardy.

in

giorni cominciano

The days begin

ceptibly.
It

to shorten per-

a scorciare,

segno che saremo ben presto

alla fine delle belle giornate,

Kon sempre

noi

abbiamo

qualche volta l'estate in autunno, e l'inverno nella primavera,

is a sign that we shall soon be at the end of the fine days. Not always; we sometimes have summer in autumn, and winter in spring.

pai^TED

II

y OMVEl!

AND BOYD, EDINBURGH.

EDUCATIONAL WORKS
PUBLISHED BY

Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh;

BOLD ALSO BY

SIMPKIN, MARSHALL,

AND

CO..

LONDON.

12 White's History of France Great Britaiu and Ireland.l2 13 Sacred History 12 History of Scotland 13 History of Kome

Surenne's

New French

French Classics
Liatin

Dialogues... 19 19

and Greek.

Writing, Arithmetic, eto.

15 Gray's Arithmetic 15 Hutton's Book-keeping Ingram's Principles of Arithmetic..l5 16 Maclaren's Arithmetic
16 15 16 Copy Lines 16 Smith's Arithmetical Works 14 15 Stewart's Arithmetical Works Trotter's Arithmetical Work8...14, 16 New Code Arithmetic 14 Hutton's Book-keeping... 15

Book-keeping

Melrose's Arithmetic

Scott's Arithmetical

Works

Philosophy, Mathematics,

eto.

Barclay's Geometry for Schools 16 Ingram's System of Mathematics... 16 Trotter's Key to do 16 Schwegler's Philosophy 16 Stirling's Text-Book to Kant 16

French.
Beljame's French Grammar, etc... 20 Caron's First French Class-Book...20 First French Reading-Book.20 20 French Grammar 20 Chamhaud's Fahles Choisies 20 Christison's French Grammar Choisis 20 Fables et Contes Fleuiy's History of Frauce..20 20 French New Testament 20 Hallard's French Grammar Schneider's First French Course. ...

22 24 Clyde's Greek Syntax 21 Rudiments of the Latin Language 22 Dymock's Caesar and Sallust 22 Edin. Academy Class-Books: Rudiments of Latin Language.. ..21 Latin Delectus 21, 24 Rudiments of Greek Language... 21 Greek Extracts 21 Ferguson's (Prof.) Gram. Exercises.24 Latin Delectus 24 Ovid's Metamorphoses .24 Fergusson's (Dr) Xenophon's Anabasis 23 Homer's Iliad, with Vocab...23 Geddes' (Prof.) Greek Grammar 21 Greek Testament, by Duncan 23 Hunter's Ruddiman's Rudiments... 22 Sallust, Virgil, and Horace. .22 Livy, Books 21 to 25 22 M'Dowall's Csesar and Virgil 22 Melville's Lectiones Selectas 22 Ogilvie's First Latin Course 22 Stewart's Cornelius Nepos 23 First Greek Course 23 Advanced Greek Course.23
Cicero's Orationes Select

Ainsworth's Latin Dictionary

ItaUan.

Lemmi's

Italian

Grammar

24

German.
Fischart's First Class-Book 24 Reader in Prose and Verse. .24

School Registers.
Pupil's Daily Register of Marks 17 school Register of Attendance,

Conversation-Grammar French Reader French Manual

crin Littraire French Composition
Surenne'B Dictiouanes..
,

Absence, and Fees

17

Geometrical Drawing.
Kennedy's Grade Geometry
16

EDUCATIONAL WORKS.
ENGLISH BEADING, GRAMMAR,
Eto.

In the initiatory department of instruction a valuable series of works was prepared by Dr M'Cuiloch, formerly Head Master of the Circus Place School, Edinburgh, afterwards Minister of the West Church, Greenock.

DB M'CULLOCH'S SERIES OF CLASS-BOOKS.

for the use of Schools where the general mental culture of the pupil, as well as his proficiency in the art of reading, is studiously

These Books are intended

and systematically aimed at. They form, collectively, a progressional Series, so constructed and graduated as to conduct the pupil, by regular stages, from the elementary sounds of the language to its highest and most complex forms of speech and each separate Book is also progressively arranged, the lessons which are more easily read and understood always taking the lead, and preparing the way for those of greater difficulty. The subject-matter of the Books is purposely miscellaneous. Yet it is always of a character to excite the interest and enlarge the knowledge of the reader. And with the design of more effectually promoting his mental growth and nurture, the various topics are introduced in an order conformaiile to that in which the chief faculties of the juvenile mind are usually developed. That the moral feelings of the pupil may not be without their proper stimulus and nutriment, the lessons are pervaded throughout by the religious
;

and Christian element.

DR M'CULLOCH'S READING-BOOKS FOR

First Reading-Book.
Do.
Large
l^d.

SCHOOLS.

Type, Edition, in tvfo Parta, price 2d. each.

Second Reading-Book.

3d.

Third Reading-Book, containing simple Pieces in Prose and Verse, with Exercises. Now Printed in Larger Type. lOd.

Fourth Reading-Book,
interest.

containing only Lessons likely to

Is.

With Synopsis of Spelling.

6d.

Series of Lessons in Prose and Verse.

2s.

Course of Elementary Reading

ATDBE, compiled from popular Writers.

in

Science and Liter

3s.

39 Woodcuts.

Manual
tical,

Pracwith Exerciaes; adapted to the Analytical mode of Tnition. With a Chapter on Analysis of Sentences, la. 6d.

of English

Grammar,

Philosophical and

English Reading^ Grammar,

etc.

Lennie's Principles of English

I

Grammar.

Comprising

the Substance of all the most approved English Grammars, briefly defined, and neatly arranged; with Copious Exercises in Parsing and Syntax. Gopynght Edition ; with the Author's latest improvements, and a Chapter on Analysis of Sentences. Is. 6d.

The Author's Key

cises in

containing, besides the corrected ExerParsing and Syntax, many useful Critical Remarks, Hints, and Observations, and explicit and detailed instructions as to the
;

best

method of teaching Grammar.

New

Edition.

3s. 6d.

Analysis of Sentences: Being the Appendix Grammar adapted for General Use. Price 3d. Ket,

to Lennie's
6d.

The Principles

of English

Grammar
Is. Cd.

with a Series of

Progressive Exercises, and a Supplementary Treatise on Analysis of Sentences. By Dr James Douglas, lately Teacher of English,

Great King Street, Edinburgh.

Simplicity of expression and methodical arrangement have been nnlfoimly aimed at; and copious exercises for the practice of pupils have been introduced throughout.

Douglas's Initiatory Grammar,

for Junior Classes, Printed in larger type, and containing a Supplementary Treatise on Analysis of Sentences. 6d.

The Bead Master, Belie Vue House, Bristol." It contains the best and tersest explanations for learners that have appeared." The Head Master, Milton House Academy, Lewes. "The Initiatory Grammar is an especial favourite with my junior boys."

Douglas's Progressive English Reader.

English Reading-Books. numerous Engravings.
First Book. Second Book.
2d. 4d.
I

Series of The Earlier Books are illustrated with

Thibd Book.

Is.
Is. 6d.

Fourth Book.

Fifth Book. Sixth Book.

2s. 2s. 6d.

Douglas's Selections for Recitation, with Introductory

and Explanatory Notes;
for Schools.
Is. 6d.

Douglas's Spelling and Dictation Exercises.

Athenceum."
nunciation

Price

Is.

may

good practical book, from which correct spelling and probe acquired."

Douglas's English Etymology:

tives,

Text-Book of Deriva-

with numerous Exercises.

Price

2s.

Scotsman."

An

especially excellent book of derivatives."

English Reading,

Grammar,

etc.

Outlines of English Grammar and Analysis, for Elementary Schools, with Exercises. By Walter Scott
Dalgleish, M.A. Edin.,
International College.
lately one of the Masters in the

London

6d., or 8d. cloth.

Key,

Is.

Dalgleish's Progressive English cises. 2s. Key, 2s. 6d.

Grammar,

with Exer-

in the University of Oxford; Author of the Anglo-Saxon Dictionary, etc., etc. " Quite a practical work, and contains a vast quantity of important information, well arranged, and brought up to the present improved state of philology. I have never seen so much matter brought together In so short a space."

From Dr Joseph Boswobth, Professor of Anglo-Saxon

Dalgleish's Grammatical Analysis, with Exercises. 9d. Key, 2s.

Progressive
for

Dalgleish's Outlines of English Composition, Elementary Schools, with Exercises. 6d. Key, 4d.
Dalgleish's

Introductory
based on

Text-Book
Is.

of

English
containing

COMPOSITION,
Dalgleish's

Grammatical Synthesis;

Sentences, Paragraphs, and Short Essays.

Advanced Text-Book of English Comtreating of Style, Prose 2s. 6d.

POSITION,
2s.

Themes, and

Versification.

Both Books bound together,

Key,

2s. 6d.

Lamb's Tales from Shakespeare.

Oliver and Boyd's
Is.

School Edition.

Beautifully Illustrated. Adapted for the New Code.

Robinson Crusoe (Oliver and Boyd's School Edition). BeauAdapted for the New Code. Is. tifully Illustrated. The Child's Story Book, for Junior Cl.\sses. Illustrated. A series of favourite Tales, including, besides other stories, Cinderella, Jack

and the Bean Stalk, The Babes in the Wood, Tom Thumb, Sinbad the Sailor, Ali Bab and the Forty Thieves, Jack the Giant-Killer, Aladdin, etc., etc. Adapted for the
Code.
Is.

New

Dictionary of the English Language,

containing

the Pronunciation, Etymology, and Explanation of all Words authorized by Eminent Writers. To which are added, .a Vocabulary of the lioots of English Words, and an accented list of Greek, Latin, and Scripture Proper Names. By Alexander Reid, LL.D., late Head Master of the Edinburgh Institution. Reduced to 2s 6d.

Dr Reid's Rudiments

of English

Grammar.

Greatly

Improved. This book is concise, simple, and of easy application. Copious Exercises have been introduced throughout; together with a new Chapter on the Analysis of Sentences. 6d.

English Reading, Grammar,

etc.

Dr Eeid's Rudiments of English Composition.

Copious Exercises.
Remodelled.
2s.

With
A

Key,

2s. (>d.

The work now includes Systematic Exercises in Sentence-making. distinct division has been devoted to the Structure of Paragraphs. The sections on Descriptive and Narrative Essays have been entirely rewritten.

History of English Literature with an Outline of the Origin and Growth of the English Language. Illu.strated by Extracts. For Schools and Private Students. By Professor
;

Spalding.

Revised and continued.

3s. 6d.

Tlie wliole work has undergone thorough and careful revision. The chapters on the Language, and those on our Early Literature, have been brought into harmony with the results of recent philological and historical investigations; while the record of events has been brought down to the present time. A few explanatory notes have been added in an Appendix, with the view of removing the difficulties which recondite allusions and illustrations are apt to cast in the path of the young student.

Studies

in Composition: a Text-book for Arlvanced By David Pryde, M.A., LL.D., Head Master of the Classes. Edinburgh Merchant Company's Educational Institution for Young
Ladies.
2s.

English Composition for the Use of Schools.

By

PiOBERT Armstrong, LL.D., Madras College, St Andrews; and Thomas Armstrong, Heriot Foundation School, Edinburgh. Part I., Is. 6d. Part II., 2s. Both Parts bound together, 3s. Key, 2s.

Armstrong's English Etymology.

2s.

Armstrong's Etymology for Junior Classes,

4d.

Etymological Guide to the English Language.

This is a collection, alphabetically arranged, of the principal and prefixes, with their derivatives and compounds.

Is. 6d.

roots, affixes,

Old

Testament

Biography,

containing

notices

of the

chief persons in Holy Scripture, in the form of Questions, with references to Scripture for the Answers. 6d.

New

Testament Biography, in the form of Questions, with references to Scripture for the Answers, on the same plan as
the preceding.
6d.

English Beading,

Grammar,

etc.

STANDARD EEADING-BOOKS.
By James Colvillb,
M.A., D.Sc, Principal of Newton Place Establishment, Glasgow, formerly English Master, George Watson's College School, Edinburgh, one of the Educational Institutions of the Merchant Company.

Primer: being
to

Spelling and Reading Lessons Introductory

(Illustrated.)

Standard

I,

36 pages.
;

IJd.

First Standard Eeading-Book

Script.
(Illustrated.)

with

Easy Lessons

in

95 pages.

4d. in stiff wrapper, or 6d. cloth.

Second Standard Eeading-Book with Dictation

;

Exercises,

partly in Script.

(Illustrated.)

108 pages.
;

4d.,

or 6d. cloth.

Third Standard Eeading-Book

partly in Script.

with Dictation Exercises,

8d.

144 pages, strongly bound.

Fourth Standard Eeading-Book; with

216 pages, strongly bound.
Is. 3d.

Dictation Exercises.

Fifth Standard Eeading-Book

300 pages, strongly bound.
Is. 6d.

with Dictation Exercises.

Sixth Standard Eeading-Book

bound.
2s.

with Biographical Notes,

394 pages, strongly

and Outlines for Exercises in Composition.

6d.

Glasgow

Infant

School

Magazine.

Compiled

by

D. Caughie, Master of the Initiatory Department in the Glasgow Normal Seminary. With numerous Woodcuts. 1st Series, 43rd Thousand, price 3s. 2nd Series, 13th Thousand, price Ss.
These volumes furnish a great variety of valuable material for intellectual and moral teaching, comprising Anecdotes and Stories, Hymns and Simple Verses set to Music; Lessons on Natural History, Botany, and on Familiar Objects; Sacred Geography, Bible Lessons, and Scripture References.

Household Economy: a Manual intended

Training Colleges and the

Margaret Maria Gordon (Miss Brewster), Author or Plenty to do and how to do it," etc 23.

for Female By Senior Class of Girls' Schools. of ""Work,

System of English Grammar, and

position.

the Principles of Cora-

With

By John White,

Exercises, and a Treatise on Analysis of Sentences. F.E.I.S. Is. 6d.

Ohject-Lesson Cards.

OBJECT-LESSON CARDS.
On the Vegetable Kingdom.
On the Animal Kingdom.
Set of 20 in a Box.
1,
Is.

Set of 14 in a Box.

1, Is.

On

the Mineral Kingdom.

Set of 14 in a Box.

1, Is.

Each subject is illustrated with specimens, attached to the Cards, of the various objects described, the whole forming an interesting Industrial Museum.

How
of

to Train Young Eyes and Ears being a Manual Object-Lessons for Parents and Teachers. By Mary Anne
:

Ross, Mistress of the Church of Scotland Normal Infant School,

EdinburgL

Is. 6d.

GEOGRAPHY AND ASTEONOMY.

Oliver and Boyd's Pronouncing Gazetteer of the World, Descriptive and Statistical. With Numerous Etymological Notices: a Geographical Dictionary fob Popular Use. Crown 8vo, 5s. or with Atlas of 32 Coloured Maps, 6s. 6d.
;

An

entirely neto Edition, vnth the latest Population Returns of our Countries, and the information otherwise brought down.

own and

other

Daily Telegraph. " GTea.t pains have evidently been taken to set down facts briefly but accurately, and its compiler has given a very fair amount of space to the results of the most recent explorations and discoveries. It will prove a most useful book of reference."

School Geography.

By James Clyde,

M.A., LL.D., one

of the Classical Masters of the Edinburgh Academy. With Special Chapters on Mathematical and Physical Geography, and Technological Appendix. Eevised throughout. With 9 Coloured Maps. 4s.
Educational News. " The grand characteristic of the ' School Geography is its singular readableness the sunny ray its clear, fluent, lively narrative of realistic art that everywhere brightens the subject with the charm aLmost of romance, dispelling the heavy cloud of superfluous facts and figures."

'

Dr

Clyde's Elementary

Geography

With an Appendix on
With
5 Coloured Maps.

Sacred Geography.
Is. 6d.

Eevised throughout.

Educational Times."

thoroughly trustworthy manual."

Geography and Astronomy.

Stewart's
tical,

Compendium

of

Modern Geography,

Poli-

Phtsigal, and Mathematical. With Descriptive and Pronouncing Tables, Questions for Examination, etc. Enlarged and entirely New Edition. 525 pages. With 11 Coloured Maps. 3s. 6d.

This edition has been most carefully prepared, and gives a life-like picture of each country, with the results of recent census-taking in various parta of the world. The work is unusually complete in every respect.

An

Abstract of General Geography, comprehending a more minute Description of the British Empire, and of Palestine or the Holy Land, etc. With Numerous Exercises. For Junior Classes. By John Whitk, F.E.I.S., late Teacher, Edinburgh. Carefully Bevised and Enlarged. With 5 Coloured Maps, Is.
:

White's System of Modern Geography with Outlines of AsTEOKOMT and Physical Geography comprehending an Account
;

of the Principal Towns, Climate, Soil, Productions, Religion, EducaWith tion, Government, and Population of the various Countries. Sacred Geography, Problems on the Globe, Exercises, etc. Carefully Bevised. 2s. 6d. ; or with 6 Coloured Maps, 2s. 9d.

Rudiments of Modern Geography.

LL.D.,

By Alex. Reid,

Improved. late Head Master of the Edinburgh Institution. 5 Coloured Maps, Is. The names of places are accented, and accompanied with short descriptions, and occasionally with the mention of some remarkable event. To the several countries are appended notices of their physical geography, productions, government, and religion; concluding with an outline of sacred geography, problems on the use of the globes, and directions for the construction of maps.

With

First

Dr

Book of Geography; being an Abridgment of Reid's Rudiments of Modem Geography, with an Outline of the Geography of Palestine. With Map of the World. Improved. 6d.
of Sacred Geography.
for

Dr Reid's Outline

6d.

An

Introductory Geography,

Junior Pupils,

By Dr
School,
6d.

James Douglas, lately Head Master, Great King Street Edinburgh. With Map of the World. Carefully Bevised.

Dr Douglas's Progressive Geography.

Carefully Bevised.
AtliencEum." The information the present state of knowledge."
is coplons, correct,

plan, showing recent changes on the Continent and elsewhere, and embracing much Historical and other Information. 160 pages, Is.
well put, and adapted to

On a new

Dr Douglas's Text-Book
Globe.

of Geography, containing the

all
;

Physical and Political Geography of

Maps,
38.

the Coimtries of the

or with 10

Systematically arranged. Carefully Remscd

2s. 6d.

Coloured

Class-Book

of

Geography.

By

William

Lawson,

F.R.G.S.. St Mark's College, Chelsea. complete Text-Book. Is. 6d.

With

7 Coloured Maps.

%*

Also sold in stparatf. Farli, each

I

to()l

a Coloured Map.viz.

Geooraphical Primer. 2d. England and Wales. 2d. Scotland and Ireland. 2d.

The British Colonies. 2d. Europe, "d. Asia, Aprica, and America.

4d.

The following four books have heen prepared hy Mr Lawson requirements of the New Code :

to

meet the additional

Geographical First Book; embracing Meaning and Use of a Map Size and Shape
Coloured Map.
2d.

Lessons on

the

of the World ; Geo; graphical Terms ; Hills and Mountains ; and Rivers. Designed to meet the requirements of Standards I. and II. With Diagrams and

England and Wales'

for

Reading-Book
Illustrations.

in
Is.

Geography

Standard III.

With Maps and

gives a great deal of Infonnation fthoiit England and Wales in this pleasant volume, not in the dry detailed manner of the geography, but rather in the descriptive style, which is the chief excellence of the Geographical Reader. The subject, however, is not over-described. Mr Lawson evidently describes the subject from a full mind, and scarcely a page turns over but what we find a little sketch map, or pleasing illustration. We do not remember seeing a Geographical Reading Book on England and Wales that, on the whole, we like so well as this."
Ifalinnal

f^chnolmaster."

Mr LawBOn

Schoolmaster." This

new Geographical Reader presents a compact

outline

of the physical features and industrial character of England and Wales, arranged in fifty chapters. It is written in a plain, straightforward style, seeking ra*her to convey information than to strike the reader by any rhetorical flourishes."

Edvcat'onnl Times. "Lawson's 'England and Wales' consists of carefully writtpn lessons, with cuts prepared to illustrate the text. In this case the pictures are generally a real help, and rarely distract attention."

Primary Physical Geography; embracing Lessons on

Latitude and Longitude; the Seasons; Day and Night; Climate; Vegetable and Animal Productions. Designed to meet the additional requirements of Standards V. and VI. With Diagrams and Coloured Maps. 2d.

Lawson's
Map.

Elements

of

Physical Geography.

With

Examination Papers. Adapted to meet the requirements of Standard V U. of the New Code, and for Pupil Teachers. With Coloured
96 pages.
6d. in stiff wrapper, or 8d. cloth.

Lawson's
3s. 6d.

of Physical Geography, with Examination Papers. A complete view of the whole subject, combining simplicity of style with scientific accuracy. New Edition,

Text-Book

Geography and Astronomy.

Lawson's Outlines of Physiography. With In Two Parts. Price 23. 6d. New Edition.
This manual
is

11
Illustrations.

intended as a Text-Rook of Physiography as prescribed by the syllabus of the Science Department, South Kensington. In Part I., which corresponds with the Elementary Stage of the subject, the Earth is considered apart from other portions of the universe, and chiefly in relation to the materials of which it is composed, the forces which act upon those materials, and the distribution of vegetable and animal life. In Part II. the Earth is considered as a planet, and its position in the solar system, as well as its relation to the distant stars, are pointed out.

The Parts may le had separately , price

Is. 6d. each.

Educational News. "So far as the Science and Art examinations are concerned, no better book could be used."

Geography of the British Empire.

With Maps and Diagrams.
Classes.
3s.
I.

Carefully Revised. For Pupil Teachers and Advanced

Paet

II. Physical, Political,

Outlines of Mathematical and Physical Geography. and Commercial Geography of the British
Islands.

III. Phyrical, Political,

and Commercial Geography of the British

Colonies.

News." For advanced pupils we know nothing better." Scotsman." Deservedly one of the most popular text-books of its kind." Tlie Board Teacher." About perfect as a text-book for pupil teachers and
Educational

students in general."

Oliver and Boyd's

Handy

Atlas of the World, showing

8vo,

32 full-coloured Maps. Eecent Discoveries. bouud, and suited for the book-shelf, 2s. Gd.

very neatly

Oliver

and Boyd's School Atlas,

sliowlng Recent Dis-

coveries.

Roman Empire with Diagram

32 large full-coloured Maps, including Palestine and the of Geographical Terms. Price Is. ;
;

Reid's Elements of Astronomy for Schools and Private Study. Beviseli and brought domi to the present state of Astronomical Science, by Rev. Alex. Mackav, LL.D., Author of " iManual of Modern Geography," etc. With 66 Wood Engravings. 3s. Reid's Elements of Physical Geography; with Outlines of Geology, JIathematical Geography, and Astronomy, and Questions for Examination. With numerous Illustrations, and a
large coloured Physical Chart of the Globe.
Is.

Murphy's Bihle Atlas

Descriptions.

of

24

Maps,

with

Historical

Reduced

to Is.

coloured.

HISTORY.
In this department have been prepared with the greatest care. They will he found to include Class-books for Junior and Senior Classes in all the branches of History generally taught in the best schools. While the utmost attention has been paid to accuracy, the narratives have in every case been rendered as instructive and pleasing as possible, so as to relieve the study from the tediousness of a mere dry detail of facts.

The works

History of England for Junior Classes; with Questions Edited by Henry White, B. A. Trinity College, for Examination.
Cambridge, M.A. and Pli.D. Heidelberg.
Is. 6d.
" cheap and excellent history of England, admirably adapted AtJienceum. for the use of junior classes. Tlie various changes that have taken place in our constitution are briefly but clearly described. It is surprising how successfully the editor has not merely avoided the obscurity which generally accompanies brevity, but invested his narrative with an interest too often wanting in larger historical works. Tlie information conveyed is thoroughly sound ; and the utility of the book is much increased by the addition of examination questions at the end of each chapter. Whether regarded as an interesting reading-book or as an instructive class-book, this history deserves to rank

high.

History of Great Britain and Ireland

with an Account
its

of the present State and Resources of the United Kingdom and With Questions and a Map. By Dr White. 3s. Colonies.

Aihenceum." A carefully compiled history for the use of Schools. The writer has consulted the more recent authorities: his opinions are liberal, and on the whole just and impartial: the succession of events is developed with clearness, and with more of that pictaresque effect which so deliglits the

young than

is

common

in historical abstracts."

Observer. " It is decidedly one of the best 'works yet furnished for the information of those who seek to acquire a good general knowledge of the political and social history of the British Empire."

History of Scotland; with Questions

Edited by

for

Examination.

Dr White.
;

Is.

History of France
Map.
Edited by

with Questions for Examination, and a

3s. 6d.

Dr White.

Athenaeum." The concluding chapter on the Intellectual Progress of France will be found to be a practical guide to the young student through the extensive but perilous fields of French literature. Dr White is remarkably happy in combining convenient brevity with sufficiency of information, clearness of exposition, and interest of detail. He shows great judgment in apportioning
to each subject its due

amount

of consideration."

Outlines of Universal History.

features, close

Edited by

Dr White.

Spectator. "TUstinct in its arrangement, skilful in its selection of leading and clear in its narrative."

Dr White's Elements

of Universal History.
;

On

New
;

and Systematic Plan. In Three Parts. Part I. Ancient History Part II. History of the Middle Ages Part III. Modern History.

With a Map of the World.

7s.

or in Parts, 2s. 6d. each.

The author has divided the history into periods of centuries, preserving at the same time such distinctness and continuity in the narrative tliat the annals of each country may he separately studied. The work contains numerous synoptical and other tables, to guide the researches of the student, with sketches of literature, antiquities, and manners during each of the great chronological epochs.

Outlines of the History of Rome; with Questions Examination. Edited by Dr White. Is. 6d.
London Review.

for

abridgment is admirably adapted for the use of scliools, the best book that a teacher could place in the hand of a youthful
student."

"This

Sacred History, from the Creation of the World

Destruction of Jerusalem. Edited by Dr White. Is. 6d.
Baptist Magazine.
inspire the young with a love mind with knowledge."

With Questions

for

to the Examination.

"An interesting epitome of sacred history, calculated to

of the divine records, as well as to store the

Elements of General History, Ancient and Modem. To which are added, a Comparative View of Ancient and Modem Geography and a Table of Chronology. By Alexander Fraseb
Tytler, Lord Woodhouselee, formerly Professor of History in the University of Edinburgh. New Edition, with the History continued. With two large Maps, etc. 3s. 6d.

Watts' Catechism of Scripture History, and of the

the

Condition of the Jews from the Close of the Old Testament to Time of Christ. With Intboduction by W. K. Tweedie
2s.

D.D.

Simpson's Goldsmith's History of England With the Narrative brought down to the Middle of the Nineteenth Century, To which is added an Outline of the British Constitution. With
;

Questions for Examination at the end of each Section.

3s. 6d.

Simpson's Goldsmith's History of Rome. With Questions

for

Examination

at the

end of each Section.

3s. 6d.

14

Writing, Arithmetic,

and Book-keeping.

WRITING, ARITHMETIC, AND BOOK-KEEPING.

Arithmetic adapted to the New Code, in Three By Alex. Tiotter, Teacher of Mathematics, Edinburgh.
Pabt

I.

Parts.

II.

The Simple Rules, ... 36 The Compound Rules, 36

.
.

III. Practice to Decimals,

pages. pages. 52 pages.

2d.

2d. 3d.

Answers, 3d. Answers, 3d. Answers, 3d.

.*

Or strongly bound

in one Volume, price 8d.

Practical Arithmetic for Junior Classes.

By Henry

G. C. Smith, Teacher of Arithmetic and Mathematics in George Heriot's Hospital. 66 pages, 6d. stifif wrapper. Answers, 6d.

From

tht Rev. Philip Kelland, A.M., F.R.SS. L. E., late Fellow of Queen's College, Cambridge, Professor of Mathematics in lite University of Edinburgh.

&

"I am glad to learn that Mr Smith's Manual for Junior Classes, the MS. of which I have examined, is nearly ready for publication. Trusting that the Illustrative Processes which he has exhibited may prove as eflBcient in other hands as tliey have proved in his own, I have great pleasure in recommending the work, being satisfled that a better Arithmetician and a more judicious Teacher than Mr Smith is not to be found."

Practical Arithmetic for Senior Classes

System.

being a Con-

tinuation of the above; with Tables and Exercises on the Metric

By Henry

G. C. Smith.

2s.

Answers, 6d.

Key,

2s. 6d.

't* ^e. Exercises in both works, which are copious and original, have been constructed so as to combine interest with utility. They are accompanied by illustrative processes.

Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes.

Trotter.
71 pages, 6d.
stiff

By James
Answers, 6d.

wrapper

or 8d. cloth.

This book was carefully revised, and enlarged by the introduction of Simple Examples of the various rules, worked out at length and fully explained, and of Practical Exercises, by the Author's son, Mr Alexander Trotter, Teacher of Mathematics, etc., Edinburgh and to the present edition Exercises on the proposed Decimal Coinage have been added.
;

Lessons in Arithmetic for Advanced Classes; Being

a Continuation of the Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes. Containing Vulgar and Decimal Fractions Simple and Compound Proportion, with their Applications Simple and Compound Interest Involution and Evolution, etc. By Alexander Trotter. New Edition, with Tables and Exercises on the Metric System. 80 pages, Answers, 6d. 6d. in stiflF wrapper or 8d. cloth.
; ; ; ;

Each subject

is

also accompanied

by an example

fully

worked out and

minutely explained.

The

Exercises are numerous and practical.

Writing, Arithmetic,

and Book-keeping

15
and

Complete System of Arithmetic.

Practical
to
; ;

Theoretical

containing the Fundamental Rules, and their Application Mercantile Computations Vulgar and Decimal Fractions ; Involution and Evolution; Series; Annuities, Certain and Contingent.

By Mr Trotter.

Ss.

Key,

43. 6d.

' * All the 3400 Exercises in this work are neio. They are applicable to the business of real life, and are framed in such a way as to lead the pupil to reason on the matter. There are upwards of 200 Examples wrought out at length and minutely explained.

Ingram's Principles of Arithmetic, and

to Business explained in a

their Application

by Simple Rules and Numerous Examples.

Popular Manner, and clearly Illustrated Eemodelled and greatly Enlarged, with Tables and Exercises on the Metric System. By Alexander Trotter, Teacher of Jilathematics, etc., Edinburgh. Is.

Key,

2s.

The Elementary Rules are explained in concise and intelligible language Each rule is followed by an example adapted to the capacity of youth. wrought out at length, and is illustrated by a great variety of practical
questions applicable to business.

Melrose's Concise System of Practical

Arithmetic;

containing the Fundamental Rules and their Application to MercanExchanges; tile Calculations; Vulgar and Decimal Fractions; Involution and Evolution; Progressions; Annuities, Certain and Contingent, etc. Re-arranged, Improved, and Enlarged, with Tables and Exercises on the Metric System. By Alexander Trotter, Teacher of Mathematics, etc., in Edinburgh. Is. 6d. Key, 2s. 6d.

Each rule is followed by an example worked out at length and minutely The Rules will be found explained, and by numerous practical Exercises. so arranged as to lead the pupil by an easy gradation from the simplest to the most difficult operations in arithmetic.

Hutton's Book-Keeping, by Trotter,

Sets of

2s.
;

Ruled Writing Booiti. Single Entry, per

set, Is. 6d.

Double Entry,

per

set, Is. 6d.

Stewart's First Lessons in Arithmetic, for Junior Classes; containing Exercises in Simple and Compound Quantities arranged
so as to enable the Pupil to perform the Operations with the greatest With Exercises on the Proposed Decimal facility and correctness.

Coinage.

6d. stiff wrapper.

Answers, 6d.

Stewart's Practical Treatise on Arithmetic, Arranged for Pupils in Classes. With Tables and Exercises on the Metric
for

System. Is. 6d. This work includes the Answers; with Questions Examination. Key, 23.

Gray's Introduction to Arithmetic; with Tables and

Esereisea on the Metric System.
lOd.

bound

in leather.

Key,

23.

16

Copy-Books^ Mathematics^

etc.

Lessons in Arithmetic for Junior Classes. By James Maclaeen, Edinburgh. With Answers annexed. 6d.

Maclaren's Practical Book-Keeping.

Is. 6d.
this

Set

of Ruled Wnting Books, expressly adapltdfor

work,

Is.

6d.

Scott's First Lessons in Arithmetic.

Scott's Scott's

6d.

Answers, 6d.

Mental Calculation.

6d.

Teacher's Copy, 6d.

Copy Lines,

in a Progressive Series, 4d. each.

PHILOSOPHY, MATHEMATICS, ETC.

Text-Book to Kant.
esthetic,
Categories,

The Critique of Pure Reason Schematism. Translation, Reproduction,

:

With Index and Biographical Sketch. By J. Commentary. HcTCHisoN Stirling, LL.D., Author of " The Secret of Hegel." 8vo, Us.

A Handbook
Geometry

by James Hutchi.son Stikunq, LL.D.

of the History of Philosophy. By Dr Albert Sciiwegler. Eighth Edition. Translated and Annotated Crown 8vo, 6s.
for Schools. Comprising Books I. and II. of Euclid, with Adcitms and Numerous Exercises. By A. J. G. Barclat, M.A., Mathematical Master in George Watson's College, Edinburgh. Is. bound. Second Edition now ready.

Schoolmaster. "ThorongMy practical." Sdwobnistress. "We can safely recommend it. Glasgow Herald. "A text-book of exceptionally bigb merit."

Ingram's Concise System of Mathematics,

Theoretical Improved by and Practical, for Schools and Private Students. James Trotter. With 340 Woodcuts. 4s. 6d. Key, 3s. 6d.

GEOMETRICAL DRAWING.
The First Grade Practical Geometry.
for the use of

Intended chiefly

Drawing Classes in Elementary Schools taught in connexion with the Department of Science and Art. By John Kennedy, Head Master of Dundee School of Art. 6d.

Music, School Registers,

etc.

17

SCHOOL SONGS WITH MUSIC.

Elements of Vocal Music: An Introduction to the Art of Reading Music at Sight. B7 T. M. Hdnter, Director to the
Association for the Revival of Sacred Music in Scotland.

Price 6d.

This Work has hem prepared with great care, and is the result of long practical experience in teaching. It is adapted to all ages and classes, and toill be found considerably to lighten the labour of both teacher and pupil. The exercises are printed in the standard notation, and the notes art named as in the original Sol-fa System.

Contents. Music Scales. Exercises in Time. Syncopation. The Chromatic Scale. Transposition of Scale. The Minor Scale. Part Singing. Explanation of Musical Terms.

Hunter's School Songs.

With Preface by Rev. James

60
Songs,
principally set
:

Cdreie, Training College, Edinburgh.

FOR JUNIOR CLASSES:

voices.

for

two

First Series.

4d. Second Series

6d.

63 Songs.

4d.

FOR ADVANCED CLASSES:

voices.
*;st*

First Series.

44 Songs, principally set for three Second Series : ^6 Hongs. 6d.

2d.

TONIC SOL-FA
in Price.

Edition of Hunter's Songs, both Series, Reduced

Jdnior Classes, 2d.Advanced Classes,

Hunter's National School Song Book, composed

Duets, Trios, Choruses, and Rounds.

Tonic Sol Fa.

of Songs, 89 Songs. 4d.

Songs for Schools. Written and Composed by Clift Wade. With Simple Accompaniment for Harmonium or Pianoforte.
Price 6d.
the

The Tunes will be found easy, melodious, and of moderate compass, and Words simple and interesting; both being easy to teach and remember.
*:j^*

Second Series
:

of

Wade's Songs

is

now

ready, price 6d.

School Psalmody

58 Pieces for Three Voices.

4d,

School Register.

Pupil's

Daily Register of Marks.

Improved Editimi. Containing Spaces for 48 Weeks ; to whicli are added, Spaces for a Summary and Order of Merit for each Month, for each Quarter, and for the Year. For Schools in general, and constructed to furnish information required by Government. 2d.

School Register of Attendance, Absence, and Fees

adapted to the Provisions of the New Codes for England and Scotland. By Morris F. Mykon, F.E.LS. Each folio will serve 54 pupils for a Quarter. Is.

Class-Books by

CMS. HENRI SCHNEIDER,

etc.
;

F.E.I.S., M.C.P.,

Lato senior French Master in

and Watt Institution,

of Scotland, etc,

tlie Edinburgh High School, the School of Arts French Examiner to the Educational Institute

and comprebenda Grammatical Exercises, with Rules; Reading Lessons, with Notes; Dictation; Exercises in Conversation; and a Vocabulary of all the Words in the Book. Easy Lessons are given in translating French into English and English into French, with Exercises for translation and retraoslation and repetition.

Is. Sd. Schneider's First Year's Frencli Course. %* TbiB work forms a Complete Course of French for Beginners,

The Edinburgh High School French ConversationGliAMMAK, arranged on an entirely New Plan, with Questions
and Answers.
3s. 6d.

Dedicated, by permission, to Fro/essor

2s. 6d.

Max

MiMer,

Key,

Letter from

Pbofebbob

Max MBllkb,

University of Oxford.

" My Deae Sib, I am very happy to find that my anticipations as to the success of your Grammar have been fully realized. Your book does not require any longer a godfather; but if you wish me to act as such, I shall be most happy to have my name connected with your prosperous child. Yours very truly, " To Mons. C. H. Schneider, Edinburgh High School."

Max

M3li<kb.

The Edinburgh High School

New

Practical French

READER: Being a Collection of Pieces from the best French Authors. With Questions and Notes, enabling both Master and Pupil to converse in French. 3s. 6d.
The Edinburgh High School French
CoNYEBaATiON and Commeecial Correspondence.

Manual
2s. 6d.

of

In this work, Phrases and Idiomatic Expressions which are used most frequently in the intercourse of every-day life have been carefully collected. Care has been taken to avoid what is trivial and obsole^te, and to introduce all the modem terms relative to railways, steamboats, and travelling in general.

crin Littraire: Being a

Collection of Lively Anecdotes, Jkux de Mots, Enigmas, Charades, Poetry, etc., to serve 3s. 6d. as Readings, Dictation, and Recitation.

Progressive
Donaldson.

French

Composition.
;

Dedicakd

Partie Anglaise, with Notes, 3s.

Dr to Partie Fran9aise, 3s.

collection of Htunorous Pieces chiefly from the French, translated into English for this work, and progressively ananged,

Being a

with Notes.

French.

19

Standard Pronotmcmg Dictionary of the French and ENGLISH LANGUAGES. In Two Parts. Part L French and English. Vast II. English and French. By Gabeiel Sdbenne,
late Professor in the Scottish Naval and Military Acadenay, etc. The First Part comprehends Words in Common Use, Terms connected with Science and the Fine Arts, Historical, Geographical, and Biographical Names, with the Pronunciation according to the French Academy and the most eminent Lexicographers and Grammarians. The Second Part is an ample Dictionary of English words, with the Pronunciation according to the hest Authorities. The whole is preceded hy a Practical and Comprehensive System of French Pronunciation. 7s. 6d., strongly bound.

The Pronuncio Iwn

is

shown hy a

different spelling

of the Words.
-

Surenne's

and French - English DICTIONARY, without the Pronunciation.

2
;

English
3s. 6d.,

French
stiff

strongly bound.
Is,

Surenne's Fenelon's Telemaque.

wrapper or bound together,
wrapper
2s. 6d.

vols.,

each,

Surenne's Voltaire's Histoire

stiflf
;

de Charles XII,

Is.

or Is. 6d. bound.

Surenne's Voltaire's Histoire de Russie sous Pierre

LE GRAND.
or
Is. 6d.

2 vols.,

Is.

each; or bound together,

Is.

2s.

6d,

Surenne's Voltaire's
bound.

La Henriade.

stiff"

wrapper;
Introduc-

Surenne's
tion to

New

French Dialogues.

With an

French Pronunciation, a Copious Vocabulary, and Models of Epistolary Correspondence. Pronunciation marked thrmi.ghmit- 2s.

Surenne's
tion
;

New

French

Manual

and

Traveller's

Containing an Introduction to French Pronunciaa Copious Vocabulary; a very complete Series of Dialogues on Topics of Every-day Life ; Dialogues on the Principal Continental Tours, and on the Objects of Interest in Paris ; with Models of Epistolary Correspondence. Map. Pronunciation marked throughout.
3s. 6d.

COMPANION.

Surenne's

Pronouncing

French Primer.

Containing

the Principles of French Pronunciation, a Vocabulary of easy and Is. 6d. stiflf wrapper. familiar Words, and a Selection of Phrases.

Surenne's Moliere's L'Avare

Comdie.
bound.
:

6d., or Is.

bound.
:

Surenne's
Comdie.

Moliere's
6d. stiff

Le

Bourgeois
Is.

Gentilhomme
Comdie.
Is.

wrapper; or

Surenne's Moliere's Le

Misanthrope
6d.
stiff

Le

K AaiAOE FORCE

Comdis.

wrapper ; or

bound.

First French Class-Book, or a Practical and Easy Method of learning the French Lanquage, consisting of a series of French and Enqlish Exercises, progressively and grammaticallj arranged. By Jdles Caron, F.E.I.S., French Teacher, Edin. Is. Key, Is.
This work follows the natural mode in which a child learns to speak its own language, by repeating the same words and phrases in a great variety of forms until the pupil becomes familiar with their use.

Caron's First French Reading-Book

Interesting Lessons, pro^essively arranged. lary of the Words and Idioms in the Text.

Being Easy and With a copious Vocabu:

Is.

The
him

object of this
tlie

French,

correct models of

work is to make the pupil familiar with both forms of language of books and the language of conversation, by giving French as it is written and French as it is spoken.

Caron's Principles of French Grammar. With numeroixs Exercises. 2s. Key, 2s. Spectator. " May be recommended for clearness of exposition, gradual progression, and a distinct exhibition to the mind through the eye by means of typographical display : the last an important point where the subject admits of it."

An Easy Grammar

of the French language.

With

ExERCisEa and Dialogues. By John Modern Languages. Is. 4d. Key, 8d.

Christison, Teacher of

Christison's Recneil r Usage de la Jeunesse.

Christison's

la

de
Is.

Fables
4d.

et

Contes Choisis,

Jeunesse.

Fleury's Histoire de France, Raconte With Translations of the difficult Passages. 2s. 6d.

The French

New

Testament.

The most approved Pro-

testant VER.SION, and the one in general use in the French Reformed Churches. Pocket Edition, roan, gilt edges. Is. 6d.

Chambaud's Fables

taining the meaning of all the

Choisies. Words.

With a Vocabulary conBy Scot and Wells. 2s.

3s. 6d.

Hallard's French Grammar.

Key,

3s. 6d.

Grammar

of the French Language.

By A. Beljame,
28.

B.A., LL.B., Vice-Principal of the Paris International College.

Beljame's Four Hundred Practical Exercises.

,* Both Books hound together, 3s.

28.

M.

The whole work has been composed with

a view to conversation, a great

number of the Exercises being in the form of questions andaiuirers.

Latin and Greek.

21

EDINBURGH ACADEMY CLASS-BOOKS.

1.

Rudiments of The latin Language,

the Edinburgh

Academy. In Two Parts. LL.D., author of "Greek Syntax," etc.

for the Use of By James Clyde, M. A.,

12mo, price 23.; or in

Two

Parts, sold separately, price Is. 3d. each.

It is divided into two parts, each containing the same number of sections nnder the same headings, in which the same subjects are treated of in Part 1. with a view to beginners, in Part II. with a view to advanced students.

is a very full, correct, and well-arranged gramof the Latin language, and is wonderfully cheap. It compares favourably with the Clarendon Press Elementary Grammar. Distinguishing features are the simple but effective device of making two parts of accidence, instead of relegating important matter to the comparative obscurity of an appendix, and the rejection of the objectionable method of combining a reader and exercises with the grammar."

Athenieum. "This volume

mar

Educational News. " A fresh, thorough, and methodical treatise, bearing on every page evidences of the author's ripe scholarship and rare power of lucid
expo.sition."

\*

The old edition of

the

EDixBtmoH Academj Latin Eodiments moy

be

still

had if desired.

2. Latin Delectus; with a Explanation of every Word and

in the Text.
3s.

Vocabulary
Difficult

containing an Expression which occurs

3.

Rudiments of The Greek Language,

with the Syntax

entirely re-written, and with Accent and Quantity treated of according to their mutual relations. 3s. 6d.

4.

Greek Extracts;
Explanation of every
the Text.
3s. 6d.

with

Vocabulary containing an
more
Difficult Passages in

Word and

of the

Compendious Greek Grammar

for the use of Colleges and Schools. By \V. D. Geddes, M. A., LL.D., Principal, late Professor of Greek, in the University of Aberdeen. New Edition, Revised and largely Keconstructed. 4s.

Scotsman. "One of the best working college use that are before the public."

Greek Grammars

for school or

Greek Syntax By Jas. Clyde,

Academy.

with a Rationale of the Constructions. LL.D., lately a Classical Master of the Edin. S. Blackie, lately Professor of Greek in the University of Edinburgh. 5th Edition. Revised throwjliovt and largeli/ re-irritten, containing an English Summary for the use of Learners, and a chapter on Accents. 4s. 6d.
;

With Prefatory Notice by John

Latin and Greek.

DR HUNTER'S
1.

CLASSICS.
Is. 6cL

Hunter's Euddiman's Rudiments. Hunter's Sallust;

Reduced
to Is.
;

2.

with Footnotes
with

and Translations.
Illustrations.

3.

Hunter's Virgil
Reduced
to 2s.

Notes

and other

4.
5.

Hunter's Horace. Hunter's Livy.

and Explanatory Notes.

Beduced
Reduced

to Is.

M.
With
Critical

Books XXI.

to

XXV.

to 23.

Dymock's Caesar

with Illustrative Notes, a Historical and

Geographical Index, and a

Map

of Ancient Gaul.

43.

Dymock's Sallust;
Caesar
;

with

Explanatory Footnotes
Reduced
f

and

Historical and Geographical Index.

Is.

Notes,

with Vocabulary explaining every Word in the Text Map, and Historical Memoir. By William M'Dowall,
Heriot Foundation Schools, Edinburgh.
3s.

late Inspector of the

M'Dowall's Csesar. Book I. ing every Word in the Text. Is.

;

With Vocabulary

explain-

M'Dowall's Virgil with Memoir, Notes, and Vocabulary explaining every Word in the Text. 3s.
Lectiones Selectse
or, Select Latin Lessons in Morality, ; History, and Biography for the use of Beginners. With a Vocabulary explaining every Word in the Text. By 0. Melville, late of the Grammar School, Kirkcaldy. Is. 6d.
:

Ainsworth's Latin Dictionary, by Duncan. 1070 pp.

9s.

A New

First Latin Course;

Exercises, with Vocabularies. Master of George Watson's College for Beys, Edinburgh.

comprising Grammar and By Geo. Ogilvie, M.A., LL.D., Head

Is. 6d.

*,* In the Neto Edition, the number of the Simpler Exercises has been increased and the book rendered more generally useful by an Appendix on Irregular Declensions, Prosody, the Soman Calendar, and the Subjunctive Mood. Educational News." Exceedingly well adapted for the purpose for which it Banffihire Journal. " An admirable book." is intended." Educational Times. " Well and carefully done." *,* This Claia-booJc supplies sufficient work /or a f/ear, without the necessity of using any other book.

Latin and Greek.

23
Grammar,

A New

First Greek Course

comprising

Syntax, and Exercises; with Vocabularies containing all the V/ords in the Text. By Tiios. A. Stewart, oneof H.M. Inspectors of Schools in Scotland, lately Senior Classical Master in George Watson's College Schools, Edinburgh, and formerly Assistant-Professor of Greek in the University of Aberdeen. 2s. 6d.
AthencEum.

"Superior to most works of the kind." Record." The easiest, and most practical, and most useful introduction to

Greek yet published

. . .

Educational Neiiis. "This little book deserves the highest commendation Great skill is shown in selecting those facts of Accidence and Syntax which ought to be given in such a book. *,* This Class-book supplies sufficient work/or a year, without the necessity of using any other book.

in this country."

Stewart's

Advanced

Greek

Course.

Comprising

Synopsis of Greek Syntax, Hints towards Composition, Exercises in Continuous English Narrative, and a full Vocabulary containing all the Words in the Text. 2s. 6d.
Educational News. " This is an admirable little manual, and will form an excellent sequel to the author's deservedly popular First Greek Course.' " Glasgow Herald. " The synopsis of synta.^ is masterly, and the more useful and important idioms are clearly put before the student."
'

Key

to Ditto, price 2s. 6s.

Stewart's
Reduced

Cornelius Nepos;

with Notes, Chronological

Tables, and a Vocabulary explaining every

to 2s.

Word

in the

Text.

Duncan's Greek Testament.

3s. 6d.

Xenophon's Anabasis, Books I. and II. with Vocabulary giving an explanation of every Word in the Text, and a TransBy James Fergusson, M.D., lation of the more Difficult Phrases.
;

late

Rector of the West

End Academy, Aberdeen.

.

2s. 6d.

The copious, correct, and Athenoeum. "This admirable little work. . . well-arranged Vocabulary at the end contains good translations of difRcult passages, with exact information upon points of antiquities, derived from the best and most modern authorities."

Homer's

Iliad,

Books

I.,

VI., XX.,
;

and XXIV.
2s. 6d.

from

Bekker's Text, as revised by Dr Veitch with Vocabulary explaining every Word in the Text, and a Translation of the more
Difficult Passages.

By Dr FEEacssON. Reduced to
.

Alhenceum." The portions selected are suitable. and meaning of each word are well explained, and

The

all difficult

derivation phrases are

appropriately translated." <?ttordton. "The Vocabulary Is painstaking nd elaborate."

24

Latin,

Greek,

etc.

LATIN ELEMENTARY WORKS AND CLASSICS.

Edited by Geobqb FEBonsON, LL.D., lately Professor of Hnmanity in King's College and University of Aberdeen, and formerly one of the Masters of the Edinburgh Academy.
1.

Ferguson's Grammatical Exercises.

and a Vocabulary explaining every Word.

With
2s.

Notes

2s. Key,

2.

Ferguson's Introductory Latin Delectus:

to follow the Latin
;

Intended

Explanation of every

Eudiments with a Vocabulary containing an Word and of every DifBcult Expression.

Reduced
3.

to Is. 6d.

Ferguson's Ovid's Metamorphoses.

With Notes and

2s. 6d.

Index, Mythological, Geographical, and Historical.

4.

Ferguson's Ciceronis Orationes Selectae.

pro Lege Milone.

Containing

Manilla, IV. in Catilinam, pro A. L. Archia, pro T. A. Ex Orellii recensione. Reduced to Is.

ITALIAN.
Theoretical
a

and Practical Italian Grammar;

to

with

numerous Exercises and Examples,

Selection of Phrases
Italian

Tutor

illustrative of every Eule, and and iJialogues. By E. Lemmi, LL.D., H.K.H. the Prince of Wales. 5s. Key, 6s.

From Count Saffi, Professor of the Italian Language at Oxford. " I have adopted your Grammar for the elementary instruction of students of Italian in the Taylor Institution, and find it admirably adapted to the purpose, as well for the order and clearness of the rules, as for the practical excellence and ability of the exercises with which you have enriched it."

GERMAN.
A New German
in Prose and Verse with a Grammatical and Etymological Vocabulary, containing the Meaning Forms of Commercial ami other of all the Words in the Text Correspondence, and Specimens of German National Hanawriting. For the Use of Schools. By Charles Fischer-Fischaet, of the Edinburgh Merchant Company's Educational Institutions, etc. Reduced to 2s. 6d.

Reader,

Fischart's
a series of
etc.

German Class-Book
German
Stories,

for Beginners:

Being

On

an Original Plan.

with Vocabulary, Grammar, Exeroisea, Enlarged Editwn. Is. 6d.

:

PUBLISHED BY OLIVER AND BOYD, EDINBURGH

60LD ALSO BY SIUPEIS, MABSBALL, AND
CO.,

LONDON, AND ALL BOOKSELLERg.

Oliver

and Boyd's Educational Works.

LATIN AND GREEK.
^

^
6

Clyde's (Dr) Greek Syntax,

witli Notice

by Professor

Blackie..., 4

Kdikburgh Acadkmy Latm Kudimeiits

New Kdition by Jas. Clyde, LL.D. 2 Do. 3 Latin Delectus, with Vocabulary 3 6 Greek Kudiments Greek Extracts, with V ocabuUry and Index 3 6 Fbbguson's (Professor) Grammatical Exercises [Tlie Key, 2s.]... 2 6 1 Introductory Latin Delectus, with Vocabulary 2 Ovid's Metamorphoses, with Notes and Index Ferousson's Xenophon's Anabasis, Books I. and II., with Vocab. 2 6 Homer'slliad,BooksI.,VI.,XX.,XXIV.,with Vocab. 2 6 Geddes's (Principal) Greek Grammar, for Colleges and Schools.. 4 6 1 Huntek's Ruddiman's Latin Rudiments M'Dowall'b Gasar, with Vocabulary, Notes, Map, and Memoir.. 3 3 Virgil, with Vocabulary, Notes, and Memoir Melville's Lectiones Selecta;, for Beginners, with Vocabulary.. 1 6 6 \ Ooilvie's (Dr) New First Latin Course Stewabt's Cornelius Nepos, with Notes, Index, and Vocabulary 2 6 2 6 (Thomas A.J New First Greek Course Advanced Greek Course fA'f^, 2s. 6d.]... 2 6

FRENCH.
BELJAME'sFrencli Grammar,2s. I''renchExercises,28. Complete 3 1 Gabon's First French Glass-Book (The Kty, Is.J 1 First French Reading-Book, with Vocabulary 2 French Grammar, with Exercises [The Key, 2s.] CHASiBAnD'sFablesGhoisies, by Scot and Wells, with Vocabulary 2 Chbistison's Easy Grammar of the French Language [A'ey, 8d.]. 1 Recueil de Fables et Contes Choisis, with Vocab... 1 2 Fleury's Histoire de France 1 French New Testament, Protestant Version 3 Hallard's French Grammar [The Key, 3s. 6d.] Schneider's French Conversation Grammar [The Key, 2s. 6d.]... 3 Edinburgh High School New Practical French Reader 3 2 French Manual of Conversation, etc
EcrinLittraire; forReading,Dictation,&Kecitation 3
1 First Year's French Course 3 Surbnne's French Manual and Traveller's Companion 2 New French Dialogues French and English Dictionary,without Pronunciation 3 7 Pronouncing French and English Dictionary Fnlon'sTlmaque, 2vols.,eachls.; bound together 2

4 4 6

6
6 6 6 6

6
6 6 6

6
6

Voltaire's Histoire deCharlesXII.,stiffwrapper(bd. 1/6) 1 each 1 Histoire de Russie, 2 vols 1 La Henriade (bound, Is. 6d.) Molire's L'Avare Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme.. each

ITALIAN

AND GERMAN.
5s.]

Lemmi's Theoretical and Practical Italian Grammar[Thefl'e!/, Fischabt's German Glass-Book for Beginners (a Course) New German Reader, with Vocabulary

5
1

6
6

Oliver

and Boyd's Educational Works.

PHILOSOPHY AND MATHEMATICS.

..

d.

Text-Book to Kant 14 Handbookof the History of Philosophy. By Dr Schwegler 6 Baeclay'3 Geometry. Euclid, Books I. & II., with Additions and
STlBLlJfo's (Dr Iliitchisnn)

Exercises IsGEAJi's System of ilatliematics, by Trotter [Key, 3s. 6d.]

WRITING, ARITHMETIC, AND BOOK-KEEPING.

10 Gbat's Introduction to Arithmetic [The Key, 2s.'] 2 Hcttok's Book-keeping, by S. & D. Entry, by Trotter I 6 Two Ruled Writing-Books for Ditto Single Entry Double Entry 1 6 Ijjgbam's Principles of Arithmetic, Improved Edition [Key, 2s.] 1 MACLAREN'sArithmeticfor Junior Classes, -with Answers annexed 6 System of Practical Book-keeping 1 6 6 1 A set of Ruled Writin,c-Books adapted for the Work Melrose's Arithmetic, by Ingram and Trotter \^Key, 2s. 6d.] 1 6
:

Scott's First Lessons in Arithmetic [^swers, 6d.1 Mental Calculation, Pupil's Copy, 6d.; Teacher's Copy....
Lines, ."0 Sorts .....each Smith's Practical Arithmetic for Junior Classes \Ansv)ers, 6d.].... Arithmetic for Senior Classes [^nsi/jers, 6d.; Key, 2s. 6d.] 2 Stewart's First Lessons in Arithmetic [Annwers, 6d.] Practical Arithmetic, Improved Edition [The Key, 2s. J 1 Trotter's Arithmetic adapted to the New Code. Parts I. and 11^ each 2d.; Part III., 3d. In 1 vol., Sd. ^nsifers, 3d. each Part .arithmetic for Junior Classes [^(iswers, 6d.] Arithmetic for Advanced Classes \ Answers, &A'\ Complete System of Arithmetic [The Key, 4s. 6d.] 3
:

6
6

Copy

4
6 6

6 6

Keitsedt's First Grade Practical Geometry

Object-Lesson Cards on the Vegetable Kingdom 20 in a Box_.21 on the Animal Kingdom; 14 in a Box 21 on the Mineral Kingdom; 14 in a Box 21 Ross's How to Train Young Eyes and Ears 1 Glasgow Infant School Magazine, compiled by Caughie, 1st and 2nd Series, each, bound 3
;

SCHOOL REGISTERS.
Myron-'s School Register of Attendance, Absence, and Fees, adapted to the Provisions of the New Codes for England and Scotland. Each folio serves 54 pupils for a quarter Pdpil's Daily Register of Marks. Spaces for 48 Weeks with Spaces for a Summary and Order of Merit for each month, for each quarter, and for the year
;

*.' A Specimen Copy of most of these WorTiS sent to Bead Teachers POST FREE, on reuiptof half price in stamps, by Oliver and Boyd, Edinburgh.